JP6311760B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  More specifically, for the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  In addition, in the slot machine, there is known a configuration in which an effect device such as a liquid crystal display device is provided in addition to the reel device, and the interest of the game is improved through the effect executed by the effect device. Further, in the configuration in which the effect device is provided as described above, an effect control unit is provided separately from the main control unit that performs the lottery process and the reel drive control, and the effect control unit controls the effect device. Therefore, a configuration that reduces the processing load of the main control means is also known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-295707 A

  Here, it is necessary to further optimize the configuration in the configuration in which the processing load of each control unit is reduced by providing a plurality of control units as in the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this respect. is there.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably reducing the processing load of the control means.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 includes a pattern display means including a plurality of variable display units for variably displaying a pattern;
Starting operation means operated to start variable display of the pattern;
A role lottery execution means for executing a role lottery process when the start operation means is operated;
A plurality of stop operation means provided in correspondence with the variable display unit and operated to stop variable display of the pattern in the corresponding variable display unit;
The variable display section corresponding to the stop operation means is started based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the variable display of the picture in the plurality of variable display sections is started based on the start operation means being operated. Variable display control means for controlling the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern is stopped,
A winning correspondence granting means for granting a prize corresponding bonus to a player based on the fact that the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped;
In a gaming machine equipped with
As the winning combination selected by the winning lottery process, when a winning is made in the winning lottery process, a predetermined winning combination in which a predetermined winning occurs regardless of the stop order of variable display of the pattern in each variable display unit, and the plurality And an order corresponding role in which a corresponding winning occurs when variable display of the pattern in the variable display portion is stopped in a predetermined order,
First control means having the variable display control means, and second control means for executing predetermined control based on transmission information transmitted by the first control means,
The first control means includes
Order selection means for selecting the order in which the variable display of the pattern in each variable display unit should be stopped when the specified combination is won in the combination lottery process;
Order identifying means for identifying the occurrence of a correct order event in which variable display of the pattern in each variable display unit is stopped in the order selected by the order selecting means;
With
The second control means includes
Predetermined order notification control means for notifying the predetermined order in a specific gaming state;
Selection order notification control means for notifying selection order information corresponding to the order selected by the order selection means;
In a predetermined situation where a new execution of the specific gaming state is started when one execution of the specific gaming state is completed in a state where the continuation condition of the specific gaming state is satisfied, Notification determining means for performing notification of the selection order information by the selection order notification control means;
Different order notification control means for notifying the different order information corresponding to an order different from the order selected by the order selection means when the situation is different from the predetermined situation;
With
The first control means includes
Means for causing an external output state corresponding to the corresponding winning based on the occurrence of the corresponding winning;
Based on the fact that the correct order event has been specified a plurality of times by the order specifying means without causing an event that the correct order event does not occur in the middle when winning the specified role, Means for achieving a corresponding external output state;
With
The prescribed combination is a combination having the highest probability of winning in the combination lottery process at least in the specific gaming state.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably reduce the processing load of the control means.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the slot machine in the first embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine showing a state where the front door is opened. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the symbol which can be visually recognized from a display window, and a combination line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. (A)-(g) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of a stop symbol when each winning a prize generate | occur | produces. (A)-(g) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of a stop symbol when each winning a prize generate | occur | produces. (A) It is a front view of an acquisition number display part and an internal state alerting | reporting part, (b) It is a front view of a privilege point alerting | reporting part and a stock alerting | reporting part, (c) It is a front view of a victory number alerting | reporting part. It is an electrical block diagram of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process performed in main side MPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for non-internal states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for internal after states. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of a reel, and the winning aspect established. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the winning data performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the winning determination process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the CB state process performed in main side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the transition of the game state generate | occur | produced under control of the main side MPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the light emission control aspect of an internal state alerting | reporting part. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st weight setting process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd weight setting process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus AT management process performed in main side MPU. It is a timing chart which shows a mode when it becomes the 1st special replay win or a disapproval result in the state after CB inside. It is a timing chart which shows a mode when it becomes the 2nd special replay winning or the 3rd special replay winning in the CB inside after state. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between a CB middle state and a bonus AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the periodic process performed in sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the standby production | presentation setting process performed in sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for CB performed by sub side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the transfer aspect from a non-AT state to AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the non-AT process performed in sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer chance management process performed in sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process in transition chance performed by sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ceiling game management process performed in sub side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each game state contained in AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the process in AT performed by sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT state before branch performed in sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 1st addition performed by sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the addition state performed in sub side MPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting control process performed in sub side MPU, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for stock alerting | reporting. (A) It is a timing chart for demonstrating a mode that privilege points are distributed and added to multiple games in AT state before a branch, (B1)-(B4) The light emission aspect of a privilege point alerting | reporting part and a stock alerting | reporting part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the branch AT state performed in sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for branch AT states performed in sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd addition process performed in sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the completion | finish process of the branch AT state performed in sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of AT state before branching performed by sub MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the advancing aspect of a branch AT state, (B1)-(B6) is a figure which shows simply the content of the battle effect in an image display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the AT continuation probability in an AT continuation lottery process is promoted. It is a timing chart which shows the transition timing to the addition state in the AT state before branching and the branching AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the addition state performed in sub side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the addition mode of an addition state, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a privilege point counter. It is a flowchart which shows the process for last chances performed with sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for bonus AT performed by sub side MPU. (A) It is the schematic for demonstrating the outline | summary of the electrical structure of the game hall in which many slot machines were installed, (b) It is a front view of the external terminal board provided in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process at the time of completion | finish performed with main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the bell winning determination process performed in main side MPU. It is a timing chart which shows a mode that the output state of AT1 signal is changed in relation to a bell combination. It is a flowchart which shows the normal replay push order determination process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process at the time of starting performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for normal replay performed by sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for push order avoidance performed by sub side MPU. It is a timing chart which shows a mode that the output mode of an AT1 signal is changed in relation to a normal replay combination. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process before the start performed by main side MPU. It is a timing chart which shows the output mode of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal when shifting to the normal AT state triggered by the bonus AT state. It is a timing chart which shows the output mode of AT1 signal and AT2 signal when it transfers to bonus AT state in the middle of normal AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the AT1 signal and AT2 signal which are performed in the main side MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the last chance state performed in sub side MPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the completion | finish process of the normal AT state performed in sub side MPU in 4th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment when the present invention is applied to a slot machine which is a kind of gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 is formed in a box shape with the front surface opened as a whole by fixing a plurality of wooden panels.

  A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so that the inner space of the housing 11 can be opened and closed with the left side portion as a rotation axis. Note that the front door 12 is locked so as not to be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the rear surface thereof, and this locked state is released by an unlocking operation with a predetermined key on the key cylinder 14.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 for notifying the player of the game state is provided on the upper side of the central portion of the front door 12. The gaming panel 20 is formed with three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that the central axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R correspond to the display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R on a one-to-one basis. Yes. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be visually recognized through the corresponding display window 21L, 21M, 21R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are projected as if moving from top to bottom through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

  Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor (not shown), and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can be individually rotated, that is, independently driven by the driving of each stepping motor. It has become.

  As shown in FIG. 1, on the lower left side of the game panel 20, a start lever 41 that is operated to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided. When the start lever 41 is operated while a medal is inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate all at once.

  On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are provided. The stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are respectively disposed directly below the display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped. Each of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44 can be stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed after the left reel 32L starts to rotate.

  The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating based on the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44, and a medal is awarded. Until the execution of various processes such as management of the game state is completed, it corresponds to one game.

  On the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R, there is provided a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals as investment values. As shown in FIG. 2, the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 is guided to the hopper device 53 by the selector 52 provided on the back surface of the front door 12 when it can be inserted, and when it cannot be inserted. The medal discharge port 58 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 leads to the medal tray 59. The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a winning corresponding to the medal grant is established on the effective line. Yes.

  A return button 46 is provided below the medal slot 45 when the medal inserted into the medal slot 45 is jammed in the selector 52, as shown in FIG. Also, on the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum amount of credited virtual medals that can be bet at once and two virtual medals are inserted at a time. There are provided a second credit insertion button 48 for inserting a virtual medal and a third credit insertion button 49 for inserting one virtual medal at a time.

  An adjustment button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. In other words, the slot machine 10 has a credit function for storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (for 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement button 51 is operated under the stored and stored condition, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal discharge port 58 as an actual medal.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a power supply device 54 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 53 inside the housing 11. The power unit 54 includes a power button 55 that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and the setting state of the slot machine 10 from “setting 1” to “ And a setting key insertion hole 57 operated to change within the range of “setting 6”.

<Patterns attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R>
Next, symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be described.

  FIG. 3 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Further, numbers from 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and these numbers are in a state that the main controller 70 can be visually recognized from the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. It is a number for recognizing a symbol, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number is used for explanation.

  As symbols, “bell” symbol (for example, 20th of left reel 32L), “replay 1” symbol (for example, 19th of left reel 32L), “watermelon” symbol (for example, 18th of left reel 32L), “Red 7” symbol (for example, 15th of left reel 32L), “Replay 2” symbol (for example, eleventh of left reel 32L), “BAR” symbol (for example, tenth of left reel 32L), “Cherry” There are nine types of symbols (for example, the ninth of the left reel 32L), “Replay 3” symbol (for example, the sixth of the left reel 32L), and “White 7” symbol (for example, the fifth of the left reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 3, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are completely different.

  FIG. 4 is a front view of the display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R. Each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R is formed so that there are three symbols that allow the entire symbol to be visually recognized among the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel. For this reason, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

  In the slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect positions where the symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate with the prescribed number of medals bet and a winning corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, a benefit of paying out medals, replaying Or the privilege of transition of the gaming state is given.

  That is, in the slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line where a winning can be established. The main line ML is set not as a line extending in a straight line but as a bending line. Therefore, the sub-line SL1 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. Sub-line SL3 connecting the connected subline SL2, the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the lower symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R On the line extending in a straight line such as the sub-line SL4 connecting the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the sub-line SL5 connecting the upper symbol of the right reel 32R, Even if a combination is established, no winning is achieved. Note that the number of main lines is not limited to one, and may be two, three, four, or five or more. In such a configuration in which a plurality of main lines are set, the number of main lines depends on the number of bets. The number of main lines to be activated may be different. The main line is not limited to a bent line, and may be a line extending in a straight line.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols to be awarded and a privilege to be given when the prize has been won will be described. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols for winning a prize and a privilege given when winning a prize, and FIGS. 6 (a) to 6 (g) and FIG. 7. (A)-FIG.7 (g) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of a stop symbol when each winning a prize generate | occur | produces.

  As the small prize winning for which medals are paid out, there are the first to twelfth supplementary prize, the first bell prize, the second bell prize, the first watermelon prize, and the second watermelon prize.

  Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is any one of “White 7” symbol, “BAR” symbol, “Red 7” symbol, and “Watermelon” symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is The “replay 1” symbol, the “replay 2” symbol, or the “replay 3” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is any one of the “replay 1” symbol, the “replay 2” symbol, and the “replay 3” symbol. If it is, it becomes one of the first supplementary prize to the ninth supplementary prize. If the “Red 7” symbol, “Bell” symbol, and “Bell” symbol are stopped from the left on the main line ML, the tenth supplementary prize is awarded, and the “BAR” symbol, “Bell” symbol from the left on the main line ML When the “bell” symbol is stopped, the eleventh supplementary prize is awarded. When the “watermelon” symbol, the “bell” symbol, and the “bell” symbol are stopped from the left in the main line ML, the eleventh supplementary prize is awarded. In the case of any of the first supplementary prize to the twelfth supplementary prize, one medal is paid out at the time of three bets, and two medals are paid out at the time of two bets.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the “bell” symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is any one of the “replay 1” symbol, the “replay 2” symbol, and the “replay 3” symbol, When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is a “bell” symbol, a first bell win is obtained. In the case of winning the first bell, four medals are paid out when three bets are placed, and two medals are paid out when two bets are placed.

  In the case of the first bell winning, as shown in FIG. 6A, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become “bell” symbols in the lower subline SL4. A player can easily recognize that a winning is achieved when the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed on a straight line. In this case, the combination of the same “bell” symbols is stopped and displayed at the time of the first bell winning, thereby making it easy for the player to recognize the occurrence of winning in the configuration in which the winning establishment mode in the main line ML is diversified. It becomes possible.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a “bell” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “bell” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a “cherry” symbol and a “watermelon” symbol. If it is either, the second bell wins. In the case of winning the second bell, nine medals are paid out when three bets are placed, and two medals are paid out when two bets are placed.

  In the case of the second bell winning, as shown in FIG. 6B, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become “bell” symbols in the subline SL5 that rises to the right. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second bell has been won. Further, the line where the combination of the “bell” symbols is stopped and displayed when the second bell is won is the subline SL5, which is different from the subline SL4 where the combination of the “bell” symbols is stopped and displayed when the first bell is won. Due to this difference, it is possible for a player who determines whether or not there is a winning combination based on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed to distinguish the first bell winning from the second bell winning.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is any one of “Replay 1” symbol, “Replay 2” symbol and “Replay 3” symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is “Watermelon” symbol, When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is the “watermelon” symbol, the first watermelon prize is awarded. In the case of the first watermelon winning, 4 medals are paid out when 3 bets are placed, and 2 medals are paid out when 2 bets are placed.

  In the case of the first watermelon winning, as shown in FIG. 6C, all of the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be “watermelon” symbols in the sub-line SL1 that is descending to the right. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first watermelon prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of the left reel 32L, the “watermelon” symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When the left reel 32L is stopped at a timing when the “cherry” symbol passes through the upper, middle, or lower tiers, the combination of the “watermelon” symbol is stopped and displayed on the subline SL1 when the first watermelon winning is made.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the “watermelon” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is either the “BAR” symbol or the “red 7” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is “ In the case of the “watermelon” symbol, it becomes the second watermelon prize. In the case of the second watermelon winning, four medals are paid out when three bets are placed, and two medals are paid out when two bets are placed.

  In the case of the second watermelon winning, as shown in FIG. 6 (d), all of the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become “watermelon” symbols in the lower subline SL4. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second watermelon prize has been won. The line where the combination of the “watermelon” symbol is stopped when the second watermelon prize is won is the subline SL4, which is different from the subline SL1 where the combination of the “watermelon” symbol is stopped when the first watermelon prize is won. Due to this difference, it is possible for a player who determines whether or not there is a winning combination based on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed to distinguish between the first watermelon winning and the second watermelon winning.

  As a prize to be given a replay privilege that allows a player to play the next game without betting a medal (or virtual medal), a normal replay prize, a first bell replay prize, a second bell replay prize, There are a cherry replay prize, a second cherry replay prize, a first special replay prize, a second special replay prize, a first special replay prize, a second special replay prize, and a third special replay prize.

  Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is any one of “White 7” symbol, “BAR” symbol, “Red 7” symbol, and “Watermelon” symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is When the “Replay 1” symbol, “Replay 2” symbol, or “Replay 3” symbol is selected, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is either the “White 7” symbol or the “Watermelon” symbol, the normal replay winning It becomes.

  In the case of a normal replay winning, as shown in FIG. 6E, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are “Replay 1”, “Replay 2”, and “Replay 3” in the middle subline SL3. One of the symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a normal replay prize has been won.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is any one of “White 7” symbol, “BAR” symbol, “Red 7” symbol, and “Watermelon” symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is “Cherry” symbol. When the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is either the “cherry” symbol or the “watermelon” symbol, the first bell replay winning is achieved.

  In the case of the first bell replay winning, as shown in FIG. 6F, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become “bell” symbols in the upper subline SL2. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first Bell Replay prize has been won. The line where the combination of “Bell” symbols is stopped and displayed in the first Bell Replay winning is the subline SL2, and the subline SL4 where the combination of “Bell” symbols is stopped and displayed in the first Bell winning and the second Bell winning combination. This is different from the subline SL5 in which the combination of “bell” symbols is stopped. Due to this difference, a player who determines whether or not a winning combination is determined based on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped can be distinguished from the first bell winning prize and the second bell winning prize. It becomes possible.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is any one of “Replay 1” symbol, “Replay 2” symbol, and “Replay 3” symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is “Bell” symbol, When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is any one of the “white 7” symbol, the “red 7” symbol, and the “BAR” symbol, the second bell replay winning is achieved.

  In the case of the second bell replay winning, as shown in FIG. 6G, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become “bell” symbols in the middle subline SL3. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second Bell Replay prize has been won. In addition, the line where the combination of “Bell” symbols is stopped and displayed in the second Bell Replay winning is the subline SL3, and the subline SL4 where the combination of “Bell” symbols is stopped and displayed in the first Bell winning, This is different from the subline SL5 in which the combination of the “bell” symbol is stopped and the subline SL2 in which the combination of the “bell” symbol is stopped and displayed in the first bell replay winning. Due to this difference, a player who judges whether or not a winning combination is determined based on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped is changed to the first bell winning prize, the second bell winning prize, and the first bell replay winning prize. It is possible to distinguish them.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a “bell” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “cherry” symbol, the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a “white 7” symbol, and a “cherry” symbol. And if it is one of the “watermelon” symbols, it becomes the first cherry replay prize.

  In the case of the first cherry replay winning, as shown in FIG. 7A, all of the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be “cherry” symbols in the sub-line SL1 that descends to the right. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first cherry replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of the left reel 32L or the right reel 32R, the combination of “cherry” symbols is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When a winning combination corresponding to the first cherry replay winning is won, the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12 tries to stop and display the “cherry” symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. Motivational effects are executed. When the stop button 42-44 is operated to stop displaying the “cherry” symbol after confirming the production, two “cherry” symbols or three “cherry” symbols are stopped in the subline SL1. Can be displayed.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the “bell” symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is any one of the “replay 1” symbol, the “replay 2” symbol, and the “replay 3” symbol, When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is any one of the “white 7” symbol, the “cherry” symbol, and the “watermelon” symbol, the second cherry replay winning is achieved.

  In the case of winning the second cherry replay, as shown in FIG. 7 (b), the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can all be “cherry” symbols in the upper subline SL2. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second cherry replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of “cherry” symbols is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When a winning combination corresponding to the second cherry replay winning is won, the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12 tries to stop and display the “cherry” symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. Motivational effects are executed. When the stop button 42-44 is operated to stop displaying the “cherry” symbol after confirming the effect, two “cherry” symbols or three “cherry” symbols are stopped in the subline SL2. Can be displayed. Further, the line in which the combination of “cherry” symbols is stopped and displayed in the second cherry replay winning is the subline SL2, and is different from the subline SL1 in which the combination of “cherry” symbols is stopped and displayed in the first cherry replay winning. Due to this difference, it is possible for a player who determines whether or not there is a winning combination depending on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed to distinguish between the first cherry replay winning and the second cherry replay winning.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is any one of “Replay 1” symbol, “Replay 2” symbol, and “Replay 3” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is “Replay 1” symbol, “Replay” In the case of either “2” symbol or “Replay 3” symbol, the first special replay prize is awarded. Note that the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is arbitrary as to whether or not the first special replay winning is achieved.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a “watermelon” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “bell” symbol, the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a “replay 1” symbol, and “replay 2”. In the case of either the symbol or the “Replay 3” symbol, the second special replay winning is obtained.

  When the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the “white 7” symbol and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the “white 7” symbol on the main line ML, the first special replay winning is achieved. Note that the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is arbitrary as to whether or not the first special replay winning is achieved.

  In the case of the first special replay winning, as shown in FIG. 7C, all of the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are “white 7” in the right-down subline SL1 and the right-up subline SL5. Can be. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first special replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of “white 7” symbols is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When the winning combination corresponding to the first special replay winning is won, the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12 tries to stop and display the “white 7” symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. An effect that is motivating to perform is executed. When the stop button 42-44 is operated to stop and display the “white 7” symbol after confirming the effect, the three “white 7” symbols can be stopped and displayed on the subline SL1. The effect can also be executed when a combination corresponding to the first special replay winning is not won.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either the “white 7” symbol or the “replay 1” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the “cherry” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is In the case of the “white 7” symbol, the second special replay prize is awarded.

  In the case of the second special replay winning, as shown in FIG. 7D, the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can all be “white 7” symbols in the upper subline SL2. In addition, all of the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be “white 7” symbols in the lower subline SL4. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second special replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of “white 7” symbols is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When the winning combination corresponding to the second special replay winning is won, the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12 tries to stop and display the “white 7” symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. An effect that is motivating to perform is executed. When the stop button 42 to 44 is operated to stop the display of the “white 7” symbol after confirming the effect, the three “white 7” symbols can be stopped and displayed in the subline SL2. The line where the combination of the “white 7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special replay winning is the subline SL2 or subline SL4, and the combination of the “white 7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special replay winning. And different from the subline SL5. Due to this difference, it is possible for a player who determines whether or not there is a winning combination based on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed to distinguish between the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning. The effect can also be executed when a combination corresponding to the second special replay winning is not won.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is any one of the “white 7” symbol, the “red 7” symbol, and the “watermelon” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the “cherry” symbol, and the right reel If the stop symbol of 32R is a “red 7” symbol, a third special replay prize is awarded.

  In the case of the third special replay winning, as shown in FIG. 7E, all of the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be “red 7” symbols in the lower subline SL4. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the third special replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of “red 7” symbols is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When the winning combination corresponding to the third special replay winning is won, the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12 tries to stop and display the “red 7” symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. An effect that is motivating to perform is executed. When the stop button 42-44 is operated to stop displaying the “red 7” symbol after confirming the effect, three “red 7” symbols can be stopped and displayed on the subline SL4. The effect can also be executed when a combination corresponding to the third special replay winning is not won.

  If any of the above replay wins is made, it is possible to play the next game while making bets unnecessary for both medals and virtual medals. Specifically, if one of the replay prizes is won in a game in which three medals are bet, the next game can be started in a three-bet state while making a bet unnecessary for both medals and virtual medals. It becomes possible. In addition, when any one of the replay winnings is made in a game where two medals are bet, it is possible to start a game of the next game in a two-bet state while making a bet unnecessary for both medals and virtual medals. .

  There is a CB (challenge bonus) prize as a state transition prize in which only the game state transition is performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a “red 7” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “BAR” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a “BAR” symbol. In some cases, CB wins. When the CB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

  The CB state is a gaming state in which when a combination of symbols corresponding to a small winning combination is stopped on the main line ML, a medal is paid out as a winning combination regardless of the winning combination. For example, even if “1” is not set in the winning flag corresponding to the first bell winning, if the combination of symbols corresponding to the first bell winning is stopped on the main line ML, the first bell winning is performed. The number of medals corresponding to is awarded to the player. On the other hand, the replay winning is established on the condition that the corresponding role is won by lottery.

  In the CB state, reel control different from the non-CB state that is not the CB state is performed. In the non-CB state, reel control capable of sliding up to a maximum of 4 symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In other words, in the non-CB state, it can be said that the reel control for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed until the specified time (190 msec) elapses after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. On the other hand, in the CB state, the reel control for the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, that is, the reel control similar to the normal game is performed, but the reel control for the left reel 32L is not performed. For the left reel 32L, reel control is performed so that the left stop button 42 is slid only up to one symbol after the left stop button 42 is operated. In other words, in the CB game state, it can be said that the reel control for stopping the left reel 32L is performed until a specified time (75 msec) shorter than the specified time elapses after the left stop button 42 is operated.

  In the CB state, if the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning is won, the replay winning is given priority, and if the replay winning is impossible, one of the small winnings is generated at 100%. In addition, if the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning is not won, any small winning combination is generated at 100%. In this case, in the CB state, the number of bets for each game is set to two. As described above, when the number of bets is two, the payout number of medals is two regardless of which small winning combination is established. Therefore, in the CB state, the payout number of medals when the small role winning is established is only two. Further, when a replay winning is established in the CB state, the bet number in the next game is two. Therefore, in the CB state, either the payout of two medals or the replay in the two-bed bet state occurs in each game where two bets are made, and in the CB state, the player's owned medals increase or decrease. do not do. The CB state is ended when the small role winning is generated 19 times.

  In the CB game, the reel control that can slide up to a maximum of one symbol is not limited to the left reel 32L, and the reel that corresponds to the first operated stop button can only slide up to a maximum of one symbol. Alternatively, reel control may be performed in which only a predetermined symbol is slid only for a predetermined reel. Further, the stop button operated in a certain order such that the reel control corresponding to the stop button operated second or the last operated stop button is controlled so as to slide up to a maximum of one symbol. Reel control may be performed so that the reel corresponding to 1 can slide only for one symbol at the maximum.

  As described above, there are small role winning, replay winning, and CB winning as the mode of winning, but the lottery result of the internal lottery includes a losing result in which all of these winnings cannot occur. And when it becomes a disengagement result, as shown in FIG.7 (f), while the combination of the "white 7" symbol can stop on the sub-line SL3 of a middle stage, as shown in FIG.7 (g), The combination of the “red 7” symbol can be stopped on the middle subline SL3. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the result is a detachment result. However, when the result is a losing result, the symbol combination corresponding to any of the above winning combinations is not stopped and displayed on the main line ML. In addition, since the line where the combination of the “white 7” symbol or the combination of the “red 7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the case of a miss result is the subline SL3, the first special replay winning, the second special replay winning and the third special replay winning In the case of a replay winning, the combination of the “white 7” symbol or the combination of the “red 7” symbol is different from the sub-line where it is stopped and displayed. Due to this difference, a player who judges whether or not a winning combination is determined based on whether or not a combination of the same symbols is stopped is displayed with respect to the first special replay winning, the second special replay winning and the third special replay winning. Can be distinguished.

<Apparatus for executing various notifications and various effects>
Next, an apparatus for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

  On the game panel 20 of the front door 12, a credit display unit 61 for displaying the number of virtual medals stored and stored at a position below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, and the number of medals obtained at the time of winning a prize are displayed. An acquired number display section 62 is provided. These display parts 61 and 62 are comprised by the 7 segment display, and monochromatic light emission type LED, such as green, is used for each segment.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 8A, the acquired number display unit 62 is provided with an internal state notifying unit 63 separately from the segment light emitting unit 62a for displaying the acquired number. The internal state notification unit 63 uses a single color light emitting type LED having a display color different from that of the segment light emitting unit 62a. In addition, the segment light emitting unit 62 a is disposed on the center side on the display surface of the acquired number display unit 62, whereas the internal state notification unit 63 is disposed on the corner side of the display surface of the acquired number display unit 62. Yes.

  The internal state notification unit 63 is a display unit for notifying that the player has won the CB combination. When winning the CB role, unlike the other winning roles, the winning state of the CB role is carried over until the CB winning state is carried over until the CB winning is established in the main line ML, and the winning state of the CB role is canceled. . In this case, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned off as a non-internal notification mode when the CB role is not won and in the CB state, and as an internal notification mode when the CB role is won. It is turned on. Although this lighting state is a state in which lighting is maintained, it may be configured to blink at a predetermined cycle instead.

  By providing the internal state notification unit 63, it is possible to notify the game hall manager or the like that the CB combination is being won. In addition, the segment light emitting unit 62a of the acquired number display unit 62 is turned on when a medal or virtual medal is given at the end of one game, and is turned off at the start of the next game. Will be maintained until a new small role winning is established. Therefore, in the configuration in which the internal state notifying unit 63 is arranged in the acquired number display unit 62 to prevent the player from becoming too conspicuous for the player, the acquired number display unit 62 is selected in a situation where the CB role is won. In this case, it is possible to positively cause a situation in which only the internal state notification unit 63 is lit, which makes it easier for the game hall manager to check the internal state notification unit 63. The effect of facilitating such confirmation can also be achieved when the internal state notification unit 63 has a light emission color different from that of the segment light emission unit 62a.

  In addition, you may use other indicators, such as a liquid crystal display device, as the segment light emission part of the credit display part 61 and the acquisition number display part 62, and the internal state alerting | reporting part 63. FIG. Even in this case, it is possible to facilitate the confirmation of the internal state notification unit 63 by setting the internal state notification unit 63 within the display surface of the acquired number display unit 62.

  On the upper part of the front door 12, an upper lamp 64 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right sounds that produce various sound effects as the game progresses and inform the player of the gaming state Speaker 65 and an image display device 66 such as a liquid crystal display device for providing various information to the player.

  Below the image display device 66, a privilege point notification unit 67 and a stock notification unit 68 are provided, and in the game panel 20, a victory number notification unit 69 is provided to the right of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R. It has been.

  FIG. 8B is a front view of the privilege point notification unit 67 and the stock notification unit 68. As will be described in detail later, when a predetermined role is won in the normal AT (assist time) state and a bonus point is won in the bonus point lottery process, bonus points are added, and the accumulated number of points is determined as a reference point. In the case of 7 points, the set number of times of the normal AT state is added once and the state shifts to the added state.

  The privilege point notifying unit 67 is for notifying the number of the remainder when the number of privilege points divided by 7 is 1 or more. The privilege point notifying unit 67 is provided with 7 × 2 unit point display units 67a each using a single color light emitting type LED, and these unit point display units 67a are arranged so that the stock notification unit 68 is sandwiched between them. Evenly arranged. Each of the pair of left and right display areas is provided with seven unit point display portions 67a. For example, when the number of privilege points is “1”, each one of the outermost pair in the left and right display areas For example, when the number of privilege points is “5”, the unit point display portions 67a for five from the outside are turned on in each of the pair of left and right display areas.

  The stock notifying unit 68 is for notifying the number of quotients when the number of privilege points divided by 7 is 1 or more. The stock notification unit 68 uses a multicolor light emitting type LED, and the number of stocks in the normal AT state is notified by the light emission color.

  FIG. 8C is a front view of the victory number notifying unit 69. As will be described in detail later, there are an AT state before branching and an AT state before branching in the normal AT state. When the normal AT state continues, as the battle effect, the victory effect of the ally character or the draw effect of the ally character and the enemy character is performed, and when the normal AT state does not continue, As the battle effect, a defeat effect of the teammate character is performed. If a predetermined number of times of winning effects are executed in a series of normal AT states, the winning probability in the continuous lottery in the normal AT state is set to the highest probability.

  The number-of-wins display section 69 is for informing the number of times that the victory effect has been executed in a series of normal AT states. The winning number display section 69 is provided with twelve unit winning number display sections 69a each using a single color light emitting type LED corresponding to a predetermined number of executions, and the unit winning number display section 69a has an outer edge. They are arranged in a circular shape. For example, when the number of win effects in a series of normal AT states is one, one unit victory number display portion 69a is lit, and, for example, five consecutive unit winning numbers are displayed when the number is five. The part 69a is turned on.

<Various control devices>
The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main controller 70 is attached to the back plate of the housing 11. The main control device 70 includes a main substrate, and the main substrate is housed in a substrate box as an encapsulating means made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are fastened together by a fastening unit so that they cannot be opened. When the substrate box is opened, it is necessary to release the fastening state, and a broken portion is generated when the fastening state is released. By confirming the presence or absence of the broken portion, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the substrate box has been opened.

  The slot machine 10 is provided with a sub controller 80 in addition to the main controller 70. The sub control device 80 is disposed on the front door 12 so as to overlap the rear of the image display device 66. Based on the command received from the main control device 70, the sub control device 80 controls the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, the image display device 66, the privilege point notification unit 67, the stock notification unit 68, and the victory number notification unit 69. . Note that the sub-control device 80 is similar to the main control device 70 in that a control board is accommodated in a board box.

<Electrical Configuration of Slot Machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  The main control device 70 includes a main control board 71 that controls the main control of the game. An MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71. The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 72 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 73 is executed. A RAM 74, a clock circuit 75 that outputs a rectangular wave with a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 72, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 72, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, and each Stop detection sensors 42 a, 43 a, 44 a that individually detect the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45 a that detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, and the credit insertion buttons 47, 48, 49. Credit insertion detection sensors 47a, 48a, 49a for individually detecting the operation of the payment, a payment detection sensor 51a for detecting the operation of the payment button 51, a payout detection sensor for the hopper device 53, and a reset detection sensor 56a for detecting the operation of the reset button 56. The setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57. And various sensors such as setting the key detection sensor 57a for detecting are connected to it, these signals from the sensors are input to the MPU 72.

  On the output side of the MPU 72, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), a payout motor of the hopper device 53, a credit display unit 61, an obtained number display unit 62, an internal state The notification unit 63 and the sub control device 80 are connected. In each game, the MPU 72 performs rotational drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R of the reel unit 31, and the hopper device 53 is controlled by the MPU 72 when a small winning combination is established and a medal is paid out. Is done. The display control of the credit display unit 61, the acquired number display unit 62, and the internal state notification unit 63 is directly executed by the MPU 72 without using another control device. A command is transmitted from the MPU 72 to the sub-control device 80 at each timing of each game.

  An external terminal board 90 is provided on the output side of the MPU 72. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 90 is provided adjacent to the main controller 70 on the back plate of the housing 11. Although details will be described later, the MPU 72 outputs various signals corresponding to the state of the slot machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall through the external terminal board 90.

  A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply unit 54 is equipped with a power supply unit and a power failure monitoring circuit for supplying driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 70. The power failure monitoring circuit is applied to the power source unit from an external power source. The monitored voltage is monitored, and when the voltage falls below the reference voltage, a power failure signal is output to the MPU 72. The MPU 72 executes power failure processing by receiving a power failure signal, and can return to the processing state before the power failure after power recovery. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power interruption unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as a power interruption during a situation where the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 in a situation where backup power can be supplied by the power supply unit during power interruption (for example, one or two days). Is done. However, the data stored in the RAM 74 is initialized by turning on the power of the slot machine 10 while pressing the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54.

  The sub-control device 80 includes a sub-control board 81 for executing execution control of various notifications and various effects. An MPU 82 is mounted on the sub control board 81. The MPU 82 includes a ROM 83 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 82 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 83 is executed. A RAM 84, a clock circuit 85 that outputs a rectangular wave with a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  Note that it is not essential that the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 82, but each may be made into a chip individually. Further, the RAM 84 is supplied with backup power from the power supply unit during power interruption of the power supply device 54 in a situation where the supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off, and the situation where the backup power is supplied (for example, one day). Or 2 days), data is stored and held in the RAM 84. However, the data stored in the RAM 84 is initialized by turning on the power of the slot machine 10 while pressing the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54.

  The MPU 82 is provided with an input port and an output port. As described above, the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 82 and receives various commands from the MPU 72.

  An upper lamp 64, a speaker 65, an image display device 66, a privilege point notification unit 67, a stock notification unit 68, and a victory number notification unit 69 are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. In the MPU 82, based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the light emission control of the upper lamp 64, the sound output control of the speaker 65, the display control of the image display device 66, the light emission control of the privilege point notification unit 67, the stock notification unit By executing the light emission control of 68 and the light emission control of the victory number notifying unit 69, various notifications and various effects are performed.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, the ROM 73, and the RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as the main side MPU 72, the main side ROM 73, and the main side RAM 74, respectively. They are referred to as MPU 82, sub-side ROM 83, and sub-side RAM 84.

<Processing executed by main MPU 72 and sub MPU 82>
Next, processing executed by the main MPU 72 and the sub MPU 82 will be described. First, the contents of basic processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described.

  The main MPU 72 can be roughly classified into a normal process that is repeatedly executed after execution of the main process started when the power is turned on, and a timer interrupt process that is started by periodically interrupting the normal process. Yes, for convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing will be described first, and then normal processing will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. The timer interruption process is started every 1.49 msec, for example.

  In the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 74. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag. If “1” is set in the power failure flag, the process proceeds to step S103, and processing at power failure is executed.

  The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power failure process, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, the process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process to terminate the command transmission. When the transmission of the command has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is stored in the main RAM 74. Thereafter, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a determination value for determining whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal when the power failure is eliminated is stored in the main RAM 74, thereby prohibiting subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed.

  When the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed. That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed to enable the next timer interrupt to be set for the main MPU 72 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving each stepping motor is performed. In step S107, the state of various sensors connected to the input port is read, and sensor monitoring processing for monitoring whether the read result is normal is performed. In step S108, timer calculation processing for subtracting the value of each counter or timer is performed. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the result of counting the number of medals bet and the number of payouts to the outside.

  In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands to the sub-control device 80 is performed. In step S111, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port is performed. In step S112, the value of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S101 is restored to the corresponding register in the main MPU 72. Thereafter, in step S113, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S201, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the sub-control device 80 and the like finish initialization. When the initialization of the sub-control device 80 and the like is completed, the process proceeds to step S203 to step S219.

  In step S203, it is determined whether the wait time before the start set in the previous game has elapsed. If the wait time before the start has not elapsed, the process of step S203 is executed again, and if the wait time before the start has elapsed, a start waiting process is executed in step S204. In addition, when the wait time before the start is set, when the negative determination is once made in step S203, the measurement of the wait time is started. If no wait time is set, the process proceeds to step S204.

  In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has occurred in the previous game. If any of the replay winnings has occurred, an automatic insertion process for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process ends. If no replay winning has occurred, it is determined whether or not the settlement button 51 has been operated. If the settlement button 51 has been operated, the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals are paid out. Perform medal return processing. After completion of the medal return process or when the settlement button 51 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 are operated between the previous start wait process and the current start wait process If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets or the like is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If neither the medal insertion nor the operation of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 is performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended as it is.

  After completion of the start waiting process, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the bet number of medals has reached a specified number ("3" or "2" in the present embodiment), and the bet number has not reached the specified number. In this case, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204. If the bet number has reached the specified number, the external output setting process before the start is executed in step S206. In the external output setting process, various settings for external output to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 90 are performed. Thereafter, in step S207, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated.

  If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204. On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a prescribed number of medals are betted. Means that a command has occurred. In such a case, after the main line ML is validated, bet acceptance is prohibited by controlling the selector 52 in step S208. Thereafter, in step S209, a lottery process for performing a lottery for the current game is executed, and in step S210, various settings for external output to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 90 are performed. Execute the external output setting process at the start of. In step S211, it is determined whether or not the freeze time set in the lottery process in step S209 has elapsed. If the freeze time has not elapsed, the process of step S211 is executed again, and if the freeze time has elapsed, the process after step S212 is executed. When the freeze time is set, measurement of the freeze time is started when a negative determination is made in step S211. If the freeze time is not set, the process proceeds to step S212 and subsequent steps.

  In step S212, a reel control process for controlling the driving of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed. Thereafter, in step S213, a medal payout process is executed. In the medal payout process, when a small prize winning is established in the current game, a process for giving a player a number of medals or virtual medals corresponding to the small prize winning is executed. Specifically, when a virtual medal is given, a value corresponding to the current small role winning is added to the virtual medal area provided in the main RAM 74, and the value of the virtual medal area reaches the maximum value. If the number of medals exceeds the maximum value, the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that medals for several minutes are paid out to the medal tray 59.

  Thereafter, in step S214, CB state processing for controlling the CB state is executed, in step S215, bonus AT management processing for controlling the bonus AT (assist time) state is executed, and in step S216, further. Then, an external output setting process at the end for performing various settings for external output to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 90 is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S217, it is determined whether or not “1” is set to the pre-start wait flag provided in the main RAM 74. If an affirmative determination is made in step S217, the process directly returns to step S201. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S217, it is determined whether a wait time has elapsed in step S218. If the wait time has not elapsed, the process of step S218 is executed again. If the wait time has elapsed, the bonus AT setting process is executed in step S219, and then the process returns to step S201. When the wait time is set, the measurement of the wait time is started when a negative determination is made in step S218. If the wait time is not set, the process proceeds to step S219.

  Hereinafter, the lottery process in step S209, the reel control process in step S212, the CB state process in step S214, and the bonus AT management process in step S215 will be described in detail. The external output setting process in steps S206, S210, and S216 will be described in detail after the game flow is described.

<Lottery processing>
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the lottery process in step S209 in the normal process (FIG. 11).

  In step S301, a random number used when determining whether or not the combination is correct is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and the main MPU 72 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the main RAM 74 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid occurrence of problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

  After acquiring the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for determining whether or not the winning combination is determined is read from the main ROM 73. In this slot machine 10, there are three types of gaming states with different lottery tables in the main MPU 72: a CB non-internal state, a CB internal rear state, and a CB in-progress state. In step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the content of the flag corresponding to the gaming state provided in the main RAM 74, and a lottery table corresponding to the gaming state is selected. Specifically, when the current gaming state is the CB non-internal state, the non-internal state lottery table is selected, and when the current gaming state is the CB internal rear state, the internal rear state lottery table is selected. When the current gaming state is the CB state, the CB state lottery table is selected.

  Further, in this slot machine 10, a six-stage winning probability from “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation is performed. Thus, it is possible to set which winning probability is to execute the internal processing. The internal rear state lottery table is prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with the six stages of setting states. In step S302, the internal rear state having the lowest expected value for paying out medals when the setting state is “setting 1”. The lottery table for internal use is selected, and in the case of “setting 6”, the lottery table for the internal rear state having the highest expected value for paying out medals is selected. On the other hand, only one type of non-internal state lottery table and CB lottery table are prepared so as to be common to all setting states.

  Each lottery table will be described. First, the non-internal state lottery table will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 13, an index value IV is set in the non-internal state lottery table, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set. . The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value of the free-run counter (“65535”).

  Specifically, the second bell winning data, the first supplementary winning data, the fifth supplementary winning data, and the ninth supplementary winning data are set for IV = 1. When the winning combination is IV = 1, as shown in FIG. 15, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in any other case, any one of the first supplementary winning, the fifth supplementary winning, and the ninth supplementary winning can occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the first supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize will occur.

  In IV = 2, as shown in FIG. 13, the second bell winning data, the second compensation winning data, the fourth compensation winning data, and the ninth compensation winning data are set. When winning is won with IV = 2, as shown in FIG. 15, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in any other case, any of the second supplementary winning, the fourth supplementary winning, and the ninth supplementary winning can occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the second supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize will occur.

  In IV = 3, as shown in FIG. 13, second bell winning data, second compensation winning data, sixth compensation winning data, and seventh compensation winning data are set. When winning is won at IV = 3, as shown in FIG. 15, the second stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the second stop is the middle reel 32M. The bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in any other case, any one of the second supplementary winning, the sixth supplementary winning, and the seventh supplementary winning can occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the second supplementary prize, the sixth supplementary prize, and the seventh supplementary prize will occur.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the second bell winning data, the third supplementary winning data, the fifth supplementary winning data, and the seventh supplementary winning data are set at IV = 4. When winning is won with IV = 4, as shown in FIG. 15, the second stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The Bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in any other case, any of the third supplementary winning, the fifth supplementary winning, and the seventh supplementary winning can occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the third supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize, and the seventh supplementary prize will occur.

  At IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 13, the first bell winning data, the first supplementary winning data, the third supplementary winning data, the fourth supplementary winning data, the fifth supplementary winning data, Supplementary winning data and ninth supplementary winning data are set. When winning is won with IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the first bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, In other cases, any of the first supplementary prize, the third supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize, the eighth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, any of the first supplementary prize, the third supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize, the eighth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize does not occur. there is a possibility. The probability that this loss will occur is lower than in the case of IV = 1-4.

  In IV = 6, as shown in FIG. 13, the first bell winning data, the first supplementary winning data, the second supplementary winning data, the fourth supplementary winning data, the sixth supplementary winning data, and the eighth Supplementary winning data and ninth supplementary winning data are set. When winning is won with IV = 6, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the first bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, In other cases, any one of the first supplementary prize, the second supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, the sixth supplementary prize, the eighth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, any of the first supplementary prize, the second supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, the sixth supplementary prize, the eighth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize does not occur. there is a possibility. The probability that this loss will occur is lower than in the case of IV = 1-4.

  In IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 13, the first watermelon winning data, the second watermelon winning data, the tenth supplementary winning data, the eleventh supplementary winning data, and the twelfth supplementary winning data are set. ing. In the case of winning with IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the first watermelon winning or the second watermelon winning may be established. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that neither the first watermelon winning nor the second watermelon winning will occur. Further, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, any of the tenth supplementary prize, the eleventh supplementary prize, and the twelfth supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the tenth supplementary prize, the eleventh supplementary prize, and the twelfth supplementary prize will occur.

  In IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 13, normal replay winning data is set. When winning is won with IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 15, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44.

  In IV = 9, CB winning data is set as shown in FIG. When winning is won with IV = 9, a CB winning can occur regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, there is a possibility that a CB winning will not occur depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

  When the non-internal state lottery table is selected, the probability of winning when IV = 1, the probability of winning when IV = 2, the probability of winning when IV = 3, and IV = 4 The probability of winning each is about 1 / 9.3, the probability of winning when IV = 5, and the probability of winning when IV = 6 is about 1 / 11.6 respectively. The probability of winning when IV = 7 is about 1 / 66.7, the probability of winning when IV = 8 is about 1/7, and the probability of winning when IV = 9 is It is about 1 / 4.3.

  Next, the internal rear state lottery table will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the internal rear state lottery table is set with an index value IV, as in the non-internal state lottery table. Each index value IV is associated with a winning combination. And a point value PV is set.

  The winning data set with IV = 1 to 8 is the same as in the lottery table for the non-internal state.

  In IV = 9, first bell replay winning data and first cherry replay winning data are set. When winning is won with IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the first bell replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In other cases, the first cherry replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

  In IV = 10, as shown in FIG. 14, second bell replay winning data, first cherry replay winning data, and first special replay winning data are set. When winning is won with IV = 10, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second bell replay winning or the first special replay winning occurs. In this case, the second bell replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, whereas the first special replay winning occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. To do. When IV = 10 is won and the left reel 32L is first stopped, when the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 is the timing at which the second bell replay winning can be generated, the second bell replay winning is achieved. The first special replay winning is generated when it is time to prioritize the occurrence of the second bell replay winning. When the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, the first cherry replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

  In IV = 11, as shown in FIG. 14, first bell replay winning data, first cherry replay winning data, second special replay winning data, and third special replay winning data are set. In the case of winning with IV = 11, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the first bell replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. . In other cases, a first cherry replay prize, a second special replay prize, or a third special replay prize occurs. In this case, the second special replay winning and the third special replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, whereas the first cherry replay winning is determined by the stop buttons 42 to 44. It occurs regardless of the operation timing. When IV = 11 is selected and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped, the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 enables the second special replay winning or the third special replay winning. If it is, the second special replay prize or the third special replay prize is given priority, and if the second special replay prize or the third special replay prize is not possible, the first cherry replay prize is given. Will occur.

  In IV = 12, as shown in FIG. 14, second bell replay winning data, first cherry replay winning data, first special replay winning data, and second special replay winning data are set. When winning is won at IV = 12, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second bell replay winning or the first special replay winning occurs. In this case, the second bell replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, whereas the first special replay winning occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. To do. When IV = 12 is won and the left reel 32L is first stopped, if the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 is the timing at which the second bell replay winning can be generated, the second bell replay winning is achieved. The first special replay winning is generated when it is time to give priority to the occurrence of the second bell replay winning. Further, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, the first cherry replay winning or the second special replay winning occurs. In this case, the second special replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, whereas the first cherry replay winning occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. To do. When IV = 12 is selected and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped, the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing when the second special replay winning can be generated. When the generation of the 2 special replay winning is given priority and the second special replay winning cannot be generated, the first cherry replay winning is generated.

  In IV = 13, as shown in FIG. 14, the second bell replay winning data, the first cherry replay winning data, the first special replay winning data, and the first special replay winning data are set. When winning is won at IV = 13, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second bell replay winning or the first special replay winning occurs. In this case, the second bell replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, whereas the first special replay winning occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. To do. When IV = 13 is won and the left reel 32L is first stopped, when the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing at which the second bell replay winning can be generated, the second bell replay winning is achieved. The first special replay winning is generated when it is time to give priority to the occurrence of the second bell replay winning. In addition, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, the first cherry replay winning or the first special replay winning occurs. In this case, the first special replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, whereas the first cherry replay winning occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. To do. When IV = 13 is won and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped, the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing when the first special replay winning can be generated. When the occurrence of one special replay winning is given priority and the first special replay winning cannot be generated, the first cherry replay winning is generated.

  At IV = 14, as shown in FIG. 14, the first cherry replay winning data is set. When winning is won with IV = 14, as shown in FIG. 15, the first cherry replay winning is surely generated regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. .

  In IV = 15, as shown in FIG. 14, second cherry replay winning data is set. When winning is won with IV = 15, as shown in FIG. 15, the second cherry replay winning is surely generated regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. .

  In IV = 16, as shown in FIG. 14, first special replay winning data and second special replay winning data are set. When winning is won with IV = 16, as shown in FIG. 15, the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning occurs regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, the second special replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, whereas the first special replay winning occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. To do. In the case of winning with IV = 16, when the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing at which the second special replay winning can be generated, the second special replay winning is given priority. When it is the timing at which generation of the special replay winning is impossible, the first special replay winning is generated.

  When the internal post-state lottery table is selected, the probability of winning when IV = 1, the probability of winning when IV = 2, the probability of winning when IV = 3, and IV = 4 The probability of winning each is about 1 / 9.3, the probability of winning when IV = 5, and the probability of winning when IV = 6 is about 1 / 11.6 respectively. The probability of winning when IV = 7 is about 1 / 66.7, the probability of winning when IV = 8 is about 1 / 2.9, and the chance of winning when IV = 9. The probability is about 1/65, the probability of winning when IV = 10 is about 1/135, the probability of winning when IV = 11 is about 1/3277, and when IV = 12. The probability of winning is about 1/1456, the probability of winning when IV = 13 is about 1/1456, and when IV = 14 The probability of winning is about 1/212, the probability of winning when IV = 15 is about 1/185, the probability of winning when IV = 16 is about 1/328, and IV = The probability of being a winning result that is not won in any of 1 to 16 is 1/65536.

  Next, the lottery table for the CB state will be described.

  In the CB state lottery table, as in the non-internal state lottery table and the internal rear state lottery table, an index value IV is set, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination. A point value PV is also set. In the lottery table for the CB state, only normal replay winning data is set with IV = 1, and other winning data is not set. Further, the winning probability is the same as in the case of the internal rear state lottery table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the winning probability of the normal replay combination is higher or lower than in the case of the internal rear state lottery table may be used.

  In the CB state lottery table, only the normal replay combination is set as described above. However, as described above, in the situation where the normal replay combination is not won in the CB state, the small combination prize is won regardless of the result of the lottery process. The reel control is executed so that any small combination winning is surely generated in a situation where the replay combination is not won normally. Therefore, in the CB state, when the normal replay combination is won, the normal replay winning is surely generated, and when the normal replay combination is not winning, any small combination winning is surely generated.

  Returning to the description of the lottery process (FIG. 12), after selecting the lottery table in step S302, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and in step S304, a determination value DV used for determining whether or not the winning combination is set. To do. In the determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value acquired in step S301 is set as the current determination value DV, and a new point value PV corresponding to 1 as the current index value IV is added to the random value. The determination value is DV.

  Thereafter, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. In the combination determination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If the value exceeds 65535, the process proceeds to step S306, and winning data acquisition processing for setting the winning combination data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 is executed.

  In the winning data acquisition process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16, first, in step S401, a corresponding winning flag setting process is executed. For example, when IV = 1 is won in a situation where the CB is in the after state, among the flags provided in the main side RAM 74, a flag indicating that the winning is achieved with IV = 1, and the second bell winning “1” is set to each of the flag, the first compensation winning flag, the fifth compensation winning flag, and the ninth compensation winning flag. Also, for example, when winning in IV = 8 in the situation of the CB internal rear state, among the flags provided in the main RAM 74, a flag indicating that winning was won with IV = 8, and normal replay winning Set "1" to each of the flags.

  In the subsequent step S402, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the CB winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 in the immediately preceding step S401. If an affirmative determination is made in step S402, the lighting process of the internal state notification unit 63 is executed in step S403, and then the true selection data acquisition process is terminated. Thereby, the internal state notification part 63 will be in a lighting state, and it will alert | report to the administrator and player of a game hall that it is a CB inside rear state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S402, it is determined in step S404 whether or not “1” is set in the normal replay winning flag. When an affirmative determination is made in step S404, a push order lottery process is executed in step S405, and a push order command including the push order data corresponding to the result of the push order lottery process is sub-processed in subsequent step S406. After setting to transmit to the side MPU 82, the real selection data acquisition process is terminated.

  As already described, when a normal replay combination is won, a normal replay winning occurs regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. In this case, in step S405, a push order lottery process is executed in order to generate an opportunity to set an AT1 signal described later to an OFF state. In the push order lottery process, the first stop target reel and the second stop target reel are determined by lottery, and the lottery is performed so that the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is selected as the first stop target reel. In the sub-side MPU 82, when the normal AT state to be described later continues, the display control of the image display device 66 is displayed so that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the push order data of the push order command is displayed. Execute. The operation and effect of executing this processing will be described in detail later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S404, it is determined in step S407 whether or not “1” is set in the first special replay winning flag provided in the main RAM 74. If a negative determination is made in step S407, the real selection data acquisition process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S407, the true selection data is set in step S408 after setting a value corresponding to the first freeze time (specifically 39 sec) in the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74. The acquisition process is terminated.

  When the value of the freeze counter is 1 or more, a negative determination is made in step S211 in the normal process (FIG. 11), and execution of the processes after step S212 is awaited. That is, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not started. The value set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process in step S108 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10). As a result, when “1” is set in the first special replay winning flag as a result of the lottery process, the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is waited for 39 sec. During the freeze period, as will be described later, the control by the sub-side MPU 82 is executed so that the first freeze corresponding effect is executed in the speaker 65 and the image display device 66. Thereby, the player can clearly recognize that the first special replay combination has been won.

  If the winning flag with “1” set is not the CB winning flag, “0” is cleared after the game with the winning flag set is over. On the other hand, when the winning flag set with “1” is the CB winning flag, it is reset as one of the conditions that the CB winning is established. In other words, a state in which “1” is set in the CB winning flag may be valid for a plurality of games.

  Returning to the description of the lottery process (FIG. 12), if the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, 1 is added to the index value IV in step S307, and in the subsequent step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined whether or not, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of whether or not the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used for determining whether or not the previous winning combination is a new determination value DV. In step S305, whether or not a winning combination is made is determined based on the determination value DV.

  If it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the lottery processing result of the current game is a losing result. In this case, in step S309, the flag of the main RAM 74 is checked to determine whether or not the CB internal rear state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S309, a value corresponding to the second freeze time (specifically 35 sec) is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74 in step S310.

  As already described, when the value of the freeze counter is 1 or more, a negative determination is made in step S211 in the normal process (FIG. 11), and execution of the processes in and after step S212 is awaited. That is, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not started. The value set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process in step S108 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10). As a result, when the result of the lottery process becomes an outlier in the CB internal rear state, the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is waited for 35 seconds. During the freeze period, as will be described later, the control by the sub-side MPU 82 is executed so that the second freeze corresponding effect is executed in the speaker 65 and the image display device 66. As a result, the player can clearly recognize that the lottery result has been lost in the post-CB internal state.

  When the process of step S306 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S309, or when the process of step S310 is executed, it means that the winning / failing determination of the combination has been completed. In this case, a lottery result command is set in step S311. The lottery result command is a command transmitted to the sub-control device 80 in order to grasp the result of the winning / failing determination of the combination, and the lottery result command includes data corresponding to the determination result of the winning / rejecting combination. Thereafter, in step S312, stop information first setting processing for setting stop information for reel stop control is performed, and the lottery processing is terminated.

<Reel control processing>
Next, the reel control process of step S212 in the normal process (FIG. 11) will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  In the reel control process, first, in step S501, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed. In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started to rotate in the previous game. Wait until When the wait time has elapsed, a wait time for the next game is reset, and a motor control initialization process for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74 is performed. By performing this process, the stepping motor acceleration process is started in the stepping motor control process of step S106 in the timer interrupt process, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate. Thereafter, the process waits until the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a constant rotation speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and the rotation start process ends. Further, when the rotation speed of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the main MPU 72 can issue a stop command by lighting a lamp (not shown) of each stop button 42 to 44. This is notified to a player or the like.

  Following the rotation start process, in step S502, it is determined whether any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated. When none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated, the process waits until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S503, where it is determined whether or not the stop button corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been issued. To do. If no stop command has been issued, the process returns to step S502 and waits until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. If a stop command is generated, a stop command command is set in step S504.

  The stop command command is a command transmitted to the sub-control device 80 in order to grasp which stop button 42 to 44 is operated to generate a stop command. When the stop command command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S505 to S511 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

  In step S505, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base point position (lower in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop button is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol reaching the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step S506, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated.

  In the slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, a stop mode for stopping the reaching symbol reaching the base position as it is is supported. Stop mode for stopping the reel to be slid after one symbol, Stop mode for stopping after sliding for two symbols, Stop mode for stopping after sliding for three symbols, Stop after sliding for four symbols There are prepared five patterns of stop modes. Therefore, in step S506, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, one of 0 to 4 is calculated as the number of slips.

  Thereafter, in step S507, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reaching symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined. In step S508, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reaching symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. If they are equal, a reel stop process for stopping the reel rotation is performed in step S509. Do. Thereafter, in step S510, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S511, and the process returns to step S502.

  Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12). By using the stop information, When the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped, it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically “0” to “4”) for the reaching symbol that has reached the base point position. As the stop information, slip number data indicating a correspondence relationship between each symbol and the number of slips is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in correspondence with each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which slip number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is derived during rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. .

  As the process for setting the stop information, stop information first setting process executed in step S312 of the lottery process (FIG. 12) and stop information executed in step S511 of the reel control process (FIG. 17). The second setting process exists. In the stop information first setting process, stop information is set according to the lottery process result. If IV = 1 to 7 in the CB non-internal state is set as stop information in this case, stop information corresponding to the relationship between the first stop and the winning combination as shown in FIG. If IV = 1 to 7 and 9 to 13 in the rear state, stop information corresponding to the relationship between the first stop and the winning combination as shown in FIG. 15 is set.

  The stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the stop information first setting process or the previous stop information second setting process after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the stop output of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. To do. In the slot machine 10, when winning is performed when IV = 1 to 7, 9 to 13 in the CB non-internal state and the CB internal rear state (see FIG. 15), the set winning data and the stop command are set. The stop information second setting process is performed so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 that have generated and the stop appearance.

  Incidentally, the symbols forming the symbol combination corresponding to the first bell prize, the second bell prize, the normal replay prize, the first bell replay prize, the first cherry replay prize, the second cherry replay prize or the first special replay prize are as follows: The corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged so that the maximum number of symbols separated in the circumferential direction is four symbols. In such a configuration, the combination of the result of the lottery process and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is the first bell prize, the second bell prize, the normal replay prize, the first bell replay prize, the first cherry replay prize, When it corresponds to the occurrence of any one of the two cherry replay winnings and the first special replay winning, stop information is set so that the winnings occur regardless of the operation order of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44.

  In the CB internal post state, one of the small roles or the replay role will be won in a situation where the CB winning flag is set to “1”. In this case, the small role winning corresponding to the winning is won. Alternatively, stop information is set so that the replay winning is given priority over the CB winning. For example, if the winning position is IV = 1 in the CB internal rear state, even if the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at a timing at which the CB winning can be generated, the small role winning is made in relation to the stop information. By selecting the priority number of slips, a small winning combination is generated and no CB winning is generated. In addition, for example, when the replay role is won in the CB internal rear state, even if the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at a timing at which the CB winning can be generated, the replay winning is related to the stop information. By selecting the number of priority slips, a replay winning is generated and no CB winning is generated. However, when the lottery result is a losing result, there is no role that has priority over the CB winning, so a CB winning can occur depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

  Returning to the description of the reel control process (FIG. 17), if it is determined in step S510 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a winning determination process is executed in step S512, and the subsequent step S513 is performed. After the winning result command including data corresponding to the result of the winning determination process is set as an output target to the sub-control device 80, the reel control process is terminated.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a winning determination process.

  In the winning determination process, in step S601, the type of the symbol stopped on the main line ML in the left reel 32L is grasped, and in step S602, the symbol stopped on the main line ML in the middle reel 32M. In step S603, the type of the symbol stopped on the main line ML in the right reel 32R is determined. In grasping the symbol type, 2-byte data set for each symbol type is read from the main ROM 73. Then, in step S604, as the symbol combination logical operation processing, each 2-byte data grasped in steps S601 to S603 is ANDed with bits in the same order, so that 2 bytes corresponding to the symbol combination is obtained. Deriving data.

  In subsequent step S605, it is determined whether or not the 2-byte data derived in step S604 corresponds to any winning data. If an affirmative determination is made in step S605, a winning correspondence process is executed in step S606. In the winning correspondence processing, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the winning flag corresponding to the winning that has occurred this time. If “1” is not set, an abnormal command is output to the sub-control device 80. Set as target. The sub-side MPU 82 receives the abnormality command and performs abnormality notification corresponding to the illegal winning by the speaker 65 and the image display device 66. When the winning flag is set to “1”, if the winning is a small role winning, the number of medals to be paid out is set to the main side so that medals or virtual medals can be given in the medal payout process. The payout target counter of the RAM 74 is set. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, in the next step S204 in the normal process (FIG. 11), a flag setting process for enabling the same number of bets as the current bet is executed.

  Thereafter, a bell winning determination process is executed in step S607, and a normal replay push order determination process is executed in step S608. These processes are processes for switching the ON / OFF state of the AT1 signal output to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 90. Details of these processes will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S605, or if the process of step S608 is executed, the process proceeds to step S609, and in the current lottery process (FIG. 12), the second special replay winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 or It is determined whether or not “1” is set in the third special replay winning flag. If a negative determination is made in step S609, the main winning determination process is terminated after executing the first weight setting process in step S610, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S609, After the 2-wait setting process is executed, the final winning determination process is terminated. The first weight setting process and the second weight setting process will be described later.

<CB status processing>
Next, the CB state process executed in step S214 of the normal process (FIG. 11) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the CB state by determining whether or not “1” is set in the CB state flag provided in the main RAM 74. If a negative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S702 whether or not “1” is set in the CB winning flag provided in the main RAM 74. If a negative determination is made in step S702, the CB state process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S702, the process proceeds to step S703. Further, in step S703, it is determined whether or not a CB winning has occurred by determining whether or not “1” is set in the CB establishment flag provided in the main RAM 74. If a negative determination is made in step S703, the CB state process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S704.

  In step S704, the CB status flag is set to “1”, and the CB winning flag and the CB establishment flag are cleared to “0”. In the subsequent step S705, “19” is set to the counter in CB provided in the main RAM 74. The counter during CB is a counter for specifying in the main MPU 72 whether or not the number of small part winnings occurring in the CB state has reached the number of CB end conditions.

  In a succeeding step S706, “2” is set to a specified bet number counter provided in the main RAM 74. Thereby, in step S205 of the normal process (FIG. 11), it is determined whether or not the bet number is “2”. Therefore, if the number of bets has not reached “2”, the operation of the start lever 41 is invalidated and three or more bets cannot be made.

  In the subsequent step S707, the extinguishing process of the internal state notification unit 63 is executed. Thereby, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned off, and the game hall manager and the player are notified that the CB internal rear state has ended. Thereafter, in step S708, a CB start command including data indicating that the CB in-process state has been started is set as an output target to the sub-control device 80, and then this CB state process is terminated. Thereby, the sub-side MPU 82 controls the speaker 65, the image display device 66, and the like so that an effect corresponding to the CB state is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is in the CB state and an affirmative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S709 whether or not a small role winning is achieved in the current game. If a negative determination is made in step S709, the CB state process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S709, the process proceeds to step S710.

  In step S710, 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter in CB of the main RAM 74. In step S711, it is determined whether the value of the counter in CB is “0”. If it is not “0”, the present CB state process is terminated as it is, and if it is “0”, the process proceeds to steps S712 to S714.

  In step S712, the CB state flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0”, thereby terminating the CB in-progress state. In a succeeding step S713, “3” is set to the specified bet number counter of the main RAM 74. Thereby, in step S205 of the normal process (FIG. 11), it is determined whether or not the bet number is “3”. Therefore, if the number of bets has not reached “3”, the operation of the start lever 41 is invalidated and four or more bets cannot be made.

  Thereafter, in step S714, a CB end command including data indicating that the CB in-progress state has ended is set as an output target to the sub-control device 80, and then the CB state process ends. Thereby, the sub-side MPU 82 ends the effect corresponding to the CB in-process state in the speaker 65, the image display device 66, and the like.

<Mode of Transition of Game State Generated under Control of Main Side MPU 72>
Next, the mode of transition of the gaming state that occurs under the control of the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  When the main-side RAM 74 is initialized or when the setting is changed under the situation where the CB winning flag is “0”, the CB non-internal state ST1 is set. For example, the CB non-internal state ST1 is entered when the game hall starts business. In the CB non-internal state ST1, the normal replay probability is about 1/7. In the CB non-internal state ST1, no other replay combination is set as a lottery combination. In the CB non-internal state ST1, the CB probability is about 1 / 4.3 and the payout occurrence probability is about 1 / 1.6. However, in the non-internal state of the CB, the control for the AT state is not executed in the sub-side MPU 82, and it is necessary to correctly answer the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 that are 1/4 for the first bell winning. Since it is necessary to correct in the order of pressing the stop buttons 42 to 44 that are halved for the second bell prize, even if the payout occurrence probability is approximately 1 / 1.6, the number of payouts Is basically one. This number is smaller than three, which is the prescribed number of bets.

  If the CB combination is won in the CB non-internal state ST1 and no CB winning is generated, the process proceeds to the CB internal post-state ST2. Further, the CB internal post-state ST2 also shifts when the setting is changed under the situation where the CB winning flag is “1”. In the CB internal post-state ST2, the normal replay probability is higher than that in the CB non-internal state ST1, and is about 1 / 2.9. Further, in the CB internal post-state ST2, the replay occurrence probability becomes higher because the replay role exists in addition to the normal replay role. Further, in the CB internal post-state ST2, since “1” is already set in the CB winning flag, the CB combination is not set as the lottery combination.

  In the CB internal post-state ST2, the payout occurrence probability is about 1 / 1.6. Here, in the CB internal rear state ST2, control for the AT state can be executed in the sub-side MPU 82 as will be described in detail later. In the situation where the control for the AT state is not executed, even if the payout occurrence probability is a relatively high probability of about 1 / 1.6 as in the case of the CB non-internal state ST1, the number of payouts is basically It becomes one piece. This number is smaller than three, which is the prescribed number of bets. On the other hand, in the situation where the control for the AT state is being executed in the sub-side MPU 82, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for making the first bell winning is notified, and the stop for making the second bell winning. The order of pressing the buttons 42 to 44 is notified. As a result, in the AT state, the payout occurrence probability is a relatively high probability of about 1 / 1.6, and the number of payouts is basically nine or four. This number is larger than three, which is the prescribed number of bets.

  If a CB win occurs in the CB internal post-state ST2, or if a CB winning combination is won in the CB non-internal state ST1 and a CB win occurs in the game, the process proceeds to the CB mid-state ST3. In the CB in-between state ST3, as described above, a small role winning or a replay winning is generated in each game. However, in the CB in-between state ST3, since the prescribed number of bets is limited to “2”, the number of payouts is limited to 2 even if a small winning combination occurs. Therefore, in the CB in-between state ST3, medals owned by the player will not decrease, but will not increase. When the small role winning is generated 19 times in the CB mid-state ST3, the process proceeds to the CB non-internal state ST1.

<Light emission control mode of internal state notification unit 63>
Next, the light emission control mode of the internal state notification unit 63 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 21A shows the execution period of the CB winning game, FIG. 21B shows the execution period of the CB internal post-state, FIG. 21C shows the execution period of the CB intermediate state, and FIG. ) Indicates the light emission period of the internal state notification unit 63.

  At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 21A, the game won for the CB combination is started. In this case, the lighting of the internal state notification unit 63 is started at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. Thus, the player starts a stop operation of at least one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the final stop reel by starting the lighting of the internal state notifying unit 63 at the start of the game won for the CB role. It becomes possible to make the player recognize that he has won the CB role by now.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), the game won for the CB combination is completed. In this case, since no CB winning has occurred, as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, when a CB winning occurs at the timing of t3, the CB internal rear state ends as shown in FIG. 21 (b), and the state shifts to the CB in-progress state as shown in FIG. 21 (c). Further, at the timing t3 when the state is shifted to the CB middle state, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned off as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the CB in-progress state ends as shown in FIG. Then, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), the game that won the CB role is started again, so that the lighting of the internal state notification unit 63 is started as shown in FIG. 21 (d), At the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 21A, when the game won for the CB role ends without a CB winning, the CB internal rear state is entered as shown in FIG. 21B. .

<First weight setting process>
Next, the first weight setting process executed in step S610 of the winning determination process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the first special replay winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 in the current lottery process (FIG. 12). If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, the first special time number lottery process is executed in step S802. In the number lottery process at the first special time, the first number lottery table stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and the value of the number lottery counter periodically updated (for example, 1.49 msec) in the main RAM 74 is used. Read out, and read the data of the number of bonus ATs corresponding to the value of the number-of-times lottery counter from the first number-of-times lottery table. Specifically, once, twice, and three times are set as the number of bonus ATs, the probability that one time is selected is 2/10, and the probability that two times is selected is 5/10. The probability that 3 times is selected is 3/10. In step S 803, a value corresponding to the result of the number lottery process in step S 802 is set in a bonus AT number counter provided in the main RAM 74.

  In the slot machine 10, as described above, even if the first bell winning flag is set to “1”, in order to generate the first bell win, the correct answer is made in the order of pressing the stop buttons 42 to 44 that are 1/4. Even if “1” is set in the second bell winning flag, in order to generate the second bell winning, it is necessary to answer in the order in which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are halved. In this case, the display control is executed by the sub-side MPU 82 so that the correct push order is notified in the image display device 66 when the AT state is set. Therefore, in the AT state, nine or four payouts occur with a high probability. This number is larger than three, which is the prescribed number of bets.

  The AT state includes the normal AT state in which the transition trigger and end trigger are not managed in the main MPU 72 but in the sub MPU 82, and the transition trigger and end trigger are managed in the main MPU 72 and performed in the sub MPU 82. There is a bonus AT state that is not broken. The bonus AT state is entered when a value equal to or greater than 1 is set in the bonus AT number counter. The normal AT state will be described later in detail.

  After the process of step S803 is executed in the first weight setting process, it is determined in step S804 whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. The bonus AT counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of continuations of one bonus AT state.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S804, the first weight setting process is terminated, and if a negative determination is made in step S804, the process proceeds to step S805. In step S805, “1” is set in the pre-start wait flag provided in the main RAM 74, and in step S806, the value of the start wait time (8 sec) is set in the wait counter provided in the main RAM 74. The wait counter is a counter for measuring, in the main MPU 72, a wait time that is forcibly set during the game. It is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify at which timing the game is started.

  Thereafter, in step S807, the start wait command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 80, and then the first weight setting process is terminated. By receiving the start weight command, the sub-side MPU 82 executes various controls so that the start weight corresponding effect is executed in the speaker 65 and the image display device 66.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S801, it is determined in step S808 whether the value of the CB winning flag is “1” and a result of losing is obtained in the current lottery process (FIG. 12). judge. By the way, as already described, the probability that the lottery result will be a result of losing in the CB internal rear state is 1/65536.

  If a negative determination is made in step S808, the first weight setting process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S808, the process proceeds to step S809. In step S809, the number-of-times lottery process at the time of the off result is executed. In the lottery process at the time of the off-result, the second lottery table stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and the value of the number lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 1.49 msec) in the main RAM 74 is read. The data of the bonus AT number corresponding to the value of the number-of-times lottery counter is read from the second number-of-times lottery table. Specifically, the number of bonus ATs is set to 1, 2 and 3 times, the probability of selecting 1 time is 1/10, and the probability of selecting 2 times is 3/10. The probability that 3 times is selected is 6/10. That is, when the second number lottery table is referred to, it is easier to select a bonus AT number than when the first number lottery table is referred to. In step S810, a value corresponding to the result of the number lottery process in step S809 is set in a bonus AT number counter provided in the main RAM 74.

  Thereafter, in step S811, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. If an affirmative determination is made in step S811, the first weight setting process is terminated, and if a negative determination is made in step S811, the process proceeds to step S812.

  In step S812, “1” is set in the wait generation flag provided in the main RAM 74, and in the subsequent step S813, the value of the start wait time (8 sec) is set in the wait counter of the main RAM 74. The wait generation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that a wait time is generated at the end of the current game. Thereafter, in step S814, the start wait command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 80, and then the first weight setting process is terminated. By receiving the start weight command, the sub-side MPU 82 executes various controls so that the first weight-related effect is executed in the speaker 65 and the image display device 66.

  As described above, when the first special replay combination is won in the post-CB internal state, or when the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) is an outlier in the post-CB internal state, the state shifts to the bonus AT state. In particular, if the first special replay combination is won, a winning different from the first special replay winning may occur depending on the stop order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Regardless of the type of winning that occurred, the state will change.

<Second weight setting process>
Next, the second weight setting process executed in step S611 of the winning determination process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second weight setting process is started when “1” is set in the second special replay winning flag or the third special replay winning flag as described above.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the output state of the AT1 signal through the external terminal board 90 is ON. The AT1 signal is a signal output from the slot machine 10 in order to make the hall computer HC recognize whether or not it is in the normal AT state. In step S902, it is determined whether the first stop of the current game is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R. If a negative determination is made in step S901 or step S902, the second weight setting process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in both step S901 and step S902, the process proceeds to step S903.

  In step S903, a number lottery process at the second special time is executed. In the number lottery process at the second special time, the third number lottery table stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and the value of the number lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 1.49 msec) in the main RAM 74 is used. Read out, and read out the data of the bonus AT number corresponding to the value of the number-of-times lottery counter from the third number-of-times lottery table. Specifically, once, twice, and three times are set as the number of bonus ATs, the probability that one time is selected is 7/10, and the probability that two times is selected is 2/10. The probability that 3 times is selected is 1/10. That is, when the third number lottery table is referred to, it is easier to select a bonus AT number than when the first number lottery table and the second number lottery table are referred to. In step S904, a value corresponding to the result of the number-of-times lottery process in step S903 is set in the bonus AT number counter of the main RAM 74.

  Thereafter, in step S905, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. If an affirmative determination is made in step S905, the second weight setting process is terminated as it is, and if a negative determination is made in step S905, the process proceeds to step S906.

  In step S906, “1” is set to the pre-start wait flag of the main RAM 74, and in step S907, the value of the start wait time (8 sec) is set to the wait counter of the main RAM 74. Thereafter, in step S908, the start wait command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 80, and then the second weight setting process is terminated. By receiving the start weight command, the sub-side MPU 82 executes various controls so that the first weight-related effect is executed in the speaker 65 and the image display device 66.

  As described above, when the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won in the CB internal rear state, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop. A transition to the bonus AT state is made on condition that the operation has been performed. However, when winning the second special replay role or the third special replay role, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, even if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, the first special replay role A winning different from the replay winning may occur, but the type of winning that occurs is not related to the transition to the bonus AT state.

<Bonus AT management process>
Next, the bonus AT management process executed in step S215 of the normal process (FIG. 11) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the bonus AT state is set by determining whether or not “1” is set in the bonus AT state flag provided in the main RAM 74. By making a negative determination in step S1001, it is determined in step S1002 whether the value of the bonus AT number counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the bonus AT management process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, in step S1003, “30” which is the number of times of one set is set in the bonus AT counter provided in the main RAM 74 and the bonus AT state of the main RAM 74 is set. Set “1” to the flag. The bonus AT counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of continuations of one bonus AT state. Thereafter, in step S1004, a bonus AT start command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 80, and then the bonus AT management process is terminated. By receiving the bonus AT start command, the sub MPU 82 recognizes that the bonus AT state has started, and sets the content of the effect in the speaker 65, the image display device 66, etc. to the content corresponding to the start of the bonus AT state. .

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, 1 is subtracted from the value of the bonus AT counter in the main RAM 74 in step S1005. In step S1006, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter is “0”. If it is not “0”, the bonus AT management process is terminated as it is, and if it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1007.

  In step S1007, 1 is subtracted from the value of the bonus AT number counter in the main RAM 74, and in the subsequent step S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus AT number counter is “0”. If it is “0”, the bonus AT state flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0” in step S1009, and the bonus AT end flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to “1” in step S1010. "Is set. The bonus AT end flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the bonus AT state has ended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1008, or if the process of step S1010 is executed, the value of the end wait time (5 sec) is set in the wait counter of the main RAM 74 in step S1011. Thereafter, in step S1012, the bonus AT end command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 80, and then the bonus AT management process is ended. The bonus AT end command includes data corresponding to the value of the bonus AT number counter, that is, data indicating whether or not a new execution time of the bonus AT state is started after the current execution time of the bonus AT state is ended. Is included.

  When the sub-side MPU 82 receives a bonus AT end command including data indicating that a new execution time of the bonus AT state is started, the speaker 65 is executed such that an effect indicating that the bonus AT state continues is executed. And the image display device 66 and the like are controlled. On the other hand, when a bonus AT end command that does not include data indicating that a new execution time of the bonus AT state is started is received, an effect indicating that the bonus AT state is ended is executed and the speaker 65 and the image are displayed. The display device 66 and the like are controlled.

  Here, in the normal process (FIG. 11), when it is determined in step S218 that the end wait time has elapsed, a bonus AT setting process is executed in step S219. In the bonus AT setting process, steps S1001 to S1004 in the bonus AT management process (FIG. 24) are executed. That is, when the bonus AT state flag is “0” and the value of the bonus AT number counter is 1 or more, “30” is set in the bonus AT counter and “1” is set in the bonus AT state flag. Further, a bonus AT start command is transmitted to the sub MPU 82. As a result, when the bonus AT state continues, a new execution time bonus AT state is started from the game immediately after the last game of one execution bonus AT state is completed.

  In addition, since the end wait time is interposed between the bonus AT state of one execution time and the bonus AT state of a new execution time as described above, there is a continuous connection between the bonus AT states at the time of consecutive holidays. A period for executing various operations for holiday is secured.

<Situation when first special replay is won or missed result>
Next, the situation in the case where the first special replay winning or losing result is obtained in the internal post-CB state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 25 (a) shows the execution period of the bonus AT state, FIG. 25 (b) shows the execution period of the game in the case of winning the first special replay or losing result, and FIG. 25 (c) shows other games. 25 (d) shows a freeze period, and FIG. 25 (e) shows a wait period.

  At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the game that has won the first special replay is started, and as shown in FIG. 25 (d), a freeze period (39 sec) occurs. During this freeze period, rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not started. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the freeze period ends as shown in FIG. In this case, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. Then, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 25B, when the current game is finished, the bonus AT state is started as shown in FIG. 25A.

  After that, at the timing of t4, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 25C, so that the wait period set at the end of the previous game is started as shown in FIG. 25E. Is done. During this wait period, the bet setting by the previous replay winning is not performed and the operation of the start lever 41 is not validated. Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the wait period ends as shown in FIG. In this case, the bet setting by the previous replay winning is performed, and the operation of the start lever 41 is validated. Then, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), the current game ends.

  Thereafter, at the timing t7 when the bonus AT state is continuing, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the game that has won the first special replay is started again. In this case, as shown in FIG. 25 (d), the freeze period occurs from the timing t7 to the timing t8, while as shown in FIG. 25 (e), from the timing t9 to the timing t10. The wait period does not occur in the next game that continues.

  That is, even if the first special replay is won, a wait period occurs if the situation is not in the bonus AT state, but no wait period occurs if the situation is in the bonus AT state. As a result, when the first special replay win occurs in a situation that is not in the bonus AT state, the execution period of the production corresponding to the transition to the bonus AT state is ensured in order to suitably improve the player's superiority. When the first special replay win is generated in the situation of the AT state, it is possible to increase the speed of the game in the bonus AT state by omitting the period.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t11 after the end of the bonus AT state, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), a game in which the lottery result has been lost is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 25 (d), a freeze period occurs from the timing t11 to the timing t12. Further, as shown in FIG. 25 (e), from the timing t13 to the timing t14. In this game, a wait period occurs. At the timing t14 when the wait period ends, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the game that has resulted in a miss is completed, and as shown in FIG. 25 (a), the bonus AT state starts. Is done. Then, at the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), a new game is started under the bonus AT state.

<State when winning 2nd special replay or 3rd special replay>
Next, the situation when the second special replay winning or the third special replay winning is achieved in the CB internal post state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 26A shows the execution period of the normal AT state, FIG. 26B shows the execution period of the bonus AT state, and FIG. 26C shows the second special replay winning or the third special replay winning. FIG. 26D shows the execution period of other games, and FIG. 26E shows the wait period.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (c), at the timing t1 of the normal AT state as shown in FIG. 26 (a), the game that has been won as the second special replay or the third special replay is started as shown in FIG. 26 (c). . Then, at the timing of t2, when the game is finished as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the normal AT state is finished as shown in FIG. 26 (a), and as shown in FIG. 26 (b). Thus, the bonus AT state is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 26 (d), so that the wait period set at the end of the previous game is started as shown in FIG. 26 (e). Is done. During this wait period, the bet setting by the previous replay winning is not performed and the operation of the start lever 41 is not validated. Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the wait period ends as shown in FIG. In this case, the bet setting by the previous replay winning is performed, and the operation of the start lever 41 is validated. Then, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6 in which the bonus AT state is continuing, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the game that has become the second special replay winning or the third special replay winning is started. Then, the game ends at the timing of t7, and the next game starts from the timing of t8. However, no wait period occurs in the game.

  In other words, even if the second special replay winning or the third special replay winning is made, a wait period occurs if the bonus AT state is not established, but no wait period occurs if the bonus AT state is established. As a result, when the second special replay winning or the third special replay winning occurs in a situation that is not in the bonus AT state, the execution period of the production corresponding to the transition to the bonus AT state in order to suitably improve the player's superiority On the other hand, if the 2nd special replay win or the 3rd special replay win occurs in the situation of the bonus AT state, it is possible to increase the speed of the game during the bonus AT state by omitting the period It becomes.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), after the bonus AT state is over and not in the normal AT state, the game that has won the second special replay or the third special replay is selected. Be started. Then, the game ends at the timing of t10, and the next game is executed at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. However, no wait period occurs in the game. Furthermore, even if the game is over, the transition to the bonus AT state does not occur.

  That is, even if the second special replay winning or the third special replay winning is performed in a situation that is not in the normal AT state, it does not trigger the transition to the bonus AT state. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit for the player of staying in the normal AT state, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the normal AT state. In addition, since the wait period is not generated in such a situation that does not trigger the transition to the bonus AT state, a wait period for performance is generated in a situation where no profit is generated for the player. Is suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Relationship between CB state and bonus AT state>
Next, the relationship between the CB in-progress state and the bonus AT state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 27 (a) shows the setting status of the CB winning flag, FIG. 27 (b) shows the execution period of the CB in-progress state, FIG. 27 (c) shows the execution period of the game as a result of losing, and FIG. ) Shows the execution period of other games, FIG. 27E shows the execution period of the bonus AT state, and FIG. 27F shows the timing at which the number of games is counted.

  As shown in FIG. 27 (a), at the timing of t1 when the CB winning flag is set to “1”, the game of the outage result is started as shown in FIG. 27 (b), and the timing of t2 Then, the game is finished. In this case, a CB winning is generated at the end of the game. Accordingly, at the timing t2, not only the bonus AT state is started as shown in FIG. 27E, but also the CB winning flag is cleared to “0” as shown in FIG. 27A. As shown in (b), the CB state is also started. In this case, since the CB state is prioritized as the gaming state, the specified number of bets, the contents of the lottery process, the reel control mode, and the number of payouts in the small role winning are set to those in the CB state. . However, the progress of the bonus AT state is not waited, and the number of games executed in the CB state is digested as a game in the bonus AT state.

  Thereafter, under the state of the CB state and the bonus AT state, as shown in FIGS. 27D and 27F, the game is executed at the timing of t3, the timing of t4, and the like. Is counted. Thereby, the game digestion in the CB state and the game digestion in the bonus AT state occur simultaneously. Then, at the timing of t5, the small role winning is generated 19 times in the CB state, and as shown in FIG. 27B, the CB state is ended. Thereby, only the bonus AT state is set. However, as shown in FIG. 27A, since the CB winning flag is “0” and the CB is not in the internal state, the main MPU 72 executes the process of advancing the bonus AT state, but the sub MPU 82 Then, the notification of the pushing order for generating the first bell prize and the second bell prize is not executed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6, the timing of t7, and the like, as shown in FIGS. 27D and 27F, the game is executed in the situation where the CB is not in the internal state and is in the bonus AT state, and the number of games is Be counted. At time t8, as shown in FIG. 27A, the CB combination is won and the CB winning flag is set to “1”. As a result, not only the process of advancing the bonus AT state in the main MPU 72 is executed, but also the push order notification for generating the first bell win and the second bell win is executed in the sub MPU 82.

<Execution control of various notifications and various effects in the sub-side MPU 82>
Next, the processing configuration of the sub MPU 82 for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

<Cyclic processing>
First, periodic processing executed periodically (for example, by a period of 2 msec) in the sub-side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1101, it is determined whether a new command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, the command received this time is stored in the ring buffer provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1102. The ring buffer is a buffer that can store a plurality of commands. When a command is written to the area indicated by the write pointer, the write pointer is updated and read each time the write processing is executed. A process for reading a command from the area indicated by the pointer is executed, and the read pointer is updated each time the read process is executed. The read point is updated when a command is read in one processing cycle and when the next processing cycle is started.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1101, or if the process of step S1102 is executed, it is determined in step S1103 whether the state is the CB internal rear state. As will be described later, the sub-side MPU 82 receives the lottery result command corresponding to the CB winning combination from the main side MPU 72 to specify that the CB internal post-state has started, and receives the CB start command to receive the CB internal command. Specify that the post-condition has ended.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1103, whether or not the control for AT is being executed in the sub MPU 82 by checking the flag provided in the sub RAM 84 in step S1104. Determine. If a negative determination is made in step S1104, non-AT processing is executed in step S1105, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, processing during AT is executed in step S1106. These non-AT processing and AT processing will be described in detail later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1103, if the process of step S1105 is executed, or if the process of step S1106 is executed, the setting of the freeze period and the wait period in the main MPU 72 is performed in step S1107. The standby effect setting process for executing the corresponding effect and notification is executed, and the setting process for CB for executing the effect and notification corresponding to the CB in-process state in step S1108. Execute.

  Thereafter, in step S1109, a display data setting process for executing presentation and notification is performed by displaying a moving image or a still image on the image display device 66. In step S1110, the upper lamp 64, privilege point is executed. The light emission data setting process for executing the light emission control of the notification unit 67, the stock notification unit 68, and the victory number notification unit 69 is executed, and sound and sound for production and notification are output through the speaker 65 in step S1111. Sound output data setting processing is performed. Thereafter, this periodic process is terminated.

<Standby effect setting process>
Next, the standby effect setting process of step S1107 in the periodic process (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether a lottery result command corresponding to the first special replay winning is received from the main MPU 72 or not. If the lottery result command has been received, “1” is set in the first freeze flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1202, and then the standby effect setting process is terminated. By setting “1” to the first freeze flag, it is possible to display a moving image corresponding to the first freeze time (39 sec) in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The data table to be read is read from the sub ROM 83, and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. Thereby, a display effect corresponding to the first freeze time is performed in the image display device 66. In the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the first freeze time is read, and in the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The sound output data corresponding to the first freeze time is read, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. Thereby, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the first freeze time in the image display device 66 are performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not a lottery result command corresponding to the disengagement result is received from the main MPU 72 in the CB internal rear state. If the lottery result command has been received, “1” is set to the second freeze flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1204, and then the standby effect setting process is terminated. By setting “1” to the second freeze flag, it is possible to display a moving image corresponding to the second freeze time (35 sec) in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The data table to be read is read from the sub ROM 83, and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. Thereby, a display effect corresponding to the second freeze time is performed in the image display device 66. In the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the second freeze time is read, and in the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The sound output data corresponding to the second freeze time is read out, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to these light emission data and sound output data. Thereby, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 66 are performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined in step S1205 whether a start wait command has been received from the main MPU 72. If a start wait command has been received, “1” is set in the start wait flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1206, and then the standby effect setting process ends. When the start wait flag is set to “1”, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), data that enables display of a moving image corresponding to the start wait time (8 sec) The table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. Thereby, the display effect corresponding to the start wait time is performed in the image display device 66. Specifically, a display effect indicating that the transition to the bonus AT state has occurred is performed. In the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the start wait time is read, and in the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The sound output data corresponding to the wait time is read, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. Thereby, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the start wait time in the image display device 66 are performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1207 whether a bonus AT end command is received from the main MPU 72 or not. If a bonus AT end command has been received, “1” is set in the bonus AT end flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1208, and the standby effect setting process ends. By setting “1” to the bonus AT end flag, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the cycle process (FIG. 28), it is possible to display a moving image corresponding to the end wait time (5 sec). The data table is read from the sub ROM 83, and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. Thereby, the display effect corresponding to the end wait time is performed in the image display device 66. Specifically, a display effect indicating that one set of the bonus AT state has ended is performed. In the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the end wait time is read, and in the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The sound output data corresponding to the wait time is read, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. Thereby, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the end wait time in the image display device 66 are performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1207, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not a consecutive-village wait command is received from the main MPU 72. As will be described later, the consecutive mansion wait command is a command transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the output state of the AT1 signal set to the ON state is once set to the OFF state and then set to the ON state again. And when the output setting of the said AT1 signal is performed, in the main side MPU72, the extended resort wait time (1 sec) is set.

  If the consecutive resort wait command has not been received, the standby effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if a consecutive resort wait command has been received, “1” is set in the consecutive resort wait flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1210, and then the standby effect setting processing is terminated. By setting “1” to the flag for the consecutive villa wait, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), it is possible to display a still image corresponding to the consecutive villa wait time (1 sec). Is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and a signal is output to the image display device 66 in accordance with the data table. As a result, a display effect corresponding to the extended resort wait time is performed in the image display device 66.

<Setting process for CB>
Next, the CB setting process of step S1108 in the periodic process (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not a winning result command corresponding to a CB winning combination and a non-CB winning is received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has been received, “1” is set to the CB internal flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1302. This makes it possible to recognize that the sub-side MPU 82 is in the CB internal rear state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1301, or if the process of step S1302 is executed, it is determined in step S1303 whether or not a CB start command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the CB start command has been received, “1” is set to the CB flag provided in the sub RAM 84 in step S1304, and the CB internal flag of the sub RAM 84 is set to “1” in step S1305. Clear “0”. This makes it possible to recognize that the sub-side MPU 82 is in the CB state.

  In addition, when “1” is set in the CB in-process flag, the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28) creates a data table that enables display of a moving image corresponding to the in-CB state. Reading from the sub-side ROM 83 and outputting a signal to the image display device 66 according to the data table. Thereby, the display effect corresponding to the CB middle state is performed in the image display device 66. In the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the CB state is read, and in the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), CB is read. The sound output data corresponding to the middle state is read, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. Thereby, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the CB middle state in the image display device 66 are performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1303, or if the processing in step S1305 is executed, it is determined in step S1306 whether or not “1” is set in the CB flag of the sub-side RAM 84. If “1” is set in the CB flag, effect content update processing is executed in step S1307. In the effect content updating process, a process for updating the display of the number of remaining small role winnings in the CB displayed on the image display device 66 in response to receiving the winning result command from the main MPU 72. While performing, the process for alert | reporting the information of a winning combination is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1306, or if the process of step S1307 is executed, it is determined in step S1308 whether a CB end command is received from the main MPU 72 or not. If the CB end command has not been received, the CB setting process is terminated. If the CB end command has been received, the CB flag in the sub RAM 84 is cleared to “0” in step S1309. This CB setting process is terminated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the CB middle state in the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 is ended.

<Non-AT processing in sub MPU 82>
Next, processing contents during non-AT executed in the sub MPU 82 will be described. Prior to description of specific processing contents executed by the sub MPU 82, a transition mode from the non-AT state to the AT state will be described with reference to an explanatory diagram of FIG.

  In a situation in which the CB is in the post-internal state and is in the non-AT state (hereinafter referred to as a normal state ST11), the state is shifted to a state in which the CB is in the post-internal state and is in the normal AT state (hereinafter referred to as normal AT state ST12). There are three kinds of embodiments.

  The first transition mode is that when the sub-side RAM 84 is initialized, when the normal AT state ST12 ends and shifts to the normal state ST11, or when the bonus AT state ST17 ends and shifts to the normal AT state ST12. This is a case where the number of games for the number of ceiling games determined by lottery in the sub-side MPU 82 has been digested when shifting to the normal state ST11 without shifting. When shifting to the normal AT state ST12 in this manner, first, the state shifts to the ceiling game precursor state ST13, and then the number of ceiling games is digested (ST14), thereby entering the normal AT state ST12. Transition to the ceiling game precursor state ST13 is made when the number of ceiling games is 32 games remaining. In the ceiling game precursor state ST13, the effect of each game on the image display device 66 is an effect that has a higher expectation level for the transition to the normal AT state ST12 than in the situation that is the normal state ST11 and not the ceiling game precursor state ST13. It becomes easy to be executed.

  Even in a situation where the remaining number of ceiling games is not 32 games, a false sign state is obtained by winning the false sign lottery in the sub MPU 82. In the false precursor state, the degree of expectation of the transition to the normal AT state ST12 is greater than the situation in which the game display in the image display device 66 is in the normal state ST11 and neither the ceiling game precursor state ST13 nor the false precursor state It is easy to produce a high performance.

  In the second transition mode, in the trigger lottery process that is executed in response to the winning of a predetermined combination, the transition is made to the transition chance state ST16, and in the transition chance state ST16, the replay combination is selected. This is a case where the transfer lottery process is executed when triggered by the fact that the transfer is won. However, when the end condition of the transition chance state ST16 is satisfied without becoming a transition winning, the normal state ST11 is restored without shifting to the normal AT state ST12. In the transition chance state ST16, the image display device 66 executes a display effect for clearly showing the player that the transition chance state ST16 is in effect.

  When transitioning to the transition chance state ST16, the transition is first made to the transition chance precursor state ST15, and the transition chance state ST16 is transitioned to when the number of games for the precursor is digested in the transition chance precursor state ST15. In the transition chance precursor state ST15, as the content of each game on the image display device 66, there is an effect that has a higher expectation of transition to the transition chance state ST16 than in the state that is the normal state ST11 and not the transition chance precursor state ST15. It becomes easy to be executed.

  Even in a situation where the transition chance precursor state ST15 is not reached, a false precursor state is obtained by winning the false precursor lottery in the sub MPU 82. In the false precursor state, the expectation degree of the transition to the transition chance state ST16 is greater than the state of the normal state ST11, which is neither the transition chance precursor state ST15 nor the false precursor state, as the content of each game on the image display device 66 It is easy to produce a high performance.

  The third transition mode is a case in which the transition is made to the bonus AT state ST17 and the transition is made after the bonus AT state ST17 ends. However, when the bonus AT state ST17 is shifted under a penalty situation described later, even if the bonus AT state ST17 is terminated, the normal AT state ST12 is not shifted. A transition from the normal AT state ST12 to the bonus AT state ST17 can also occur.

<Non-AT processing>
Next, the non-AT processing in step S1105 in the periodic processing (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command is received from the main MPU 72. If the lottery result command has been received, the winning combination data corresponding to the lottery result command is written in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1402.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1401 or if the process of step S1402 is executed, it is determined in step S1403 whether a stop command command has been received from the main MPU 72. If a stop command command has been received, stop order data is written to the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1404 in order to store the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the current game.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1403, or if the process of step S1404 has been executed, it is determined in step S1405 whether a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has not been received, the non-AT process is terminated as it is, and if the winning result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1406.

  In step S1406, it is determined whether or not the current winning result command corresponds to the transition to the bonus AT state. Specifically, when data indicating that the first special replay combination is won in the CB internal rear state is specified from the winning result command, or data indicating that the CB internal post state has resulted in a losing result. If the winning result command is specified, an affirmative determination is made in step S1406. In addition, data indicating that the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won in the situation where the AT1 signal is ON after the CB internal state is identified from the winning result command. Even when the stop sequence data stored in the sub-side RAM 84 specifies that the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, an affirmative determination is made in step S1406.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, it is determined in step S1407 whether data indicating that the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won is included in the winning result command. To do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1407, it means that the current transition to the bonus AT state has occurred under a penalty situation.

  Specifically, on the condition that the first bell prize or the second bell prize has occurred three times as a result of stopping other than the left reel 32L as the first stop despite the sub-side MPU 82 being not in the AT state, As will be described later, when the AT1 signal is turned on, and when the second special replay role or the third special replay role is won in that situation, and the first reels other than the left reel 32L are stopped, the main MPU 72 plays a game. The state is shifted to the bonus AT state. However, since this event is a penalty target event, the sub-side MPU 82 does not set the AT state. Therefore, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1407, “1” is set to the penalty AT flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1408. The penalty AT flag is a flag for identifying in the sub MPU 82 that the bonus AT state occurred under the penalty situation.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1407, or if the process of step S1408 is executed, “1” is set to the bonus AT flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 and the sub-side RAM 84 is set in step S1409. “4” is set in the provided execution target counter. The bonus AT flag is a flag for specifying in the sub MPU 82 that the gaming state managed in the main MPU 72 is the bonus AT state, and the execution target counter indicates the processing contents to be executed in the AT state. This is a counter for specifying by the side MPU 82. When “4” is set in the execution target counter, processing for advancing the bonus AT state is executed in the sub-side MPU 82. Thereafter, the non-AT processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1406, it is determined in step S1410 whether a penalty event has occurred. The penalty event is an event in which one of the winnings occurs while the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as a first stop in the non-AT state after the CB. When a penalty event occurs, there is a possibility that the actual medal grant rate is higher than the medal grant rate in the non-AT state set in the design stage of the slot machine 10. Therefore, when a penalty event occurs, a disadvantage is given to the player so as to prompt the stop of the left reel 32L as a first stop during the non-AT state.

  When a penalty event occurs, penalty image data is set in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), and sound output data setting process (step S1111). The sound output data for the penalty is set at. This notifies the player that a penalty event has occurred.

  If a penalty event occurs, an addition process to a penalty counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is executed in step S1411. In the addition process, “5”, which is a value corresponding to the number of penalty-corresponding games, is added to the value of the penalty counter. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the transition to the AT state is delayed by the value of the penalty counter. Thereafter, the non-AT processing is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1410, a transition chance management process is executed in step S1412 and a ceiling game management process is executed in step S1413. Then, after the winning handling process is executed in step S1414, the non-AT process is terminated. In the winning correspondence process, a process for displaying an image corresponding to the current winning combination on the image display device 66 is executed, and a sound corresponding to the occurrence of the winning is output through the speaker 65. To execute the process.

<Transition chance management process>
Next, the transition chance management processing in step S1412 in the non-AT processing (FIG. 32) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Since the transition chance management process is started on condition that a winning result command is received from the main MPU 72, the transition chance management process is started at the end of each game in the non-AT state.

  First, in step S1501, it is determined whether the transition chance state is in effect by determining whether the value of the transition chance counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. The transition chance counter is a counter for specifying in the sub-side MPU 82 whether or not the transition chance state is in effect and the end timing of the transition chance state. If it is not in the transition chance state, it is determined in step S1502 whether the transition standby counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more, thereby determining whether or not the transition chance precursor state is in effect. Determine. The transition standby counter is a counter for specifying in the sub-side MPU 82 whether or not it is a transition chance precursor state and an end timing of the transition chance precursor state.

  If it is not a sign of a transition chance, it is determined in step S1503 whether or not a transition chance trigger is won. In the internal post-state lottery table (FIG. 14), when the winning combination is IV = 7, 9-12, 14-16, it is determined that the winning transition trigger is won. However, even in the case of winning the transition chance trigger, if the transition to the bonus AT state is triggered, an affirmative determination is not made in step S1503.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, it is determined in step S1504 whether the value of the penalty counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the process of step S1505 to step S1508 is not executed, so that the transition chance state transition trigger does not occur. On the other hand, when the value of the penalty counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1505.

  In step S <b> 1505, an activation lottery table corresponding to both the current transition chance trigger and the number of digested games since the previous transition to the non-AT state is read from the sub-side ROM 83. In step S 1506, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the activation lottery table.

  Here, 0, 1, 2, and 3 are set as the remaining number of transition chances in the activation lottery table. Also, in the activation lottery table, the greater the value of the winning IV, the higher the probability that one or more transition chance remaining times will be selected and the greater the probability that more transition chance remaining times will be selected. The probability that one or more transition chance remaining times and a larger number of remaining transition chances will be selected as the number of digested games since the previous transition to the non-AT state increases. It is set to be high.

  In step S1507, it is determined whether one or more remaining transfer chance remaining times have been selected in the activation lottery process in step S1506. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1507, the remaining number of transition chances selected in the current lottery process is added to the remaining transition chance counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1508. The remaining transition chance counter is a counter for specifying in the sub-side MPU 82 whether or not there is an opportunity to shift to the transition chance state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1503, an affirmative determination is made in step S1504, a negative determination is made in step S1507, or if the process of step S1508 is executed, the sub-side RAM 84 is set in step S1509. It is determined whether or not the value of the remaining transfer chance counter is 1 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S1509, the transition chance management process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1509, the process proceeds to step S1510.

  In step S1510, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ceiling game counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is 64 or less, which is the regulation reference number. The remaining ceiling game counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining ceiling games in the sub-side MPU 82. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1510, the transition chance management process is terminated without setting the transition chance precursor state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that causes the transition to the transition chance state or stays in the transition chance state immediately before the transition to the normal AT state occurs due to the digestion of the number of ceiling games. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state transition trigger from occurring in combination.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1510, “10”, which is the number of continued games in the transition chance precursor state, is set in the transition standby counter of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1511. As a result, a transition chance precursor is obtained. Thereafter, the transition chance management process ends. When the value of the transition standby counter is 1 or more, the effect content of the image display device 66 is the content corresponding to the transition chance precursor state.

  If a transition chance precursor state is entered, an affirmative determination is made in step S1502 to proceed to step S1512. In step S1512, it is determined whether the value of the penalty counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the transition chance management process is terminated as it is. Thereby, in the penalty state, the number of continuous games in the transition chance precursor state is not consumed, and the transition to the transition chance state is delayed.

  When the value of the penalty counter is “0”, the value of the transition standby counter in the sub RAM 84 is decremented by 1 in step S1513, and the value of the transition standby counter becomes “0” in the subsequent step S1514. It is determined whether or not. If a negative determination is made in step S1514, the transition chance management process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1514, the process proceeds to step S1515.

  In step S1515, 1 is subtracted from the value of the transition chance remaining counter in the sub RAM 84. In subsequent step S1516, “10” which is the number of continuing games in the transition chance state is set in the transition chance counter of the sub-side RAM 84. Thereby, it will be in the transition chance state. Thereafter, the transition chance management process ends. When the value of the transition chance counter is 1 or more, a display effect for clearly indicating to the player that the transition chance state is in the image display device 66 is executed.

  If the transition chance state is entered, an affirmative determination is made in step S1501 to proceed to step S1517. In step S1517, a process during transition chance is executed. Thereafter, the transition chance management process ends.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing processing during transition chance.

  First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not a winning combination is won. The expectation-improving role is the same as the transition chance trigger that is determined in step S1503 in the transition chance management process (FIG. 33). That is, in the internal rear state lottery table (FIG. 14), if the winning combination is IV = 7, 9-12, or 14-16, it is determined that the winning combination is won. However, even if the winning combination is expected, the affirmative determination is not made in step S1601 when it is a trigger to shift to the bonus AT state.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, it is determined in step S1602 whether the value of the penalty counter in the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the processing of steps S1603 to S1606 is not executed, so that a setting opportunity for improving the degree of expectation does not occur. On the other hand, when the value of the penalty counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1603.

  In step S1603, a transition probability UP lottery process is executed. In the transition probability UP lottery process, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the probability of winning a transition in the transition lottery process in step S1609, which will be described later, is increased by one stage. Note that 1/10, 2/10, 3/10, 4/10, and 5/10 are set as probabilities of winning in the transfer lottery process in step S1609. Specifically, regarding the processing contents of the transition probability UP lottery process, first, a transition probability UP lottery table corresponding to the current expectation improving role is read from the sub-side ROM 83. The transition probability UP lottery table is set so that the greater the value of the winning IV, the higher the probability of winning the transition probability. In the transition probability UP lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is read from the transition probability UP lottery table. To verify.

  In step S1604, it is determined whether or not the transition probability UP is won. If the transition probability UP is won, in step S1605, the transition lottery table referred to in step S1609, which will be described later, is changed to a table having a one-step higher probability of becoming a transition winner than the current table. This increases the probability of winning the transition by one level.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1604, or if the process of step S1605 is executed, a value corresponding to the current winning combination is set in the delay counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1606. The delay counter is a counter for specifying in the sub-side MPU 82 whether or not to delay the transition opportunity state end trigger. In the case where “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “10” are set as the values set in step S1606, and the winning IV value is “7”. When “1” is selected and the winning IV value is “9” or “10”, “3” is selected, and when the winning IV value is “11” or “12” Is selected as “5”, “7” is selected when the winning IV value is “14”, “15”, and “IV” is selected when the winning IV value is “16”. “10” is selected.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1601, an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, or if the process of step S1606 is executed, it is determined whether or not a normal replay combination is won in step S1607. If the normal replay combination is won, it is determined in step S1608 whether the value of the penalty counter in the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the process of step S1609 and step S1610 is not executed, so that the trigger for executing the transfer lottery process does not occur. On the other hand, when the value of the penalty counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1609.

  In step S1609, a transfer lottery process is executed. In the transfer lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is read with respect to the currently read transfer lottery table. To verify. Then, in step S1610, it is determined whether or not a transition winning is made.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1607, an affirmative determination is made in step S1608, or a negative determination is made in step S1610, the value of the delay counter in the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more in step S1611. It is determined whether or not there is. If the value of the delay counter is 1 or more, after the value of the delay counter is decremented by 1 in step S1612, the process during the transition chance is terminated. If the value of the delay counter is “0”, after the value of the transition chance counter in the sub RAM 84 is decremented by 1 in step S1613, the process during the transition chance is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1610 that the player has won the transition, the transition setting process to the normal AT state in steps S1614 to S1617 is executed. Specifically, “1” is set to the normal AT flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1614. The normal AT flag is a flag for specifying that the sub MPU 82 is in the normal AT state.

  In the subsequent step S1615, a continuous game number lottery process at the start of the normal AT is executed. In the lottery process, first, the continuous game number lottery table at the start of the normal AT is read from the sub-side ROM 83. There are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as one set of continuous games in the normal AT state. In the continuous game number lottery table at the start of normal AT, the probability that 30 games are selected as the number of continuous games in one set is 5/10, the probability that 50 games are selected is 4/10, and 100 games are The probability of being selected is 1/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is stored in the continuous game number lottery table at the start of the normal AT. Check against.

  In the subsequent step S1616, the value of the number of continued games selected in the lottery process in step S1615 is set in the normal AT game counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84. The normal AT game counter is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify the number of continuing games in one set of normal AT states.

  In the subsequent step S1617, the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”. By setting “0” in the execution target counter, the sub-MPU 82 executes processing for advancing the pre-branch AT state in the normal AT state. Thereafter, the process during the transition chance is terminated.

<Ceiling game management processing>
Next, the ceiling game management process of step S1413 in the non-AT process (FIG. 32) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Since the ceiling game management process is started on condition that a winning result command is received from the main MPU 72, the ceiling game management process is started at the end of each game in the non-AT state.

  First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a ceiling game sign state is present by determining whether or not the value of the remaining ceiling game counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 32 or less. If a negative determination is made in step S1701, it is determined in step S1702 whether the value of the penalty counter in the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, the ceiling game management process is terminated after subtracting 1 from the penalty counter value in step S1703. That is, when the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the number of ceiling games is not subtracted even if the game is consumed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1701 or a negative determination is made in step S1702, the value of the remaining ceiling game counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is decremented by 1 in step S1704. Then, in step S1705, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ceiling game counter after the 1 subtraction is “0”. If it is not “0”, the present ceiling game management process is ended as it is, and if it is “0”, the transition setting process to the normal AT state in steps S1706 to S1709 is executed. Then, the ceiling game management process ends. The processing contents of these steps S1706 to S1709 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1614 to S1617 in the above transition chance processing (FIG. 34). As a result, the normal AT state is entered.

<Processing during AT in sub-side MPU 82>
Next, processing contents during AT executed in the sub MPU 82 will be described. Prior to description of specific processing contents executed by the sub-side MPU 82, each gaming state included in the AT state will be described with reference to an explanatory diagram of FIG.

  As described above, as the AT state, there are a normal AT state ST21 and a bonus AT state ST22. In both the normal AT state ST21 and the bonus AT state ST22, when the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won in the lottery process (FIG. 12) in the main MPU 72, it is possible to win them. Therefore, the control by the sub-side MPU 82 is performed so as to notify the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44. However, in the normal AT state ST21, the start and end are set not by the main MPU 72 but by the sub MPU 82, whereas in the bonus AT state ST22, the start and end settings are not set by the sub MPU 82. This is performed by the side MPU 72.

  Of these normal AT state ST21 and bonus AT state ST22, the bonus AT state ST22 has only one type, whereas the normal AT state ST21 has a pre-branch AT state ST31, a branch AT state ST32, There are four types of states, the final chance state ST33 and the added state ST34.

  The pre-branching AT state ST31 is an AT state that continues for the number of continuous games set at the start thereof. In the pre-branching AT state ST31, the image display device 66 executes a display effect for clearly indicating to the player that the pre-branching AT state ST31. In the AT state before branching ST31, the game for the set number of continuing games is digested, so that the state shifts to the branching AT state ST32.

  In the branching AT state ST32, a battle effect using the teammate character and the enemy character is performed on the image display device 66. In the battle effect, when the remaining set number of times in the normal AT state ST21 is 1 or more, or when the AT continuous lottery process is performed, the victory effect of the ally character or the draw of both characters is used as the battle effect. An effect is selected, and in other cases, a defeat effect of the teammate character is selected.

  When the victory effect or the draw effect is executed, the state returns to the pre-branch AT state ST31, and when the defeat effect is executed, the process proceeds to the final chance state ST33. In the final chance state ST33, a resurrection lottery process is executed according to the content of the winning combination of the game in the pre-branching AT state ST31 and the branching AT state ST32 and the content of the winning combination of the game in the final chance state ST33. Return to the pre-branch AT state ST31.

  In the pre-branching AT state ST31 and the branching AT state ST32, a transition is made to the added state ST34 according to the contents of the winning combination of the game in these states. When the transition condition to the added state ST34 is established in the pre-branch AT state ST31, even in the middle of the pre-branch AT state ST31, a transition is made from the game next to the game in which the transition condition is established to the added state ST34. On the other hand, when the transition condition to the added state ST33 is satisfied in the middle of the branch AT state ST32, the state shifts to the added state ST34 after the branch AT state ST32 ends.

  In the added state ST34, the image display device 66 executes a display effect for clearly indicating to the player that the added state ST34. In the added state ST34, an additional lottery process is executed according to the winning combination of the game, and the number of sets in the normal AT state ST21 is increased by becoming an additional winner. When the end condition is satisfied in the added state ST34, the state shifts to the pre-branch AT state ST31.

  In any of the pre-branch AT state ST31, the branch AT state ST32, the final chance state ST33, and the added state ST34, the transition to the bonus AT state ST22 is set in the main MPU 72, thereby shifting to the bonus AT state ST22. In the bonus AT state ST22, the image display device 66 executes a display effect for clearly showing the player that the bonus AT state ST22 is in effect. When the transition is made to the bonus AT state ST22 in the pre-branching AT state ST31, the state returns to the pre-branch AT state ST31 after the end of the bonus AT state ST22, and when the transition is made to the bonus AT state ST22 in the branching AT state ST32. When the AT state ST22 ends, the state returns to the branch AT state ST32, and when the state shifts to the bonus AT state ST22 in the added state ST34, the state returns to the added state ST34 after the bonus AT state ST22 ends. On the other hand, when the transition to the bonus AT state ST22 is made in the final chance state ST33, the state shifts to the pre-branch AT state ST31 after the bonus AT state ST22 ends.

<Processing during AT>
Next, the AT process in step S1106 in the periodic process (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1801, it is determined whether a lottery result command is received from the main MPU 72 or not. If a lottery result command has been received, winning combination data corresponding to the lottery result command is written in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1802.

  Thereafter, in step S1803, it is determined whether or not the penalty AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to “1”. In step S1804, whether or not the value of the penalty counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. In step S1805, it is determined whether or not the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won. If a negative determination is made in both step S1803 and step S1804, and an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, each stop button that enables generation of the first bell prize or the second bell prize in step S1806 The pressing order data of 42 to 44 is read from the contents of the lottery result command received this time and written in the sub-side RAM 84.

  In other words, in the bonus AT state that occurs when the second special replay win or the third special replay win is selected and the middle reel 32M or 32R is stopped as the first stop in a state that is not in the normal AT state, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are pressed. The order is not reported. Further, in the normal AT state in which a penalty event has occurred, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is not notified until the penalty game is consumed. In addition, since the process in step S1103 is executed in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the process during the AT is not executed in a situation that is not in the CB internal post-condition. Not. On the other hand, in the AT state that is not under the penalty situation, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is notified. Thereby, in the said AT state, the expectation degree of medal grant is higher than the case of the other game state.

  Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the order notified in the AT state, a bell winning is not generated but it is not treated as a penalty event. That is, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the order notified in the AT state, events such as the end of the AT state, temporary suspension of the AT state, and a decrease in the winning probability of the normal replay role Does not occur.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1801, an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, a negative determination is made in step S1805, or the process of step S1806 is executed In Step S1807, it is determined whether or not a stop command command is received from the main MPU 72. If a stop command command has been received, stop order data is written to the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1808 to store the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the current game.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1807, or if the process of step S1808 is executed, it is determined in step S1809 whether a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If a winning result command has been received, winning correspondence processing is executed in step S1810. In the winning correspondence process, a process for displaying an image corresponding to the current winning combination on the image display device 66 is executed, and a sound corresponding to the occurrence of the winning is output through the speaker 65. To execute the process.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1809, or if the process of step S1810 is executed, the value of the execution target counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is grasped in step S1811. As already described, the execution target counter is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify the processing content to be executed in the AT state.

  As processing executed by the sub-side MPU 82 in the AT state, a pre-branch AT state process for performing execution control of the pre-branch AT state (step S1812) and a branch AT state for performing execution control of the branch AT state Process (step S1813), an added state process for performing execution control of the added state (step S1814), a final chance process for performing execution control of the final chance state (step S1815), and a bonus AT state Bonus AT processing (step S1816) for performing execution control in the sub-side MPU 82 is set.

  In such a processing configuration, the execution target counter is a counter used by the sub-side MPU 82 to determine which of the plurality of types of processing is to be executed. In the address table, start addresses of programs for executing the above-described plural types of processing are set in correspondence with the numerical information of the execution target counter.

  In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the pre-branch AT state process (step S1812), and the start address SA1 is the start of the program for executing the branch AT state process (step S1813). The start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the added state process (step S1814), and the start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the final chance process (step S1815). Yes, the start address SA4 is the start address of the program for executing the bonus AT process (step S1816). Hereinafter, each process of step S1812 to step S1816 will be described in detail.

<Processing for AT state before branching>
First, the pre-branching AT state process executed in step S1812 of the AT process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1901, normal replay processing is executed. Although details will be described later, the normal replay process is a process for generating a trigger when the main MPU 72 changes the output state of the AT1 signal during the normal AT state.

  In a succeeding step S1902, it is determined whether or not a bonus AT start command is received from the main MPU 72. If a bonus AT start command has been received, “1” is set to the bonus AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 and “4” is set to the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1903. Thereby, in the next AT process (FIG. 37), the bonus AT process of step S1816 is executed.

  In the subsequent step S1904, after the privilege reference value “7” is added to the privilege point counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84, the pre-branch AT state processing is terminated. The privilege point counter is a counter for specifying in the sub MPU 82 the number of times that the normal AT state is set. The bonus point counter is added when a bonus lottery opportunity is won in the normal AT state and a bonus point is won in the bonus point lottery process. When the value of the privilege point counter is 7 × n or more (n is an integer of 1 or more), the normal AT state is set to n times, and even if the current normal AT state ends, the normal AT state Will be n consecutive times.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1902, it is determined in step S1905 whether or not a winning result command is received from the main MPU 72. If a winning result command has been received, it is determined in step S1906 whether the value of the penalty counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, after subtracting 1 from the value of the penalty counter in step S1907, the pre-branch AT state processing is terminated.

  When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more in the AT state before branching, AT preparation data is set in the display data setting process in step S1109 in the periodic process (FIG. 28), and the image display device 66 receives the AT preparation data. An image indicating that preparation is in progress is displayed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1908 to execute the first addition process. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the first addition process.

  In step S2001, it is determined whether or not a bonus lottery opportunity is won. When winning is made in any of IV = 7, 9, 10, 14 to 16 in the internal rear state lottery table (FIG. 14), it is determined that the bonus lottery opportunity is won.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, a privilege point lottery process is executed in step S2002. In the privilege point lottery process, a privilege point lottery table corresponding to the present privilege lottery opportunity is read from the sub-side ROM 83. In the privilege point lottery table, “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” are set as privilege points. Is set so as to increase the probability of selecting a privilege point having a larger value as the value of the winning IV is larger. In the privilege point lottery process, the sub-side lottery counter value updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the privilege point lottery table. To do.

  In subsequent step S2003, it is determined whether or not one or more privilege points are won. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the privilege point won this time is 2 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S2004, that is, if the privilege point won this time is “1”, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, the value of the last privilege point counter is written in the register of the sub-side MPU 82, and the value of the privilege point won this time is added to the privilege point counter.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2001, a negative determination is made in step S2003, or if the process of step S2005 is executed, the distribution flag provided in the sub RAM 84 is set to “1” in step S2006. It is determined whether or not is set. The distribution flag specifies in the sub-side MPU 82 that when two or more privilege points are selected in the privilege point lottery process, the two or more privilege points need to be divided and given to a plurality of consecutive games. Flag.

  If “1” is set in the distribution flag, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, the value of the last privilege point counter is written to the register of the sub MPU 82, and the bonus points allocated to the current game are added to the privilege point counter of the sub RAM 84.

  When the privilege point won this time is 2 or more, an affirmative determination is made in step S2004, and the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, a distribution lottery process is executed. In the distribution lottery process, the distribution lottery table corresponding to the current privilege point is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and further, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) is read out. The value of the lottery counter is checked against the distribution lottery table. For example, when the selected privilege point is “2”, the probability that 2 is added to the privilege point counter in the current game is ½, and the privilege point counter in each of the current game and the next game is The probability that 1 is added to is 1/2. Moreover, when the selected privilege point is 3 or more, the addition to the privilege point counter can be distributed over 3 or more consecutive games including the current game.

  In a succeeding step S2009, it is determined whether or not the result of the distribution lottery process is the distribution winning result. That is, it is determined whether or not the addition to the privilege point counter is distributed to a plurality of consecutive games. If a negative determination is made in step S2009, the process proceeds to step S2005 already described.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2009, “1” is set in the distribution flag of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S2010, and distribution data indicating the distribution mode of the privilege point selected this time is stored in the sub-side RAM 84. Write. Thereafter, in step S2011, the value of the last privilege point counter is written to the register of the sub MPU 82, and the bonus points allocated to the current game are added to the privilege point counter of the sub RAM 84.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2006, when the process of step S2007 is executed, or when the process of step S2011 is executed, after the addition state setting process is executed in step S2012, the first addition The process ends.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the added state.

  In step S2101, a calculation process is performed on the immediately preceding privilege point. Specifically, the value of the privilege point counter immediately before being stored in the register of the sub MPU 82 in step S2005, step S2007, or step S2011 is read. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value (specifically “7”) in the normal AT state.

  In the subsequent step S2102, calculation processing is executed for the privilege points currently stored in the privilege point counter. Specifically, the value of the privilege point counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value (specifically “7”) in the normal AT state.

  Thereafter, in step S2103, it is determined whether or not the remainder value derived by the calculation process in step S2102 is smaller than the remainder value derived by the calculation process in step S2101. In the configuration where the value of the privilege point that can be selected in the privilege point lottery process is smaller than the reference value corresponding to the above addition, the value after the addition to the privilege point counter is smaller than the value before the addition It means that the privilege point that is larger than 7 × (n−1) and smaller than 7 × n by the addition of the counter becomes 7 × n or more (n is an integer of 1 or more). That is, it means that an additional number of times of setting in the normal AT state has occurred.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the setting process of the added state is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2104. In step S 2104, “1” is set to the added state flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84. In a succeeding step S2105, “2” is set to the execution target counter of the sub RAM 84. By setting “2” in the execution target counter, the process for adding the state in step S1814 is executed in the next AT process (FIG. 37).

  In the subsequent step S2106, a lottery process for the number of compensation replays is executed. In the added state, it is easy to generate an extra set number of times in the normal AT state. However, the added state ends when the number of times of normal replay winning reaches the number of compensated replays. The lottery process for the number of compensation replays is a process for determining the number of compensation replays that will trigger the termination of the extra state by lottery at the time of transition to the extra state.

  In the lottery process for the number of compensation replays, the compensation replay lottery table at the time of transition to the added state is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and further, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) is read out. The value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the compensation replay lottery table. In the compensation replay lottery table at the time of transition to the added state, “1”, “2”, “3” are set as the number of compensation replays, and “1” is selected with a probability of 6/10, and the probability of 3/10 “2” is selected with “1” and “3” is selected with a probability of 1/10.

  After executing the lottery process for the number of compensation replays in step S2106, the number of compensation replays selected by the lottery process is set in a compensation replay number counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S2107. The compensation replay count counter is a counter for specifying the remaining compensation replay count in the sub-side MPU 82. Thereafter, the setting process of the added state is terminated.

  Here, as described above, the number of set times in the normal AT state is added according to the privilege points, but as described above, the front door 12 includes points that have not reached the set number of times in the privilege points. A privilege point notifying unit 67 for notifying and a stock notifying unit 68 for notifying the number of times of setting in the normal AT state are provided. The light emission control of the privilege point notification unit 67 and the stock notification unit 68 according to the privilege point is executed in the notification control process in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) of the periodic process (FIG. 28).

  FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the notification control process.

  In the notification control process, first, in step S2201, a calculation process is executed for the privilege points currently stored in the privilege point counter. Specifically, the value of the privilege point counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value (specifically “7”) in the normal AT state.

  In subsequent step S2202, the group corresponding to the quotient of the calculation result in step S2201, that is, the remaining number of sets in the normal AT state, is identified by referring to the stock notification table stored in the sub-side ROM 83. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 41B, the stock notification table has a correspondence relationship between the display color of the stock notification unit 68 and the numerical range of the remaining set number of times in the normal AT state (the quotient of the calculation result). It has been established. Specifically, the remaining set count of 0 corresponds to white, the remaining set count of 1 to 3 corresponds to blue, and the remaining set count of 4 to 6 corresponds to yellow. The remaining set times of 7 to 9 correspond to green, the remaining set times of 10 to 11 correspond to red, and the remaining set times of 12 or more correspond to rainbow color.

  In step S2202, it is determined which group the quotient value derived in step S2201 belongs to in the stock notification table. In step S2203, display color data corresponding to the grasped group is read from the sub ROM 83 and written to the sub RAM 84. Thereby, the stock notification unit 68 is controlled to emit light so that the display color corresponding to the display color data is obtained.

  In the subsequent step S2204, the remainder of the calculation result in step S2201, that is, the points that have not been added to the set number of bonus points is specified. Then, the light emission data corresponding to the specified point is written in the sub-side RAM 84, so that the number of unit point display units 67a corresponding to the specified point is turned on. Light emission control is performed.

  Thereafter, in step S2205, the light emission data corresponding to the value of the victory counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is written in the sub-side RAM 84, so that the unit victory number display unit 69a corresponding to the value of the victory counter is displayed. The light emission control of the victory number notifying unit 69 is performed so as to be in the lighting state. The victory counter is a counter for specifying in the sub MPU 82 the number of times that the battle effect is the victory effect in the AT state that continues without entering the non-AT state. Thereafter, the notification control process is terminated.

  With reference to FIG. 42, a state where privilege points are distributed and added to a plurality of games in the AT state before branching will be described. FIG. 42 (A) is a timing chart showing how bonus points are allocated and added, FIG. 42 (a) shows a game execution period in which bonus points are won, and FIG. 42 (b) shows another game. 42 (c) shows the state of the privilege point counter, and FIG. 42 (d) shows the execution period in the added state. 42 (B1) to 42 (B4) are explanatory diagrams for explaining light emission modes of the privilege point notification unit 67 and the stock notification unit 68. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), a game for winning a privilege point is started at the timing t1 of the situation in the AT state before branching, and the game is ended at the timing t2. In this case, in a situation where the value of the privilege point counter is already “4”, 3 points are selected as the bonus points to be added, and distribution data is set to be added one point at a time for three consecutive games including the game. Is done. Therefore, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), the value of the privilege point counter increases by “1”. Thus, as shown in FIG. 42 (B1), as shown in FIG. 42 (B2), the number of unit point display portions 67a that are lit on the left side and the right side is four. The number of unit point display portions 67a is five.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 42 (b) at the timing of t3 and at the timing of t4, one game is completed, and at each timing, as shown in FIG. The value increases by “1”. Thereby, in the privilege point alerting | reporting part 67, as shown in FIG.42 (B3) and FIG.42 (B4), the number of the unit point display parts 67a which will be in a lighting state in each of the left side and the right side increases one by one. As the value of the privilege point counter increases in this way, the value of the privilege point counter becomes “7” as shown in FIG. 42 (c) at the timing of t4. Thereby, as shown in FIG.42 (d), the addition state is started from the timing of t5.

  Further, since the value of the privilege point counter is “7”, the remaining number of sets in the normal AT state is 1, so that the display color of the stock notification unit 68 is changed as shown in FIG. 42 (B4). Specifically, it becomes blue. Thereby, the player can confirm that the display color of the stock notification unit 68 is blue, and know that the remaining set number of times in the normal AT state is 1 or more and 3 or less. Become.

  Returning to the description of the pre-branch AT state process (FIG. 38), after the first addition process is executed in step S1908, the value of the execution target counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is “2” in step S1909. It is determined whether or not. When the value of the execution target counter is “2”, it means that the transition to the added state has occurred as a result of the first adding process in step S1908. In this case, the pre-branch AT state processing is terminated without executing the processing after step S1910.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1909, the process proceeds to step S1910. In step S1910, 1 is subtracted from the value of the normal AT game counter in the sub-side RAM 84. In step S 1911, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal AT game counter after the 1 subtraction is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S 1911, the process for the previous AT state before branching is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S 1911, the process for setting the branch AT state is executed in step S 1912. The pre-branching AT state processing is terminated.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a branch AT state setting process.

  First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the value of the privilege point counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 7 or more. If it is 7 or more, 7 is subtracted from the value of the privilege point counter in step S2302.

  In the subsequent step S2303, a battle lottery process is executed. In the battle lottery process, the battle lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read. Check against the battle lottery table. In the battle lottery table, a victory effect and a draw effect are set as battle effects, and the probability of being a win effect is ½ and the probability of being a draw effect is ½. .

  In the subsequent step S2304, a value corresponding to the battle lottery result is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub RAM 84, and a flag setting process corresponding to the battle lottery result is executed. The branch AT game counter is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify the number of continuing games in the branch AT state, and is one of 10 to 13 games in the case of a win effect, and 10 in the case of a draw effect. Or 11 games. In the battle lottery process, not only one of the victory effect and the draw effect is selected, but also the number of continuous games in the case of the victory effect and the number of continuous games in the case of the draw effect are selected.

  In addition, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), a data table that enables display of a moving image corresponding to the value set in the branch AT game counter and the type of battle effect is displayed on the sub-side. Read from the ROM 83 and output a signal to the image display device 66 according to the data table. Thereby, the display effect corresponding to the selected battle effect is performed over a plurality of games in the image display device 66. In the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the selected battle effect is read and the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). ), The sound output data corresponding to the selected battle effect is read, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. Thereby, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 66 are performed.

  Thereafter, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the result of the battle lottery process in step S2303 is a winning effect winning. If the winning effect is won, 1 is added to the value of the victory counter in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S2306. As described above, when the notification control process (FIG. 41 (a)) is executed, when the value of the victory counter is incremented by 1, the victory number notifying unit 69 matches the unit victory in the lit state accordingly. The number display portion 69a is increased by one.

  In a succeeding step S2307, it is determined whether or not the value of the victory counter after adding 1 is “12”. If it is “12”, the AT continuation probability is set to the highest probability in step S2308.

  The AT continuation probability is the probability of winning an AT continuation in the AT continuation lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the normal AT state in a situation where the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is “0”. is there. Specifically, 50%, 60%, 70%, 77%, 82%, and 88% are set as the probability of winning the AT continuation. The AT continuation probability that is initially set when transitioning from the non-AT state to the normal AT state differs depending on the mode that triggers the transition to the normal AT state.

  For example, when the transition from the transition chance state to the normal AT state is performed, a lottery of the AT continuation probability is performed, so that 50% is selected with a probability of 90/100, and 60% is selected with a probability of 8/100, 70% is selected with a probability of 2/100. In addition, when the number of ceiling games is exhausted and the normal AT state is entered, a lottery of AT continuation probability is selected, so that 50% is selected with a probability of 80/100, and with a probability of 18/100. 60% is selected and 70% is selected with a probability of 2/100. In addition, when winning the second special replay role or the third special replay role and shifting to the bonus AT state, and then shifting to the normal AT state, 77% is selected, and the first special replay role is won and the bonus 82% is selected when shifting to the AT state and then shifting to the normal AT state, and the highest probability is 88% when shifting to the bonus AT state as a result of losing and then shifting to the normal AT state. Is selected. That is, the AT continuation probability set first is higher in the case of shifting to the normal AT state triggered by the shift to the bonus AT state than in the case of directly shifting to the normal AT state.

  As described above, the AT continuation probability is set at the time of transition to the normal AT state, but in the normal AT state that is continuous without entering the non-AT state, the victory effect has occurred 12 times that is the predetermined number of executions. In this case, the AT continuation probability is set to 88% of the highest probability. As a result, when the victory effect is achieved in the battle effect, not only is the continuation of the normal AT state confirmed, but also the opportunity to increase the AT continuation probability is given, so the player can achieve the victory effect in the battle effect. The game is played with the expectation that it will become, and the interest of the game is improved.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2301, AT continuous lottery processing is executed in step S2309. In the AT continuous lottery process, first, an AT continuous lottery table corresponding to the currently set AT continuation probability is read from the sub ROM 83 and further updated in the sub RAM 84 periodically (for example, 2 msec). The value is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the AT continuous lottery table.

  In a succeeding step S2310, it is determined whether or not the result of the AT continuous lottery process is AT continuous winning. If the AT continuous winning is selected, the battle lottery process is executed in step S2311, and the value corresponding to the battle lottery result is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S2312, A flag setting process corresponding to the battle lottery result is executed. The processing contents of steps S2311 and S2312 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2303 and S2304. In addition, the content of the battle effect in the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 is the same as that described in the case of step S2303 and step S2304.

  In a succeeding step S2313, it is determined whether or not the result of the battle lottery process in the step S2311 is a winning effect winning. If the winning effect is won, 1 is added to the value of the victory counter in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S2314. Then, in step S2315, it is determined whether or not the value of the victory counter is “12”. If the value of the victory counter is “12”, the AT continuation probability is set to the highest probability in step S2308.

  On the other hand, if the value of the victory counter is not “12”, the process proceeds to step S2316. In step S2316, an AT continuation probability promotion lottery process is executed. In the promotion lottery process, the promotion lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, the value of the sub-side lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is promoted as described above. Check against the lottery table. In the promotion lottery table, the probability of winning the promotion is set to be 6/10. In step S2317, it is determined whether or not the result of the promotion lottery process is a promotion win. If the result is a promotion win, in step S2318, the AT continuation probability is set to one level higher.

  The AT lottery promotion lottery process is executed when a victory effect is achieved as described above, and is not executed when a draw effect is achieved. As a result, when the victory effect is achieved in the battle effect, not only is the continuation of the normal AT state confirmed, but also the opportunity to increase the AT continuation probability is given, so the player can achieve the victory effect in the battle effect. The game is played with the expectation that it will become, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process is not executed when the normal AT state continues because the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more, and when the AT continuation lottery process results in the AT continuation lottery. Executed. When the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more, the continuation of the normal AT state is confirmed, so that the player can confirm the progress of the battle effect with peace of mind. On the other hand, when the AT continuous lottery process is executed, the normal AT state may end when the AT continuation is lost, so the player confirms the progress of the battle effect while expecting to become a victory effect or a draw effect. Will be. In this case, the AT continuation lottery process will be executed and the AT continuation promotion will be executed on the condition that the AT continuation lottery process has been won and the winning effect will be achieved. It will be possible to increase the game interest.

  On the other hand, if the AT continuation lottery process in step S2309 causes the AT continuation to be lost, and a negative determination is made in step S2310, the process proceeds to step S2319. In step S2319, a value corresponding to the defeat effect is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub RAM 84, and “1” is set in the defeat effect flag provided in the sub RAM 84.

  In addition, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), a data table that enables display of a moving image corresponding to the value set in the branch AT game counter and the type of battle effect is displayed on the sub-side. Read from the ROM 83 and output a signal to the image display device 66 according to the data table. Thereby, the display effect corresponding to the selected battle effect is performed over a plurality of games in the image display device 66. In the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the selected battle effect is read and the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). ), The sound output data corresponding to the selected battle effect is read, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. Thereby, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 66 are performed.

  Here, when the defeat effect is executed, the number of games set in the branch AT game counter is “10”. On the other hand, the number of games set in the case of the victory effect is 10 to 13 games, and the number of games set in the case of the draw effect is 10 or 11 games. The branch AT state continues for the number of games corresponding to the value set in the branch AT game counter, and AT processing is executed in the sub MPU 82 during the branch AT state. Then, the victory effect or the draw effect can be longer than the case where the AT process is performed, as well as the case where the normal AT state is continued. Thereby, the advantage of becoming a victory effect or a draw effect is further increased, and the degree of attention to the battle effect is increased.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2305, a negative determination is made in step S2307, a process in step S2308 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S2313, a negative determination is made in step S2317, a step When the process of S2318 is executed, or when the process of step S2319 is executed, “1” is set to the branch AT state flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 and the sub-side RAM 84 is executed in step S2320. After setting the value of the target counter to “1”, the branch AT state setting process is terminated. Thereby, in the next AT process (FIG. 37), the branch AT state process of step S1813 is executed.

<Branch AT state processing>
Next, the branch AT state process executed in step S1813 of the AT process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2401, a push order avoidance process is executed. The push order avoidance process, which will be described in detail later, is to prevent the occurrence of an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal in the main MPU 72 even though the normal AT state extended resort does not occur. It is processing.

  In a succeeding step S2402, it is determined whether or not a bonus AT start command is received from the main MPU 72. If the bonus AT start command has been received, “1” is set to the bonus AT flag in the sub-side RAM 84 and “4” is set to the execution target counter in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S2403. Thereby, in the next AT process (FIG. 37), the bonus AT process of step S1816 is executed.

  In the subsequent step S2404, the battle effect data already set in the current branch AT state is stored and held in the sub-side RAM 84. The battle effect data stored and held in this case includes the value of the branch AT game counter set in the pre-branch AT state process (step S1812) and the battle effect when the current branch AT state is started. The flag state corresponding to the type and control data of the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 from the start game to the end game of the battle effect in the current branch AT state are included. As a result, when returning to the branch AT state after the bonus AT state ends, the battle effect in the branch AT state performed before the start of the bonus AT state can be restarted from the start. Thereafter, in step S2405, “7” is added to the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84, and then the pre-branching AT state process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2402, it is determined in step S2406 whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has not been received, this branch AT state process is terminated as it is, and if the winning result command has been received, the second extra process is executed in step S2407. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the second addition process.

  In step S2501, it is determined whether or not a bonus lottery opportunity is won. When winning is made in any of IV = 7, 9, 10, 14 to 16 in the internal rear state lottery table (FIG. 14), it is determined that the bonus lottery opportunity is won. If a negative determination is made in step S2501, the second addition process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, privilege point lottery processing is executed in step S2502. In the privilege point lottery process, a privilege point lottery table corresponding to the present privilege lottery opportunity is read from the sub-side ROM 83. In the privilege point lottery table, “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” are set as privilege points. Is set so as to increase the probability of selecting a privilege point having a larger value as the value of the winning IV is larger. In the privilege point lottery process, the sub-side lottery counter value updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the privilege point lottery table. To do.

  In subsequent step S2503, it is determined whether or not one or more privilege points are won. If a negative determination is made in step S2503, the second addition process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, the process proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, the value of the last privilege point counter is written in the register of the sub MPU 82, and the value of the privilege point won this time is added to the privilege point counter.

  In a succeeding step S2505, a calculation process is executed for the immediately preceding privilege point. Specifically, the value of the privilege point counter immediately before being stored in the register of the sub-side MPU 82 in step S2504 is read. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value (specifically “7”) in the normal AT state.

  In the subsequent step S2506, a calculation process is executed for the privilege points currently stored in the privilege point counter. Specifically, the value of the privilege point counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value (specifically “7”) in the normal AT state.

  Thereafter, in step S2507, it is determined whether or not the remainder value derived by the calculation process in step S2506 is smaller than the remainder value derived by the calculation process in step S2505. In the configuration where the value of the privilege point that can be selected in the privilege point lottery process is smaller than the reference value corresponding to the above addition, the value after the addition to the privilege point counter is smaller than the value before the addition It means that the privilege point that is larger than 7 × (n−1) and smaller than 7 × n by the addition of the counter becomes 7 × n or more (n is an integer of 1 or more). That is, it means that an additional number of times of setting in the normal AT state has occurred.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2507, the setting process of the added state is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2507, “1” is set in the 1-bit addition state transition flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S2508, and then the second addition process is terminated. The added state transition flag is a flag for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify that the state should be shifted to the added state after the branch AT state ends.

  Returning to the description of the branch AT state process (FIG. 44), after the second addition process is executed in step S2407, the branch AT game counter value in the sub RAM 84 is decremented by 1 in step S2408. Incidentally, each time the value of the branch AT game counter is decremented by 1, the display control data table and the light emission control data for the battle effect currently set in steps S1109 to S1111 in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The reference range of the table and the sound output control data table is switched to the reference range corresponding to the next game. Thereby, every time one game is consumed, the effect range of the battle effect is switched to the effect range corresponding to the next game.

  Thereafter, in step S2409, it is determined whether or not the value of the branch AT game counter after “1” subtraction is “0”. If it is not “0”, the branch AT state processing is terminated as it is. If it is “0”, the branch AT state end processing is executed in step S2410, and then this branch AT state is completed. End the process.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the end processing of the branch AT state.

  First, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the battle effect executed this time is a defeat effect by determining whether or not “1” is set in the defeat effect flag of the sub RAM 84. If “1” is set in the defeat effect flag, it is determined in step S2602 whether or not the value of the privilege point counter in the sub RAM 84 is 7 or more. If it is less than 7, the defeat effect flag in the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0” and the branch AT state flag in the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0” in step S2603. In step S2603, “1” is set to the final chance flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84, and “3” is set to the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84. Thus, in the next AT process (FIG. 37), the final chance process in step S1815 is executed. Thereafter, the end processing of this branch AT state is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2602 that the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more, the process proceeds to step S2604. In step S2604, 7 is subtracted from the value of the privilege point counter. In subsequent step S2605, a battle lottery process is executed. The process contents of the battle lottery process are the same as the process contents of step S2303 and the process contents of step S2311 in the branch AT state setting process (FIG. 43).

  In the subsequent step S2606, a value corresponding to the battle lottery result in step S2605 is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub RAM 84, and a flag setting process corresponding to the battle lottery result is executed. In this case, when the win effect is selected, the branch AT game counter is set to “3” so that the branch AT state is extended by 3 games, and when the draw effect is selected, the branch AT state is 1 game. Set “1” in the branch AT game counter so that it is extended.

  In other words, if the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7 or more during the branch AT state in which the defeat effect is selected as the battle effect, and the consecutive AT in the normal AT state is confirmed, the number of continued games in the branch AT state is extended. . In the branch AT state, processing for AT is executed. As a result, when the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7 or more in the middle of the branch AT state in which the defeat effect is selected, the number of continuous games in the branch AT state is not only determined, but also the number of continuous games in the branch AT state is extended. This is advantageous to the player. Since the extended game is used to execute a revival effect that is changed from a defeat effect to a victory effect or a draw effect, the degree of attention on the effect is also increased.

  Further, the number of continuous games extended in the branch AT state is greater when the victory effect is selected than when the draw effect is selected. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage when the victory effect is selected, and it is possible to increase the expectation that the victory effect will occur.

  In step S 2606, the defeat effect flag in the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”, and “1” is set to the restoration flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84. The revival flag is a flag for specifying in the sub MPU 82 that the revival of the victory effect or the draw effect has occurred in a situation where the defeat effect is selected.

  Thereafter, in step S2607, processing for winning effect is executed. In the process for winning effect, when the winning effect is selected by the battle lottery process in the immediately preceding step S2605, the process of steps S2306 to S2308 in the branch AT state setting process (FIG. 43) is executed. Specifically, when the victory effect is selected, 1 is added to the value of the victory counter in the sub-side RAM 84, and it is determined whether or not the value of the victory counter after the addition is “12”. If “12”, the AT continuation probability is set to the highest probability. Thereafter, the end processing of this branch AT state is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2601, it is determined in step S2608 whether or not the defeat effect is selected by determining whether or not “1” is set in the restoration flag of the sub-side RAM 84. It is determined whether a victory effect or a draw effect has been restored. Further, in step S2609, it is determined whether or not the added state transition flag is set to “1” in the sub-side RAM 84, so that the privilege during the branch AT state in which the victory effect or the draw effect is selected. It is determined whether or not the value of the point counter is 7 or more.

  If a negative determination is made in both step S2608 and step S2609, the pre-branch AT state setting process is executed in step S2610, and then the branch AT state end process is terminated.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the pre-branching AT state.

  In step S2701, it is determined whether or not the battle effect finally performed in the current branch AT state is a victory effect. If it is a victory effect, in step S2702, a continuous game number lottery process at the time of the victory effect is executed. In the lottery process, first, a continuation game number lottery table at the time of winning effect is read from the sub-side ROM 83. As already described, there are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as the number of continuous games in the normal AT state. In the continuation game number lottery table at the time of winning effect, the probability that 30 games will be selected as the number of continuation games in one set is 1/10, the probability that 50 games will be selected is 4/10, and 100 games are selected. The probability of being 5/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is stored in the number-of-continuous-game lottery table at the time of the winning effect. To verify.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2701 that it is a draw effect, in step S2703, a continuous game number lottery process at the time of the draw effect is executed. In the lottery process, first, the continuation game number lottery table at the time of the draw effect is read from the sub-side ROM 83. As already described, there are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as the number of continuous games in the normal AT state. In the lottery table for the number of continuous games at the time of the draw, the probability that 30 games will be selected as the number of continuous games in a set is 3/10, the probability that 50 games will be selected is 5/10, and 100 games are selected. The probability of being 2/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is stored in the number-of-continuous-game lottery table at the time of the draw effect. To verify.

  When the process of step S2702 or step S2703 is executed, a value corresponding to the number of continuous games selected in the lottery process of step S2702 or the lottery process of step S2703 is set in step S2704 to the normal AT game in the sub-side RAM 84. Set to the counter. Thereafter, in step S2705, the branch AT state flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”, and the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the pre-branching AT state process in step S1812 is executed in the next AT process (FIG. 37). Thereafter, the pre-branching AT state setting process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the branch AT state termination process (FIG. 46), if an affirmative determination is made in step S2608 or step S2609, the processes of steps S2611 to S2614 are executed. In step S2611, “1” is set to the added state of the sub-side RAM 84, and the branch AT state flag is cleared to “0”. In the subsequent step S2612, “2” is set to the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84. By setting “2” in the execution target counter, the process for adding the state in step S1814 is executed in the next AT process (FIG. 37).

  Thereafter, a lottery process for the number of compensation replays is executed in step S2613, and a process for setting the compensation replay number counter is executed in step S2614, and then the end process of the main branch AT state is terminated. The processing contents of step S2613 and step S2614 are the same as the processing contents of step S2106 and step S2107 in the added state setting process (FIG. 40).

<Progression mode of branch AT state>
Next, the progress of the branch AT state will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. FIG. 48 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the progress of the branching AT state, and FIGS. 48 (B1) to 48 (B6) are diagrams simply showing the contents of battle effects in the image display device 66. FIG.

  When the pre-branch AT state (ST41) is completed and the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more (ST42), the victory effect (ST43) or the draw effect (ST44) is selected in the battle lottery process. In this case, the normal AT state is extended, and the state returns to the pre-branch state (ST45). In addition, before shifting to the pre-branch state (ST45), it is possible to shift to the added state or the bonus AT state.

  When the pre-branch AT state (ST41) ends and the value of the privilege point counter is less than 7 (ST51), the AT continuous lottery process (ST52) is executed. As a result, if it is AT continuous winning, the victory effect (ST53) or the draw effect (ST54) is selected in the battle lottery process. In this case, the normal AT state is extended, and the state returns to the pre-branch state (ST45). In addition, before shifting to the pre-branch state (ST45), it is possible to shift to the added state or the bonus AT state. On the other hand, when the continuation is lost in the AT continuous lottery process (ST52), the defeat effect (ST55) is selected as the battle effect.

  Here, the content of a battle effect is demonstrated easily, referring FIG. 48 (B1)-(B6).

  In the battle effect, first, as shown in FIG. 48 (B1), the teammate character CH1 and the enemy character CH2 are displayed on the image display device 66. In the battle effect, a video is displayed in each game, but when the pre-switching display content defined in each game is reached, the display content before the switching until the next game is started. The still image display by is continued.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (B2), only the friend character CH1 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 48 (B3), only the enemy character CH2 is displayed. Then, the state of the battle by both characters CH1 and CH2 is displayed as a moving image. In the case of the victory effect, as shown in FIG. 48 (B4), the appearance of the teammate character CH1 winning the enemy character CH2 is displayed. In the case of the draw effect, as shown in FIG. 48 (B5). When the teammate character CH1 and the enemy character CH2 are both standing up is displayed, and the defeat effect is displayed, as shown in FIG. 48 (B6), the teammate character CH1 is defeated by the enemy character CH2. The

  Returning to the description of FIG. 48 (A), when the continuation is lost in the AT continuous lottery process (ST52) and the defeat effect (ST55) is selected as the battle effect, the value of the privilege point counter is 7 at the end of the defeat effect. It is determined whether or not this is the case. If the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more (ST61), the revival victory effect (ST62) or the revival draw effect (ST63) is selected in the battle lottery process. In this case, the normal AT state is extended, and after the added state is performed, the state returns to the pre-branch state (ST64). On the other hand, if the value of the privilege point counter is less than 7 (ST65), the process proceeds to the final chance state (ST66).

  With the above configuration, if the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is 1 or more, the consecutive AT in the normal AT state is fixed, and even if the remaining set number is “0”, the continuous winning is performed in the AT continuous lottery process. As a result, the normal AT state continues. As a result, it is possible to increase the chance that the normal AT state continues.

  In addition, even if the AT continuation lottery process becomes unsuccessful, the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7 or more during the branching AT state, and the remaining set number of times in the normal AT state becomes 1 or more. It will be a villa. As a result, even if a defeat effect is generated in the branch AT state, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for continuing the normal AT state.

  In addition, even if the AT continuation lottery process once becomes out of continuation, if the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7 or more during the branch AT state and the normal AT state continues, the start of the subsequent branch AT state If the value of the privilege point counter is less than 7, the AT continuous lottery process is executed again. As a result, before the normal AT state ends, the execution chance of the AT continuous lottery process is secured, and it is possible to suitably enhance the expectation that the normal AT state will continue.

<The AT continuation probability is promoted>
Next, how the AT continuation probability is promoted in the AT continuous lottery process will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  As already explained, six types of AT continuation probabilities of 50%, 60%, 70%, 77%, 82% and 88% are set. When shifting to the normal AT state via the bonus AT state, the AT continuation probability at the time of the transition is one of 77%, 82%, and 88%. On the other hand, when the transition is made directly to the normal AT state without going through the bonus AT state, the AT continuation probability at the time of the transition is basically 50%.

  In this case, if the AT continuation lottery process is AT continuation winning, the battle lottery process is victorious winning, and the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process is further promoted, the AT continuation probability is increased by one step. . That is, 50% is 60%, 60% is 70%, 70% is 77%, 77% is 82%, and 82% is 88%. As a result, the higher the normal AT state is, the higher the probability that the AT continuation probability is higher, and the normal AT state becomes easier. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of the normal AT state being extended.

  In addition, when the victory effect occurs 12 times in the normal AT state without interposing the non-AT state, the AT continuation probability is the highest probability regardless of which probability the AT continuation probability at that time is. That is 88%. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting a victory effect to be generated in the battle effect, and the interest of the battle effect is increased, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Here, when there are two chances of the remaining set number and the AT continuous lottery process as opportunities for the normal AT state to continue, the normal AT state is triggered when the remaining set number is 1 or more. Even if it continues, a battle lottery process is performed and a victory effect can generate | occur | produce. When the victory effect is generated 12 times, the AT probability of the AT continuous lottery process is the highest probability. As a result, when there are two chances of the remaining set number of times and the AT continuous lottery process as opportunities for the normal AT state to continue, both opportunities regarding whether or not the AT continuation probability becomes the highest probability are given. It becomes possible to associate closely.

  In addition, the slot machine 10 is provided with a stock notification unit 68 for notifying the remaining number of sets in the normal AT state. In the stock notification unit 68, the display color is changed according to the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state. Therefore, by checking the display color, the player grasps how many times the remaining sets are set. Is possible. Thus, by confirming the number of remaining sets by checking the stock notification unit 68, the player himself can determine the degree of expectation that the AT continuation probability becomes the highest probability in relation to the number of executions of the victory effect. Will grasp. Therefore, it is possible to suitably enhance the expectation that the AT continuation probability becomes the highest probability.

  Further, the slot machine 10 is provided with a winning number notifying unit 69 for notifying the number of winning effects. As a result, the player can clearly recognize the number of winning effects by checking the winning number notifying unit 69.

<Additional state transition timing>
Next, the transition timing to the added state in the pre-branch AT state and the branch AT state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  50A shows the execution period in the AT state before branching, FIG. 50B shows the execution period in the branching AT state, FIG. 50C shows the execution period in the added state, and FIG. Indicates the timing when the value of the privilege point counter is a multiple of 7.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (a), the pre-branch AT state is started at the timing of t1, and as a result of each game in the pre-branch AT state, as shown in FIG. 50 (d), as shown in FIG. The counter value is 7 × n (n is an integer of 1 or more). As a result, the pre-branch AT state is terminated as shown in FIG. 50 (a), and the added state is started as shown in FIG. 50 (c). That is, in the AT state before branching, the state shifts to the added state at the timing when the value of the privilege point counter becomes a multiple of 7 or more.

  After that, at the timing of t3, the added state is completed as shown in FIG. 50C, so that the pre-branch AT state is restored as shown in FIG. 50A. In this case, the pre-branch AT state is restored in the state of the number of continuous games remaining before the transition to the added state.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the pre-branch AT state ends as shown in FIG. 50 (a), whereby the branch AT state starts as shown in FIG. 50 (b). As a result of each game in the branch AT state, as shown in FIG. 50D, the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7 × (n + 1) (n is an integer of 1 or more) at the timing of t5. However, the branch AT state does not end at the timing t5 as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), when the branch AT state ends, the added state is started as shown in FIG. 50 (c). That is, in the branch AT state, the state does not shift to the added state at the timing when the value of the privilege point counter becomes a multiple of 7 or more, and shifts to the added state when the branch AT state ends. Thereby, it is prevented that the execution aspect of a battle effect becomes complicated.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t7, the added state is completed as shown in FIG. 50C, and the pre-branch AT state is started as shown in FIG. 50A.

<Additional state processing>
Next, the added state process executed in step S1814 of the in-AT process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2801, a push order avoidance process is executed. The push order avoidance process, which will be described in detail later, is to prevent the occurrence of an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal in the main MPU 72 even though the normal AT state extended resort does not occur. It is processing.

  In a succeeding step S2802, it is determined whether or not a bonus AT start command is received from the main MPU 72. If a bonus AT start command has been received, “1” is set to the bonus AT flag in the sub-side RAM 84 and “4” is set to the execution target counter in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S2803. Thereby, in the next AT process (FIG. 37), the bonus AT process of step S1816 is executed. Thereafter, in step S 2804, “7” is added to the privilege point counter in the sub-side RAM 84, and then the process for the added state is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2802, it is determined in step S2805 whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has not been received, the process for the extra state is terminated as it is, and if the winning result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2806.

  In step S2806, it is determined whether or not an extra lottery opportunity is won. When winning is made in any of IV = 7, 9, 10, 14 to 16 in the internal rear state lottery table (FIG. 14), it is determined that the bonus lottery opportunity is won.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2806, an additional lottery table corresponding to the current addition mode and the winning combination of the current game is read from the sub ROM 83 in step S2807. In the extra lottery table, “0”, “1”, “2”, and “3” are set as the extra number. In addition, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 52A, the first addition mode, the second addition mode, and the third addition mode are set as the addition mode, and set when the state is shifted to the addition state. In the first addition mode, the addition probability is the lowest, and even when the addition occurs, a small number of additions is easily selected. In addition, the second addition mode that can be shifted from the first addition mode has a higher addition probability than the first addition mode, and if an addition occurs, the number of additions is selected more than in the first addition mode. It is easy to be done. Further, the third addition mode that can be shifted from the first addition mode or the second addition mode has a higher addition probability than the second addition mode, and when the addition occurs, the number of times is larger than that in the second addition mode. The number of times to add is easy to select. In addition, in relation to the winning combination, the larger the value of the winning IV, the higher the probability of addition, and the higher the value of the winning IV, the higher the number of additional times. The probability of being selected is set to be high.

  In a succeeding step S2808, an extra lottery process is executed. In the extra lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the above-mentioned extra lottery table.

  In a succeeding step S2809, it is determined whether or not the result of the extra lottery process is an extra win. If it is an extra winning, 7 × n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is added to the privilege point counter in step S2810. In this case, n is one or more additional times selected in the extra lottery process.

  Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 52B, the privilege point counter has a data amount of 1 byte. The privilege point counter is a counter to which a value less than the privilege standard numerical value (specifically, “7”) is added when a privilege point is won in the privilege point lottery process in the pre-branch AT state or the branch AT state. It is. Also, in the bonus point counter, when the bonus AT state is entered and the remaining set number is added once, the bonus standard numerical value is added, and in the added state, the extra lottery process is performed and the remaining set number is set to n times (n Is an integer greater than or equal to 1), the value of privilege standard numerical value × n (n is an integer greater than or equal to 1) is added. That is, the privilege point counter is used not only as a counter for accumulating values less than the privilege standard numerical value, but also as a counter for adding a value when the remaining set number is added. This makes it possible to reduce the number of counters compared to a configuration in which a counter for cumulatively adding values less than the privilege reference value and a counter for measuring the number of remaining sets are provided separately. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity in a configuration that handles data in units of bytes.

  In addition, the privilege point counter is not only accumulatively added with a value less than the privilege standard value, and is added with the value of the privilege standard value × n (n is an integer of 1 or more), and the remaining set count is 1 or more. In the situation where a normal AT state resort occurs, the privilege reference value is subtracted from the privilege point counter. Thereby, it becomes possible to handle the numerical value related to the addition of the remaining set number of times in the privilege point counter. Therefore, for example, compared to a configuration in which a privilege point counter and a counter for the remaining set number are separately provided and the addition process of the counter for the remaining set number is executed according to the value of the privilege point counter, the processing configuration is simplified. Figured.

  Returning to the description of the added state process (FIG. 51), if a negative determination is made in step S2809, or if the process of step S2810 is executed, the mode UP lottery process is executed in step S2811. In the mode UP lottery process, the mode UP lottery table corresponding to the current addition mode and the winning combination of the current game is read from the sub ROM 83. For example, in the mode UP lottery table in the first addition mode, the UP winning result for the second adding mode, the UP winning result for the third adding mode, and the losing result are set. In addition, the second adding mode In the mode UP lottery table, the UP winning result for the third extra mode and the result of losing are set. Also, in the mode UP lottery table in the third extra mode, the current status maintenance win result is set as the mode UP win and the current status maintenance miss result is set. Further, the mode UP lottery table in the first addition mode and the second addition mode is set such that the larger the IV value that is won, the higher the mode UP probability. In the mode UP lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the mode UP lottery table. To do.

  In a succeeding step S2812, it is determined whether or not the result of the mode UP lottery process is the mode UP winning. If it is not the mode UP winning, the process for the extra state is terminated as it is, and if it is the mode UP winning, the process proceeds to step S2813. In step S2813, a process for changing the addition mode to a mode that is one step higher or two steps higher is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), in the case of the first addition mode, the mode is changed to the second addition mode or the third addition mode, and in the case of the second addition mode, the third addition mode is selected. In the case of the third addition mode, the third addition mode is maintained.

  Thereafter, in step S2814, a lottery process for the number of compensation replays is executed. As already described, in the added state, it is easy to generate an additional set number of normal AT states. However, the added state ends when the normal replay win is generated and the compensated replay number is generated. The lottery process for the number of compensation replays is a process for determining the number of compensation replays that will trigger the end of the added state by lottery.

  In the lottery process for the number of compensation replays, the compensation replay lottery table corresponding to the current addition mode is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and further, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) is read. The value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the compensation replay lottery table. In the compensation replay lottery table in the first addition mode, “1”, “2”, “3” are set as the number of compensation replays, and “1” is selected with a probability of 6/10. “2” is selected with probability, and “3” is selected with probability of 1/10. In the compensation replay lottery table in the second addition mode, “1” is selected with a probability of 3/10, “2” is selected with a probability of 5/10, and “3” is selected with a probability of 2/10. The In the compensation replay lottery table in the third addition mode, “1” is selected with a probability of 1/10, “2” is selected with a probability of 3/10, and “3” is selected with a probability of 6/10. The That is, the second addition mode not only has a higher addition probability than the first addition mode, but also has a larger number of compensation replay selections. Further, the third addition mode not only has a higher addition probability than the second addition mode, but also has a larger number of compensation replay selections.

  After executing the lottery process for the number of compensation replays in step S2814, the number of compensation replays selected by the lottery process is added to the compensation replay number counter in the sub RAM 84 in step S2815. Thereafter, the setting process of the added state is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2806, it is determined in step S2816 whether or not the normal replay combination is won. If the normal replay combination is not won, the process for adding the current state is finished as it is, and if the normal replay combination is won, the process proceeds to step S2817.

  In step S2817, 1 is subtracted from the value of the compensation replay number counter in the sub-side RAM 84, and in step S2818, it is determined whether or not the value of the compensation replay number counter after the subtraction is “0”. If it is not “0”, the process for the extra state is terminated as it is, and if it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2819.

  In step S2819, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal AT game counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is “0”, thereby determining whether or not the current added state has shifted to the pre-branch AT state. Determine. If the value of the normal AT game counter is “0”, this means that the current addition state has shifted to the end of the branch AT state. After executing the pre-branching AT state setting process in S2820, the extra state process is terminated. The processing contents of the setting process of the AT state before branching are the same as the processing contents shown in the flowchart of FIG. However, in step S2705, instead of clearing the branch AT state flag to “0”, the added state flag is cleared to “0”.

  If the value of the normal AT game counter is not “0”, a negative determination is made in step S2819, and the process proceeds to step S2821. In step S2821, the addition state flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”, and the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”, and then the addition state processing ends. As a result, the pre-branching AT state process in step S1812 is executed in the next AT process (FIG. 37).

<Final chance processing>
Next, the final chance process executed in step S1815 of the in-AT process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2901, a push order avoidance process is executed. The push order avoidance process, which will be described in detail later, is to prevent the occurrence of an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal in the main MPU 72 even though the normal AT state extended resort does not occur. It is processing.

  In a succeeding step S2902, it is determined whether or not a bonus AT start command is received from the main MPU 72. If a bonus AT start command has been received, “1” is set to the bonus AT flag in the sub-side RAM 84 and “4” is set to the execution target counter in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S 2903. The final chance flag in the side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”. Thereby, in the next AT process (FIG. 37), the bonus AT process of step S1816 is executed. Thereafter, in step S 2904, “7” is added to the privilege point counter in the sub-side RAM 84, and the final chance processing is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2902, it is determined in step S2905 whether or not a winning result command is received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has not been received, the process for the extra state is terminated, and if the winning result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2906.

  In step S2906, the resurrection lottery table corresponding to the winning combination of the current game and the value of the current privilege point counter is read from the sub-side ROM 83. The resurrection lottery table is set so that the greater the value of the winning IV, the higher the resurrection winning probability, and the higher the current privilege point counter value, the higher the resurrection winning probability. Has been.

  In the subsequent step S2907, a resurrection lottery process is executed. In the resurrection lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the resurrection lottery table.

  In a succeeding step S2908, it is determined whether or not the result of the resurrection lottery process is a resurrection winning. If it is a revival win, in step S2909, a continuation game number lottery process at the time of revival is executed. In the lottery process, first, the continuation game number lottery table at the time of restoration is read from the sub-side ROM 83. As already described, there are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as the number of continuous games in the normal AT state. In the continuation game number lottery table at the time of revival, the probability that 30 games are selected as the number of continuation games in one set is 4/10, the probability that 50 games are selected is 3/10, and 100 games are selected. The probability is 3/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is read from the continuation game number lottery table at the time of restoration. Collate. In step S2910, a value corresponding to the number of continued games selected in the lottery process in step S2909 is set in the normal AT game counter in the sub-side RAM 84.

  Thereafter, in step S2911, the final chance flag in the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”, and the execution target counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the pre-branching AT state process in step S1812 is executed in the next AT process (FIG. 37). In step S2911, the privilege point counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”. Thereafter, the final chance process is terminated.

  By clearing the privilege point counter to “0” when the revival lottery process is won, the value of the privilege point counter that contributed to the revival selection is further used in the normal AT state of the subsequent resort. It is prevented. Therefore, it is possible to limit the generation of profits by privilege points.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2908, the process proceeds to step S2912. In step S2912, it is determined whether or not an extension trigger is won. In the internal lottery state lottery table (FIG. 14), when the winning combination is IV = 7, 9, 10, 14 to 16, it is determined that the extension trigger is won. If the extension trigger is not won, various clear processes are executed in step S2913. In various clear processes, the final chance flag in the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”, and the normal AT flag in the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the normal AT state ends. Also, the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the value of the privilege point counter is inherited between sets when the normal AT state is continuous, while the remaining set number of times in the normal AT state is “0” and the state shifts to the non-AT state. Cannot be taken over. Also, the winning counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the value of the victory counter is inherited between sets when the normal AT state is continuous, while it is inherited when the remaining number of sets in the normal AT state is “0” and shifts to the non-AT state. I can't.

  Then, after the lottery process for the number of ceiling games is executed in step S2914, the final chance process is terminated. In the lottery process for the number of ceiling games, the ceiling game lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and further, the value of the sub-side lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out. Is checked against the ceiling game lottery table. Then, the value selected in the lottery process for the number of ceiling games is set in the remaining ceiling game counter of the sub-side RAM 84.

  If it is determined in step S2912 that the extension opportunity has been won, the final chance process is terminated. As a result, the final chance state continues. In other words, even if the extended opportunity role is won in the final chance state, even if it is not revived in the resurgence lottery process, the final chance state will continue as a benefit of winning the extended opportunity role. Become. If you win the extended opportunity in the final chance state, the resurrection lottery process will be executed with a high probability of being revived, but it was not a resurgence despite being elected to the extended opportunity In this case, the player may be discouraged by that amount. On the other hand, since the final chance status will be extended if you win an extension opportunity, you can suppress disappointment if you are not selected for a resurgence despite winning the extension opportunity. It becomes possible.

<Bonus AT processing>
Next, the bonus AT process executed in step S1816 of the AT process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S3001, a push order avoidance process is executed. The push order avoidance process, which will be described in detail later, is to prevent the occurrence of an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal in the main MPU 72 even though the normal AT state extended resort does not occur. It is processing.

  In the subsequent step S3002, it is determined whether or not a bonus AT end command indicating that the bonus AT number counter in the main RAM 74 is “0” is received from the main MPU 72. The main MPU 72 transmits a bonus AT end command when one set of bonus AT state ends even in a situation where the bonus AT number counter is not “0”. In this case, step S3002 Do not make a positive determination at.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3002, the bonus AT processing is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S3002, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, the bonus AT flag in the sub RAM 84 is cleared to “0”.

  In a succeeding step S3004, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the addition state flag of the sub-side RAM 84. If the added state flag is set to “1”, it means that the series of bonus AT states that have been completed this time has shifted in the middle of the added state. Therefore, in step S3005, the execution target counter is set. After the value is set to “2”, the bonus AT process is terminated. As a result, in the next AT process (FIG. 37), the process for adding the state in step S1814 is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3004, it is determined in step S3006 whether or not “1” is set in the branch AT state flag of the sub-side RAM 84. If the branch AT state flag is set to “1”, this means that the series of bonus AT states that have been completed this time has shifted in the middle of the branch AT state. After setting the value of the counter to “1”, the bonus AT processing is terminated. Thereby, in the next AT process (FIG. 37), the branch AT state process of step S1813 is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3006, it is determined in step S3008 whether or not “1” is set in the normal AT flag of the sub RAM 84. If the normal AT flag is set to “1”, this means that the series of bonus AT states that have been completed this time has shifted in the middle of the pre-branch AT state. After the counter value is cleared to “0”, the bonus AT processing is terminated. As a result, the pre-branching AT state process in step S1812 is executed in the next AT process (FIG. 37).

  If a negative determination is made in step S3008, it is determined in step S3010 whether or not “1” is set in the penalty AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84. If a negative determination is made in step S3010, “1” is set to the normal AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3011. In subsequent step S3012, a lottery process for the number of continued games after the bonus is executed.

  In the lottery process, first, a bonus game number lottery table after the bonus is read from the sub ROM 83. As already described, there are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as the number of continuous games in the normal AT state. In the continuous game number lottery table after bonus, the probability that 30 games will be selected as the number of continuous games in one set is 1/10, the probability that 50 games will be selected is 2/10, and 100 games are selected. The probability is 7/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is stored in the lottery table for the number of continued games after the bonus. Collate.

  When the process of step S3012 is executed, a value corresponding to the number of continuous games selected in the lottery process of step S3012 is set in the normal AT game counter of the sub RAM 84 in step S3013. Thereafter, in step S3014, the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”, and then the bonus AT process is terminated. As a result, the pre-branching AT state process in step S1812 is executed in the next AT process (FIG. 37).

  On the other hand, if “1” is set in the penalty AT flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S3010, and the bonus AT processing is terminated as it is. As a result, even if the bonus AT state is entered in a penalty situation, the normal AT state is not entered after the bonus AT state ends.

<External output from slot machine 10 to hall computer HC>
Next, a configuration for external output from the slot machine 10 to the hall computer HC will be described. FIG. 55A is a schematic diagram for explaining the outline of the electrical configuration of a gaming hall in which a large number of slot machines 10 are installed, and FIG. 55B is an external terminal plate 90 provided in the slot machine 10. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 55A, an island facility S is provided in the game hall, and a number of slot machines 10 are installed in the island facility S. In the island facility S, a data counter DC is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with each slot machine 10. Each data counter DC is mounted above the corresponding slot machine 10 and has a first display unit DC1 for displaying the number of executions of the game and a second display for displaying the number of executions of a predetermined gaming state. The unit DC2 and a third display unit DC3 for displaying the number of executions of a specific gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state are provided.

  As a management control means for managing each slot machine 10 and each data counter DC, a hall computer HC is provided in the game hall. The hall computer HC is an electronic arithmetic unit having a management program, and an MPU 201 is mounted therein. The MPU 201 temporarily stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and ROM 202 storing fixed value data, and various data and information input from the slot machine 10 when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. And a RAM 203 which is a memory for storing the data.

  The hall computer HC is electrically connected to each slot machine 10 through an electrical wiring group EL1, and is also electrically connected to each data counter DC through an electrical wiring group EL2. Then, the management process based on the information received from each slot machine 10 is executed, and a signal corresponding to the result of the management process is transmitted to each data counter DC.

  Here, a configuration for transmitting information to the hall computer HC in the slot machine 10 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 55B, the external terminal plate 90 is provided with a plurality of external terminals 90a to 90h. A total of eight external terminals 90a to 90h are provided, and the types of information output to the hall computer HC are different.

  Specifically, in order to output information indicating the number of medals awarded in each game, and an external terminal 90a for insertion signals used for outputting information indicating the number of bets of the game for each game. An external terminal 90b for a grant signal used for the first game state, an external terminal 90c for a first gaming state signal used for outputting information indicating that the first gaming state has started, and a second gaming state is started. An external terminal 90d for the second gaming state signal used to output information indicating that the game state signal has been output, and a third gaming state signal used to output information indicating that the third gaming state has started. An external terminal 90e, an abnormal signal external terminal 90f used for outputting information indicating that the slot machine 10 has detected an illegal occurrence such as an input error or a payout error, and a setting An external terminal 90g for a setting operation signal used for outputting information indicating that a further operation is being executed, and an opening signal used for outputting information indicating that the front door 12 is being opened. The external terminal 90h is included.

  Among these, the number of pulse signals corresponding to the number of bets is output from the input signal external terminal 90a. For example, when the specified number of bets is “2”, a pulse signal is output twice so that the ON time and the OFF time are 50 msec at the start of one game, and the specified number of bets is “ In the case of “3”, the pulse signal is output three times so that the ON time and the OFF time are each 50 msec at the start of one game. The hall computer HC determines that one game has started by receiving a group of pulse signals from the input signal external terminal 90a, and displays the number of times the game has been executed on the first display portion DC1 of the data counter DC. 1 is added.

  The number of pulse signals corresponding to the number of payouts is output from the external terminal 90b for giving signals. For example, when nine medals are awarded, at the end of one game, the pulse signal is output nine times so that the ON time and the OFF time are each 50 msec, and four medals are awarded. At the end of one game, the pulse signal is output four times so that the ON time and the OFF time are each 50 msec.

  The external terminal 90c for the first gaming state signal is used in the slot machine 10 so that the hall computer HC can recognize the number of executions of the normal AT state. Hereinafter, the first gaming state signal is referred to as an AT1 signal, and the first gaming state signal external terminal 90c is referred to as an AT1 signal external terminal 90c. The hall computer HC determines that the normal AT state has been newly started by confirming the rising of the signal from the external terminal 90c for the AT1 signal, and executes the normal AT state in the second display unit DC2 of the data counter DC. Add 1 to the number of times displayed.

  The external terminal 90d for the second gaming state signal is used in the slot machine 10 so that the hall computer HC can recognize the number of executions of the bonus AT state. Hereinafter, the second gaming state signal is referred to as an AT2 signal, and the external terminal 90d for the second gaming state signal is referred to as an AT2 signal external terminal 90d. The hall computer HC determines that the bonus AT state has been newly started by confirming the rising of the signal from the external terminal 90d for the AT2 signal, and executes the bonus AT state in the third display unit DC3 of the data counter DC. Add 1 to the number of times displayed.

  The third gaming state signal external terminal 90e is used in the slot machine 10 so that the hall computer HC can recognize the number of executions of the CB state. The abnormal signal external terminal 90f, the setting operation signal external terminal 90g, and the open signal external terminal 90h are maintained in the ON state while the respective target events occur.

  The setting operation signal external terminal 90g may be configured to output an ON signal not only during a setting change operation but also during a current setting value confirmation operation. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which outputs both an abnormal signal and a setting operation signal from one external terminal.

  The main side MPU 72 is electrically connected to the external terminals 90a to 90h of the external terminal board 90 in a one-to-one correspondence through the electric wiring group EL3, and a predetermined voltage is applied to the external terminals 90a to 90h according to the processing result. Output a signal.

<External output processing executed by main MPU 72>
Next, processing for external output executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. However, in the following description, processing for external output through the external terminal 90c for AT1 signal and the external terminal 90d for AT2 signal on the external terminal plate 90 will be described.

  First, the external output setting process at the end will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The external output setting process at the end is executed in step S216 of the normal process (FIG. 11).

  In step S3101, it is determined whether the CB internal rear state or the CB in-progress state. If the state is not the CB internal rear state or the CB internal state, that is, the CB non-internal state, the AT1 signal output state is set to OFF in step S3102, and the AT2 signal output state is changed to step S3103. After setting to the OFF state, the external output setting process at the end of the present process is terminated.

  That is, the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal are not set to the ON state in the CB non-internal state, and can be set to the ON state in the CB internal rear state or the CB intermediate state. Thereby, in the hall computer HC, it is possible not only to check whether the AT1 signal or the AT2 signal is in the ON state, but it is possible to check whether the AT state is the normal AT state or the bonus AT state. It is possible to confirm that the state is the internal rear state or the CB in-progress state. In this case, as described above, the slot machine 10 is provided with the internal state notifying unit 63 for notifying that the CB winning flag is set to “1”, and the CB winning flag is set to “1”. "Is set, the internal state notification unit 63 enters the light emitting state without waiting for the end of the game. On the other hand, the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal are set to the ON state after the game ends when the CB winning flag is set to “1”. As a result, the slot machine 10 notifies the CB internal rear state or CB in-progress state at the timing before the external output to the hall computer HC before the CB internal post-state or CB in-progress state. Is done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that only the game hall manager knows that the CB is in the post-CB internal state or the CB in-progress state, and the player cannot grasp it.

  If the CB is in the post-CB internal state or CB in-progress state and the determination in step S3101 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not the value of the bell winning counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 3 or more. The bell winning counter is a counter for specifying in the main MPU 72 the number of times the first bell winning or the second bell winning has occurred without causing a push out of order when the first bell winning or the second bell winning is won. It is.

<Relationship between Bell Prize and AT1 signal output status>
Here, the bell winning determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The bell winning determination process is executed in step S607 in the winning determination process (FIG. 18).

  In the bell winning determination process, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the AT2 signal is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S3201, it is determined in step S3202 whether the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won in the current game. If neither the first bell combination nor the second bell combination is won, the bell winning determination process is terminated, and if the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won, the process proceeds to step S3203. .

  In step S3203, it is determined whether or not it has been confirmed that the first bell winning or the second bell winning is generated as a result of the logical combination processing of the symbol combination in step S604 in the winning determination processing (FIG. 18). When the first bell winning or the second bell winning has occurred, in step S3204, the value of the bell winning counter in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 and the bell off flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to “0”. After clearing, the bell winning determination process is terminated. If neither the first bell winning nor the second bell winning has occurred, in step S3205, “1” is set to the bell off flag of the main RAM 74, and the bell winning counter of the main RAM 74 is set to “ After clearing “0”, the bell winning determination process is terminated. The off-bell flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that neither the first bell winning nor the second bell winning has occurred in the situation where the first bell winning combination or the second bell winning combination has been won.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3201 that the AT2 signal is ON, the value of the bell winning counter in the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0” in step S3206. Thereafter, the bell winning determination process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the external output setting process at the end (FIG. 56), if it is determined in step S3104 that the value of the bell winning counter in the main RAM 74 is 3 or more, in step S3105, the AT1 signal Set the output state to the ON state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3104, or if the process of step S3105 is executed, it is determined in step S3106 whether or not the bell off flag of the main RAM 74 is set to “1”. If the bell off flag is set to “1”, the output state of the AT1 signal is set to OFF in step S3107, and the bell off flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to “0” in step S3108. .

  The manner in which the output state of the AT1 signal is changed in relation to the bell combination will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 58 (a) shows the execution period of the normal AT state, FIG. 58 (b) shows the output state of the AT1 signal, and FIG. 58 (c) shows the execution of the game won for the first bell role or the second bell role. 58 (d) shows the occurrence status of the first bell prize or the second bell prize, and FIG. 58 (e) shows the execution period of other games.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (c), the game won for the first bell role or the second bell role is started at the timing t1 and the timing t2 which are neither the normal AT state nor the bonus AT state. . However, since it is not in the AT state, the push-side notification control for causing the bell winning corresponding to the winning combination is not executed in the sub-side MPU 82. Accordingly, no bell winning is generated as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the transition to the normal AT state is set in the sub-side MPU 82, whereby the normal AT state is started. In addition, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 58 (e), a new game is started. However, since the game is not a game won in the first bell role or the second bell role, There will be no winnings. However, at the timing t3, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the AT1 signal remains in the OFF state.

  Thereafter, at the timings t4 and t6 in the normal AT state, the game in which the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won is started as shown in FIG. 58 (c). In this case, since it is in the AT state, the sub-side MPU 82 executes push-in order notification control for generating a bell prize corresponding to the winning. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (d), a bell win corresponding to the winning combination occurs at each of the timings t5 and t7. However, at this timing, the value of the bell winning counter is “2”, which is not 3 or more, so that the AT1 signal remains OFF as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (e) at the timing of t8, after a game that does not win either the first bell combination or the second bell combination is started, at the timing of t9 after the game ends. As shown in FIG. 58 (c), the game in which the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won is started. In this case, since it is in the AT state, the sub-side MPU 82 executes push-in order notification control for generating a bell prize corresponding to the winning. Therefore, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 58 (d), a bell winning corresponding to the winning combination is generated. As a result, when the value of the bell winning counter becomes 3 or more, the AT1 signal is turned on at the timing t10 as shown in FIG. 58 (b).

  Thereafter, at the timing of t11 and the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 58 (c), the game winning the first bell combination or the second bell combination is started, and a bell winning corresponding to the winning combination is generated. To do. Then, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 58 (e), when the final game in the normal AT state is ended, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the sub-side MPU 82 is set to end the normal AT state. Done. However, at the timing t13, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the AT1 signal remains in the ON state.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t14, which is neither the normal AT state nor the bonus AT state, the game won for the first bell role or the second bell role is started. In this case, since it is not the AT state, the sub-side MPU 82 does not execute the push order notification control for generating the Bell winning combination corresponding to the winning combination. Further, in order to generate the first bell prize or the second bell prize, it is necessary to stop the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R as the first stop, whereas either the normal AT state or the bonus AT state is required. If the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop in a situation where there is no penalty, a penalty event occurs. In this case, there is a high possibility that no bell winning will occur in the game started at the timing of t14. Then, even though the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won, the corresponding bell winning is not generated, so that at the timing of t15, the bell off flag of the main RAM 74 is set to “1”, and the AT1 signal Is turned off.

  The processing load on the main side MPU 72 can be reduced by making the transition to the normal AT state and the end setting independently performed in the sub side MPU 82. In addition, since the communication between the main side MPU 72 and the sub side MPU 82 is a one-way communication from the main side MPU 72 to the sub side MPU 82, the chance of inputting illegal signals to the main side MPU 72 is reduced. Further, by adopting a configuration in which the main MPU 72 outputs to the hall computer HC externally, the main MPU 72 that controls the progress of the game can directly control the external output.

  In this case, the main MPU 72 shifts to the normal AT state when the bell winning is generated a plurality of times (specifically, three times) without interposing the pressing order when the bell is won. And the AT1 signal is set to the ON state. By adopting such a configuration, when various configurations are employed as described above, the main MPU 72 indirectly determines the transition to the normal AT state, and externally outputs a signal indicating the normal AT state. Can be performed.

  The main-side MPU 72 determines that the normal AT state has ended when a push out of order occurs during the winning of the bell, and sets the AT1 signal to the OFF state. By adopting such a configuration, when various configurations are adopted as described above, the main MPU 72 indirectly determines the end of the normal AT state and outputs an external output of a signal indicating the normal AT state. It can be terminated.

  Both the trigger for setting the AT1 signal to the ON state and the trigger for setting the AT1 signal to the OFF state are whether or not a bell winning has occurred when the bell is won. As a result, the monitoring process for setting the ON state of the AT1 signal and the monitoring process for setting the OFF state of the AT1 signal can be made common, and the processing load can be reduced.

  The number of occurrences of bell winning when the AT win signal is set when the AT1 signal is set to ON is set to be larger than the number of occurrences of non-bell winning when the bell is selected when the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state. . As a result, regarding the setting of the AT1 signal to the ON state, priority is given to setting the AT1 signal to the ON state under the actual normal AT state, rather than performing the setting process at an early stage. It is possible to give priority to performing the setting process to the OFF state earlier than setting the OFF state in a situation where the normal AT state has actually ended. Therefore, it is possible to set the AT1 signal to the OFF state at an early stage while carefully setting the AT1 signal to the ON state.

  What is monitored when setting the AT1 signal to the ON state and setting the AT1 signal to the OFF state is not only the first bell prize but also the second bell prize. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the setting opportunity to an ON state and the setting opportunity to an OFF state.

  In the bonus AT state, even if a bell winning is generated, the bell winning counter is not added. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the AT1 signal from being set to the ON state during the bonus AT state.

  In both the first bell prize and the second bell prize, it is necessary to stop the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R as a first stop. As a result, it is possible to prevent the AT1 signal from being set to the ON state in a non-AT state.

<Relationship between normal replay role and AT1 signal output status>
Returning to the description of the external output setting process at the end (FIG. 56), if a negative determination is made in step S3106, or if the process of step S3108 is executed, the main RAM 74 is provided in step S3109. It is determined whether or not the value of the push order correct answer counter is 2 or more. The push order correct answer counter is used to specify the number of times that each stop button 42 to 44 is stopped in the push order determined by the lottery in the main MPU 72 when the main replay role is won. It is a counter. The push order lottery process when the normal replay combination is won is executed in step S405 in the winning data acquisition process (FIG. 16) as already described.

  Here, the normal replay push order determination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal replay push order determination process is executed in step S608 in the winning determination process (FIG. 18).

  In the normal replay push order determination process, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not a normal replay winning has occurred in the current game. As already described, when the normal replay combination is won, the operation in relation to the stop operation sequence of the stop buttons 42 to 44 and the rotation positions of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Regardless of the timing, a normal replay winning will occur.

  If the normal replay winning is not generated, the normal replay push order determination process is terminated as it is. If the normal replay winning is generated, the process proceeds to step S3302. In step S3302, the result of the push order lottery process (step S405) executed at the start of the current game is read from the main RAM 74. In the subsequent step S3303, the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the current game is read. In step S3304, it is determined whether the result read in step S3302 matches the result read in step S3303. That is, it is determined whether or not the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order corresponding to the result of the push order lottery process.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3304, the normal replay push order determination process ends after adding 1 to the value of the push order correct answer counter in the main RAM 74 in step S3305. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3304, the value of the push order correct answer counter in the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0” and the set flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to “0” in step S3306. After clearing, the normal replay push order determination process is terminated. The set flag specifies whether or not the main MPU 72 has already executed processing corresponding to the value of the push order correct answer counter being 2 or more in the situation where the AT1 signal is ON. It is a flag for.

  Returning to the explanation of the external output setting process at the end (FIG. 56), if it is determined in step S3109 that the value of the push order correct answer counter is 2 or more, the AT1 signal is turned on in step S3110. In step S3111, it is determined whether or not the value of the set flag provided in the main RAM 74 is “1”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3110 and a negative determination is made in step S3111, the AT1 signal is set to an OFF state in step S3112. In a succeeding step S3113, the extended waiting time (specifically, 1 sec) is set in the wait counter of the main RAM 74. As a result, a negative determination is made in step S218 of the normal process (FIG. 11), and a wait time corresponding to the extended resort wait time is generated at the end of the current game. In step S 3113, “1” is set to the set flag of the main RAM 74. Thereafter, in step S 3114, a consecutive resort wait command is set to be transmitted to the sub-side MPU 82. As a result, as described above, the sub-side MPU 82 sets “1” to the extended game weight flag in step S1210 of the standby effect setting process (FIG. 29), and the stationary corresponding to the extended game wait time. The image is displayed on the image display device 66.

  When the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state when the value of the push order correct answer counter becomes 2 or more as described above, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state at the start of the next game. The setting process is executed in the external output setting process at the start in step S210 of the normal process (FIG. 11).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an external output setting process at the start.

  In step S3401, it is determined whether the state is the CB internal rear state or the CB in-progress state. If it is not the CB internal post-state or the CB in-progress state, that is, if the CB is not in the internal state, the external output setting process at the start of this operation is terminated as it is.

  If it is in the CB internal rear state or the CB in-progress state, it is determined in step S3402 whether the value of the push order correct answer counter in the main RAM 74 is 2 or more. If it is greater than or equal to 2, in step S3403, it is determined whether or not the AT2 signal is ON. If the AT2 signal is not ON, the AT1 signal is set to ON in step S3404.

  As described above, when the AT1 signal is in the ON state and the AT2 signal is in the OFF state, when the value of the push order correct answer counter is 2 or more, the AT1 signal is displayed at the end of the game that has become 2 or more. Is set to the OFF state, and the AT1 signal is set to the ON state again at the start of the next game that is started after the extended game wait time (1 sec) has elapsed. Such an AT1 signal setting process is executed in order to allow the hall computer HC to know the number of execution sets of the normal AT state when the normal AT state continues. However, since it is impossible for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the normal AT state is extended, the AT1 signal is set to OFF / ON in accordance with the timing when the normal AT state extended state occurs. Thus, the normal replay process and the push order avoidance process are executed in the sub-side MPU 82. These normal replay processing and push order avoidance processing will be described below.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing normal replay processing in the sub-side MPU 82. The normal replay process is executed in step S1901 of the pre-branch AT state process (FIG. 38).

  In the normal replay process, first, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the lottery result command has been received, it is determined in step S3502 whether or not the current lottery result command includes data corresponding to the normal replay winning combination. If the data corresponding to the normal replay winning combination is included, in step S3503, the push order lottery in the main MPU 72 is obtained by grasping the contents of the push order command received together with the current lottery result command. Push order data corresponding to the result of the processing (step S405) is written in the sub-side RAM 84.

  In a succeeding step S3504, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in a post-village flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84. The post-ream flag is a flag for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify that the normal AT state has been continued. The timing at which “1” is set in the post-ream flag is set in the case where the victory effect or the draw effect is executed in the branching AT state to return to the state before branching, and the added state after the branching AT state ends. In the final chance state, and in the final lottery process (step S2907), the recovery win is selected and the pre-branch AT state is restored.

  If “1” is set in the post-ream flag, in step S3505, the push order data written in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3503 is set as push order data to be notified on the image display device 66. Thereby, the push order of each stop button 42-44 selected by the push order lottery process (step S405) of the main side MPU72 is alert | reported. In the AT state, when the image display device 66 notifies the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the player generally operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 according to the pressing order. The stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the order selected in the push order lottery process (step S405) in the main side MPU 72. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped according to the pushing order, a normal replay winning is generated.

  If “1” is not set in the post-ream flag, it is determined in step S3506 whether or not the value of the push order correct answer counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. The push order correct answer counter indicates the number of times each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated in the manner selected in the push order lottery process (step S405) of the main MPU 72 in the game in which the normal replay winning combination is won. It is a counter for specifying by.

  When the value of the push order correct answer counter is 1 or more, in step S3507, push order data that is different from the push order data written in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3503 is notified as push order data in the image display device 66. Set. Thereby, the push order different from the push order of each stop button 42-44 selected by the push order lottery process (step S405) of the main side MPU72 is alert | reported. In the AT state, when the image display device 66 notifies the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the player generally operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 according to the pressing order. The stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in an order different from the order selected in the push order lottery process (step S405) in the main MPU 72. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped according to the pushing order, a normal replay winning is generated.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3501, a negative determination is made in step S3502, a negative determination is made in step S3506, a process in step S3505 is executed, or a process in step S3507 is executed In step S3508, it is determined whether a winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 or not. If no winning result command has been received, the normal replay process is terminated, and if a winning result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3509.

  In step S3509, it is determined whether or not a normal replay winning has occurred in the current game. If the normal replay winning has not occurred, the normal replay process is terminated, and if the normal replay winning has occurred, the process proceeds to step S3510. In step S3510, it is determined whether or not the pressing order data stored in the sub-side RAM 84 matches the actual pressing order in the current game.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3510, 1 is added to the value of the push order correct answer counter in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3511. In a succeeding step S3512, it is determined whether or not the value of the push order correct answer counter is 2 or more. If it is not 2 or more, the normal replay process is terminated. If it is 2 or more, the normal post-village flag in the sub RAM 84 is cleared to “0” in step S3513, and then the normal replay process is completed. The replay process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S3510, the normal replay processing is terminated after clearing the push order correct answer counter of the sub-side RAM 84 to “0” in step S3514.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the push order avoidance process in the sub-side MPU 82. The push order avoidance processing includes step S2401 of the branch AT state processing (FIG. 44), step S2801 of the added state processing (FIG. 51), step S2901 of the final chance processing (FIG. 53), and bonus AT processing ( This is executed in step S3001 of FIG.

  In the push order avoidance process, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether a lottery result command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. If a lottery result command has been received, it is determined in step S3602 whether the current lottery result command includes data corresponding to the normal replay winning combination. If the data corresponding to the normal replay winning combination is included, the push order lottery in the main MPU 72 is determined in step S3603 by grasping the contents of the push order command received together with the current lottery result command. Push order data corresponding to the result of the processing (step S405) is written in the sub-side RAM 84.

  In a succeeding step S3604, it is determined whether or not the value of the push order correct answer counter of the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the push order correct answer counter is 1 or more, in step S3605, push order data that is different from the push order data written in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3603 is notified as push order data in the image display device 66. Set. Thereby, the push order different from the push order of each stop button 42-44 selected by the push order lottery process (step S405) of the main side MPU72 is alert | reported. In the AT state, when the image display device 66 notifies the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the player generally operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 according to the pressing order. The stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in an order different from the order selected in the push order lottery process (step S405) in the main MPU 72. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped according to the pushing order, a normal replay winning is generated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3601, a negative determination is made in step S3602, a negative determination is made in step S3604, or the process of step S3605 is executed, the main MPU 72 is executed in step S3606. It is determined whether or not a winning result command is received from. If the winning result command has not been received, the main-pressing order avoidance process is terminated, and if the winning result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3607.

  In step S3607, it is determined whether or not a normal replay winning has occurred in the current game. If the normal replay winning has not occurred, the normal replay process is terminated, and if the normal replay winning has occurred, the process proceeds to step S3608. In step S3608, it is determined whether or not the pressing order data stored in the sub-side RAM 84 matches the actual pressing order in the current game.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3608, the value of the push order correct answer counter in the sub RAM 84 is incremented by 1 in step S3609. Thereafter, the normal replay process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S3608, the normal replay process is terminated after clearing the push order correct answer counter in the sub-side RAM 84 to “0” in step S3610.

  As described above, the normal replay process and the push order avoidance process are executed, and in the AT state before branching after the normal AT state, the main MPU 72 determines the game in which the normal replay role is won. Further, the image display device 66 notifies the push order of the stop buttons 42 to 44. As a result, if the player operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 according to the notification of the pressing order, the pressing order is correct. Therefore, the main MPU 72 sets the AT1 signal to the OFF state and then sets the ON state again. Is done.

  On the other hand, in the situation that is not the pre-branching AT state after the consecutive AT in the normal AT state, the pressing order different from the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 determined by the main MPU 72 in the game won for the normal replay role. This is notified by the image display device 66. As a result, if the player operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 according to the push order notification, the correct push order will not be obtained in a situation that is not the pre-branching AT state after the normal AT state extended villa. After the signal is once turned off, the process for setting it to the on state again is not executed.

  Also, in a configuration in which the main MPU 72 performs processing for setting the AT1 signal to the OFF state and then setting it to the ON state again when the correct push order occurs multiple times before branching after the normal AT state is extended In the situation that is not in the AT state, the notification control of the push order different from the correct push order is executed on condition that the push order correct answer has occurred once or more. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency at which the push order notification is performed when the normal replay winning combination is won, and it is possible to suppress the push order notification from being continuously executed in the AT state. .

  The manner in which the output state of the AT1 signal is changed in relation to the normal replay combination will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  63A shows the execution period of the AT state before branching, FIG. 63B shows the execution period of the branch AT state, FIG. 63C shows the output state of the AT1 signal, and FIG. Shows the execution period of the normal replay winning game, FIG. 63 (e) shows the execution period of other games, FIG. 63 (f) shows the execution period of the correct push order notification, and FIG. The correct answer push order notification execution period is shown, FIG. 63 (h) shows the setting status of the push order correct answer counter in the main RAM 74, and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (a), as shown in FIG. 63 (d), the game won in the normal replay role is started at each of the timing t1 and the timing t2 in the state that is the AT state before branching. In this case, since the normal AT state is not followed, the correct push order notification is not executed as shown in FIG. 63 (f), and the push correct answer counter value is further changed as shown in FIG. 63 (h). Since it is “0”, the incorrect answer press order notification is not executed as shown in FIG. However, in the game started at the timing of t2, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is accidentally correct, and at the timing of t3 that is the end timing of the game, as shown in FIG. 63 (h). The value of the push order correct answer counter is “1”. At the timing t3, the pre-branch AT state ends as shown in FIG. 63 (a), and the branch AT state starts as shown in FIG. 63 (b).

  Thereafter, a game different from the normal replay winning combination as shown in FIG. 63 (e) is executed at the timing of t4 in the branching AT state, and as shown in FIG. 63 (d) at the subsequent timing of t5. The game that won the replay role is started. In this case, since the value of the push order correct answer counter is 1 or more as shown in FIG. 63 (h), the incorrect push order notification is executed at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 63 (g). Is done. Thereby, in the game, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the incorrect answer pressing order, and the correct answer counter of the pressing order is “0” as shown in FIG. 63 (h) at the timing t6 which is the end timing of the game. Cleared.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t7 in the state of the branching AT state, as shown in FIG. 63 (d), the game won in the normal replay role is started. In this case, since the normal AT state is not followed, the correct push order notification is not executed as shown in FIG. 63 (f), and the push correct answer counter value is further changed as shown in FIG. 63 (h). Since it is “0”, the incorrect answer press order notification is not executed as shown in FIG. Therefore, in the game started at the timing of t7, the pressing order is incorrect.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t8, the other game is ended as shown in FIG. 63 (e), whereby the branch AT state is ended as shown in FIG. 63 (b), and as shown in FIG. 63 (a). Thus, the pre-branch AT state is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 63 (d), the game won in the normal replay role is started. In this case, since it is the AT state before branching after the consecutive AT in the normal AT state, the correct answer push order notification is executed as shown in FIG. Thereby, in the game, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the correct pressing order, and the value of the pressing correct counter is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 63 (h) at the timing t10 which is the end timing of the game. Is done.

  Thereafter, after the other game is executed as shown in FIG. 63 (e) at the timing of t11, the game won in the normal replay role as shown in FIG. 63 (d) is started at the timing of t12. . In this case, since it is the AT state before branching after the consecutive AT in the normal AT state, the correct answer push order notification is executed as shown in FIG. Thus, in the game, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the correct pressing order, and at the timing of t13, the value of the pressing correct answer counter is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 63 (h). As a result, since the value of the push order correct answer counter becomes “2”, the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state as shown in FIG. 63 (c), and the consecutive wait time as shown in FIG. 63 (i). Measurement is started. Then, the consecutive resort wait time elapses at the timing of t14. Thereafter, at time t15, another game is started as shown in FIG. 63 (e), and the AT1 signal is set to the ON state as shown in FIG. 63 (c).

  Thereafter, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 63 (d), the game won in the normal replay role is started. In this case, since the normal AT state is not followed, the correct push order notification is not executed as shown in FIG. 63 (f), and the push correct answer counter value is further changed as shown in FIG. 63 (h). Since it is “2”, the incorrect answer press order notification is executed as shown in FIG. Accordingly, in the game, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the incorrect answer pressing order, and the correct answer counter of the pressing order is “0” as shown in FIG. Cleared.

  As described above, when the normal AT state is extended, the sub-side MPU 82 performs execution control of the correct push order notification so that the sub-side MPU 82 prompts the correct push order when the normal replay role is won. Even if the main MPU 72 does not directly know that the normal AT state consecutive resort setting has been made, the normal MP state is maintained in the main MPU 72 through multiple occurrences of the correct push order in the normal replay winning combination. It is possible to indirectly grasp that the recreational resort has occurred. As a result, the main MPU 72 can once turn the AT1 signal off and then turn it on again in accordance with the normal AT state.

  In the situation where the sub-side MPU 82 does not correspond to the normal AT state extended resort, and the normal replay combination is won, the execution control of the incorrect answer press order notification is performed, so that the normal AT state is not the continuous extended state. In spite of this, the possibility that the correct answer in the push order at the time of the normal replay winning combination is generated a plurality of times is reduced. As a result, the control to turn the AT1 signal OFF once and then turn it ON again can be easily performed in conjunction with the normal AT state.

  When the AT1 signal is once turned off and then turned on again in the normal AT state, the setting to the OFF state is performed before the measurement of the villa waiting time, and the setting to the ON state is performed for the villa waiting time. This is done after the measurement. In this configuration, by setting the consecutive waiting time, the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state at the end of one game, and the AT1 signal is set to the ON state at the start of the next game. In the hall computer HC, it is possible to guarantee a period for recognizing that the AT1 signal is in the OFF state.

  In addition, the value of the push order correct answer counter may be cleared to “0” when the value of the push order correct answer counter becomes 2 or more and the AT1 signal is turned on after the AT1 signal is turned off.

<Relationship between bonus AT state and output state of AT1 signal and AT2 signal>
Returning to the description of the external output setting process at the end (FIG. 56), when a negative determination is made in step S3109, a negative determination is made in step S3110, an affirmative determination is made in step S3111, or in step S3114 If the process has been executed, the process proceeds to step S3115. In step S 3115, it is determined whether or not the bonus AT state is being executed by determining whether or not “1” is set in the bonus AT state flag provided in the main RAM 74. If “1” is set in the bonus AT state flag, the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state in step S3116.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3115, or if the process of step S3116 is executed, it is determined in step S3117 whether or not “1” is set in the wait generation flag of the main RAM 74. Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) is an outlier result in the CB internal rear state. If “1” is set in the wait generation flag, in step S3118, the AT2 signal is set to the ON state and the wait generation flag is cleared to “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3117, or if the process of step S3118 is executed, it is determined in step S3119 whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter in the main RAM 74 is “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the one set of bonus AT state is finished. When the value of the bonus AT counter is not “0”, the external output setting process at the end of the process is terminated as it is. When the value of the bonus AT counter is “0”, AT2 is performed in step S3120. After setting the signal to the OFF state, the external output setting process at the end of the process is terminated.

  Next, the contents of processing executed in the relationship between the bonus AT state and the output state of the AT1 signal and AT2 signal in the external output setting process at the start (FIG. 60) will be described.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3402, a positive determination is made in step S3403, or if the processing of step S3404 is executed, “1” is set in the bonus AT end flag of the main RAM 74 in step S3405. By determining whether or not it is set, it is determined whether or not one set in the bonus AT state is completed and the remaining number of sets in the bonus AT state is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3405, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state in step S3406.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3405 or if the process of step S3406 is executed, it is determined in step S3407 whether or not the value of the bonus AT number counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. Then, it is determined whether or not a new set in the bonus AT state is started. If a negative determination is made in step S3407, the external output setting process at the start of the process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3407, the AT2 signal is set to the ON state in step S3408. The external output setting process at the start of the process is terminated.

  Next, the external output setting process before the start will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The external output setting process before the start is executed in step S206 of the normal process (FIG. 11).

  In step S3701, it is determined whether the state is the CB internal rear state or the CB in-progress state. If it is not the CB internal post-state or the CB in-progress state, that is, if the CB is not in the internal state, the external output setting process before the start is terminated.

  If it is in the CB internal rear state or the CB in-progress state, it is determined in step S3702 whether or not the pre-start wait flag in the main RAM 74 is set to “1”. The situation in which “1” is set in the pre-start wait flag is a case where the first special replay combination is won in the post-CB internal state as described above. In addition, in the state where the CB is in the rear state and the AT1 signal is ON, the second special replay role or the third special replay role is won and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is set as the first stop. This is the case when it is operated. If a negative determination is made in step S3702, the external output setting process before this start is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3702, the process proceeds to step S3703.

  In step S3703, the AT2 signal is set to the ON state. Thereafter, in step S3704, the pre-start wait flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0”, and then the external output setting process before the start is terminated.

  Next, an output mode of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal when shifting to the normal AT state triggered by the bonus AT state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  65 (a) shows the output state of the AT1 signal, FIG. 65 (b) shows the output state of the AT2 signal, FIG. 65 (c) shows the execution period of the normal AT state, and FIG. 65 (d) shows the bonus. FIG. 65 (e) shows the execution period of the game that triggers the transition to the bonus AT state, FIG. 65 (f) shows the execution period of other games, and FIG. 65 (g) shows the execution period of the AT state. Indicates the setting status of the wait period.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (e), a game that triggers the transition to the bonus AT state is started at the timing t1, which is a state that is neither the normal AT state nor the bonus AT state, and the game is started at the timing t2. finish. In this case, at the timing t2, the bonus AT state is started as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing t3, which is the timing immediately after the bonus AT state is started, as shown in FIG. 65 (f), another game is started. ), A wait period (8 sec) is set. This wait period elapses at the timing t4, and the AT2 signal is set to the ON state as shown in FIG. 65B at the timing t4.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 65 (f), the final game of the current set in the bonus AT state is started. Then, at the timing of t6, a wait period (5 sec) is set as shown in FIG. 65 (g), and the bonus AT state is ended as shown in FIG. 65 (d), and further in FIG. 65 (b). As shown, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state. When the wait period elapses as shown in FIG. 65 (g) at the timing of t7, the current game is ended as shown in FIG. 65 (f).

  Thereafter, at the timing of t8, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 65 (f). In this case, the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state is 1 or more. Therefore, at the timing of t8, the bonus AT state is set again as shown in FIG. 65 (d), and the AT2 signal is set to the ON state again as shown in FIG. 65 (b).

  Thereafter, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 65 (f), the final game of the current set in the bonus AT state is started. At a timing t10, a wait period (5 sec) is set as shown in FIG. 65 (g), and the bonus AT state is ended as shown in FIG. 65 (d). As shown, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state. When the wait period elapses as shown in FIG. 65 (g) at the timing of t11, the current game is ended as shown in FIG. 65 (f). In this case, since the remaining set number of times in the bonus AT state is “0”, as shown in FIG. 65 (f), the timing of t12, which is the timing at which a new game is started, is shown in FIG. 65 (c). As shown in FIG. 65, the normal AT state is started, and the AT1 signal is set to the ON state as shown in FIG.

  Even when the bonus AT state continues as described above, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state every time one set of bonus AT states is completed, and a new set of bonus AT states is started. The AT2 signal is set to the ON state again. In addition, a wait period occurs even when the bonus AT state continues in this way. By setting the wait period in this way, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state at the end of one game, and the AT2 signal is set to the ON state at the start of the next game. It is possible to guarantee a period for recognizing that the AT2 signal is in the OFF state in the computer HC. In addition, during this wait period, the image display device 66 or the like can execute an effect corresponding to the bonus AT state running continuously.

  When the bonus AT state occurs, the normal AT state is entered after the bonus AT state ends. In this case, when the bonus AT state ends and the normal AT state is entered, not only the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state but also the AT1 signal is set to the ON state. As described above, when the condition for shifting to the normal AT state is satisfied, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state without waiting for three occurrences of the bell winning, so that the AT1 is started when the normal AT state is started. It becomes possible to quickly set the signal to the ON state.

  Next, an output mode of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal when the bonus AT state is shifted in the middle of the normal AT state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  66A shows the output state of the AT1 signal, FIG. 66B shows the output state of the AT2 signal, FIG. 66C shows the execution period of the normal AT state, and FIG. 66D shows the bonus. FIG. 66 (e) shows the execution period of the game that triggers the transition to the bonus AT state, FIG. 66 (f) shows the execution period of other games, and FIG. 66 (g) shows the execution period of the AT state. Indicates the setting status of the wait period, and FIG. 66 (h) indicates the occurrence status of the bell winning.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (e), at the timing t1 in the situation where the normal AT state is shown in FIG. 66 (c) and the AT1 signal is ON as shown in FIG. 66 (a). A game that triggers the transition to the bonus AT state is started. Then, at the timing of t2 when the game ends, the normal AT state ends as shown in FIG. 66 (c), while the bonus AT state starts as shown in FIG. 66 (d). At the timing t2, the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, another game is started as shown in FIG. 66 (f). In this case, measurement of the wait period (8 sec) is started at the timing t3 as shown in FIG. 66 (g). Then, when the wait period elapses at the timing t4, the AT2 signal is set to the ON state as shown in FIG. 66 (b).

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 66 (f), the final game of the current set in the bonus AT state is started. At the timing of t6, a wait period (5 sec) is set as shown in FIG. 66 (g), the bonus AT state is ended as shown in FIG. 66 (d), and further in FIG. 66 (b). As shown, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state. At the timing t6, the normal AT state is resumed as shown in FIG. 66 (c). However, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the AT1 signal is maintained in the OFF state, and this OFF state is also after the timing of t7, which is the timing when the wait period has elapsed as shown in FIG. 66 (g). Maintained.

  Thereafter, in the normal AT state, as shown in FIG. 66 (h), a bell winning is generated at each of the timing t8, the timing t9, and the timing t10, as shown in FIG. 66 (a) at the timing t10. At this time, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  A privilege point counter is provided in the sub-side RAM 84, and a privilege point selected in the privilege point lottery process is selected and the privilege point selected is added to the privilege point counter. Then, when the value of the privilege point counter is equal to or greater than the privilege reference value, the normal AT state continues. In addition, when the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state is satisfied, the remaining number of executions in the normal AT state is added, and in the addition state, the remaining execution in the normal AT state is also performed in the addition lottery process. The number of times is added. In this case, when the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state is satisfied, or when the winning lottery process is performed and the winning combination is won, the number of remaining executions itself is not stored, but the bonus reference value is stored in the bonus point counter. In this configuration, information corresponding to xn (n is an integer of 1 or more) is added. Therefore, the privilege point counter can be used in common in the configuration in which the extended AT mode in the normal AT state is diversified as described above. As a result, it is possible to consolidate storage areas to be referred to when determining whether or not the normal AT state should be extended, and the processing load at the time of the determination can be reduced. Further, in the configuration in which data is handled in units of 1 byte, the required storage capacity can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which a privilege point counter and a counter for remaining execution count are provided in units of bytes.

  When winning a bonus lottery opportunity, one bonus point is selected from the bonus points by a bonus point lottery process. It is possible to diversify the mode of addition. In addition, since all of the privilege points selected in this case are smaller than the privilege standard value, the accumulation of privilege points results in the occurrence of a normal AT state resort, and the normal AT state continues. It is possible to increase the degree of expectation for villain step by step.

  When the normal AT state is run continuously, the privilege points corresponding to the privilege reference value are subtracted from the privilege point counter. As a result, in a configuration in which the privilege point counter is used in common, it is possible to standardize the handling of privilege points when generating a normal AT state resort, and the processing load can be reduced.

  In a situation where the privilege point is a value larger than the privilege standard numerical value x (n-1) and smaller than the privilege standard numerical value x n (n is an integer of 1 or more), the privilege standard numerical value x (n-1) has been exceeded. Information corresponding to the minute value is notified by the privilege point notification unit 67. As a result, the player can play the game while clearly recognizing how many privilege points are necessary to generate a normal AT state resort. Can be increased. In this case, the privilege point notification unit 67 notifies the remaining numerical value when the privilege point is divided by the privilege reference value. Thereby, in the configuration in which the privilege point counter is used in common, the numerical value of the privilege point notified by the privilege point notification unit 67 can be derived with a simple processing configuration.

  In a situation where the privilege point is a privilege standard numerical value × n or more and smaller than the privilege standard numerical value × (n + 1) (n is an integer of 1 or more), information corresponding to the n is received by the stock notification unit 68. Informed. As a result, the player can recognize the remaining number of executions in the normal AT state, and the player's sense of superiority can be suitably enhanced. In this case, the stock notification unit 68 notifies the quotient value when the privilege point is divided by the privilege reference value. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the privilege point counter is used in common, the remaining number of executions in the normal AT state notified by the stock notification unit 68 can be derived with a simple processing configuration.

  When the privilege point becomes greater than or equal to the privilege reference value in the pre-branch AT state or the branch AT state, the state shifts to the added state. And in the said addition state, the condition where the value of privilege reference | standard numerical value xn (n is an integer greater than or equal to 1) is added to a privilege point counter may generate | occur | produce. This makes it possible to closely relate these states.

  When the pre-branching AT state or the branching AT state ends, if the privilege point is greater than or equal to the privilege standard value, the configuration in which the normal AT state is usually extended, the situation where the privilege point is less than the privilege standard value When the normal AT state is extended due to the continuation condition, the privilege points less than the privilege reference value are retained even in the normal AT state of the extended holiday destination. Thereby, the opportunity that a privilege point becomes more than a privilege standard numerical value increases, and it becomes possible to generate many opportunities with the expectation whether a privilege point can become a privilege standard numerical value or more. Moreover, according to this structure, even if it is the privilege point acquired just before completion | finish of AT state before a branch or branch AT state, it is possible to enjoy the profit by it. This makes it possible for the player to expect the privilege point acquisition condition to be satisfied at any timing in the pre-branch AT state and the branch AT state. Furthermore, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the profit when the normal AT state is extended, and it is possible to increase the expectation that the normal AT state is extended.

  When the AT continuation lottery process is performed and the AT continuation is won, the normal AT state is continuously extended, and the normal AT state is also extended when the privilege point is equal to or higher than the privilege reference value. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the normal AT state is extended, and it is possible to suitably enhance the expectation of the player who expects the normal AT state to be extended.

  When the normal AT state continues, a victory effect or a draw effect is executed as a battle effect in the branch AT state. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the victory effect or the draw effect to be executed, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, when the number of executions of the victory effect is the predetermined number of executions (12 times), the probability of winning the AT continuation win becomes the highest probability regardless of the probability of the AT continuation winning at that time. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the victory effect will be executed.

  In addition, since the victory effect is executed even when the normal AT state is extended due to the remaining execution count being 1 or more, the greater the number of remaining execution times is set, the more the number of executions of the victory effect is predetermined. Expectation that becomes the number of executions is increased. Therefore, when a large number of remaining executions is set, not only the benefit of increasing the number of consecutive ATs in the normal AT state, but also the benefit of increasing the probability that the AT will be continuously elected is given. Accordingly, the advantage of setting a large number of remaining executions is increased.

  The number of times that the victory effect has been executed is notified by the victory number notification unit 69. Thereby, it is possible to suitably increase the expectation that the number of executions of the victory effect will be the predetermined number of executions.

  Since the remaining number of executions in the normal AT state is notified by the stock notification unit 68, it is possible to make the player recognize at least how much the normal AT state continues through the stock notification unit 68, and the player's It is possible to increase the sense of superiority. Further, the player himself / herself can recognize the degree of expectation that the number of executions of the victory effect will be the predetermined number of executions in relation to the remaining number of executions grasped by the stock notification unit 68. As a result, it is possible to closely associate the regular AT state related resorts related to the remaining number of executions with the probability of AT continuous winning in the AT continuous lottery process, and the effect of setting both consecutive resort modes Can be made synergistic.

  When the remaining number of executions in the normal AT state is 1 or more, priority is given to the digestion of the remaining number of executions, and the AT continuous lottery process is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the normal AT state from being unnecessarily extended as compared with the configuration in which the remaining number of executions is consumed when the continuation is lost in the AT continuous lottery process.

  When the normal AT state continues, the probability of winning the AT continuation in the AT continuation lottery process can be increased. As a result, when the normal AT state is extended, the extended range is more likely to occur, and the advantage that the normal AT state is extended is increased. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's feeling of exhilaration when the normal AT state is extended, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  If the AT continuation lottery process results in an AT continuation win, the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process is executed and the promotion wins, thereby increasing the probability of an AT continuation win. This increases the player's attention to whether or not the AT continuation lottery process determines whether or not the AT continuation winning is made. Further, by executing the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process in this way, it becomes possible to set the probability of the promotion winner in the promotion lottery process independently of the probability of the AT continuation winner. Thereby, the freedom degree of probability setting is raised.

  In the branch AT state, a battle effect corresponding to whether or not a normal AT state extended resort occurs is executed, so that a notification of whether or not the normal AT state is extended can be provided to the player as an effect. It becomes possible, and the interest of the game is improved. In this case, when the victory effect is executed as the battle effect, there is a high possibility that the probability of winning the AT continuation in the AT continuation lottery process is high. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting that a victory effect will be generated, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  By winning the AT continuation lottery process, the winning effect or the draw effect is executed as the battle effect, and when the victory effect is executed as the battle effect, the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process is executed and the promotion is performed. The probability of winning the AT continuation increases by winning the promotion in the lottery process. In this case, when the victory effect or the draw effect is executed as the battle effect, the player can play the game while expecting the victory effect or the draw effect to be executed because the AT in the normal state is fixed. It becomes. In addition, when the victory effect is executed among the victory effect and the draw effect, there is a possibility that the probability of winning the AT continuation is high, so the player expects that the victory effect will be further executed. A game will be performed. Thereby, it becomes possible to make a player's expectation multistage, and the interest of the game is improved.

  When the number of remaining executions in the normal AT state is 1 or more and the normal AT state continues, the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process is not executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress an unnecessarily large number of opportunities for setting a high probability of being promoted in the promotion lottery process.

  Even if the AT continuation lottery process results in a continuation of the AT continuation, the normal AT state will continue if the bonus points are greater than or equal to the privilege reference value in the situation where the defeat effect is being executed in the subsequent branching AT state. . As a result, even if the privilege point cannot be greater than or equal to the privilege standard value before the pre-branch AT state ends, it is easier to generate a normal AT state resort if the privilege point is a larger value. The degree of attention to acquiring privilege points is increased.

  Even in the case where AT continuation lottery processing is not performed, AT continuation lottery processing is executed again after the continuation in the configuration in which the normal AT state is continued by satisfying other continuation conditions. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing at which the extended play in the normal AT state ends, and it is possible to favorably maintain the player's expectation in the normal AT state.

  If the AT continuation lottery process is executed and the AT continuation lottery process is executed when the normal AT state is continued due to other continuation conditions being satisfied when the AT continuation lottery process is established, the subsequent AT continuation lottery process is executed. There is a high probability that will be continuously elected AT. This makes it possible to increase the probability that the normal AT state will continue even if an event that causes the AT continuation to be lost occurs in the AT continuous lottery process, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The probability of winning an AT continuous lottery in the AT continuous lottery process increases as a result of continuous winning in the AT continuous lottery process, and the number of executions of the victory effect is predetermined even if the continuous winning in the AT continuous lottery process does not occur. It becomes high by becoming the number of executions (12 times). As a result, there is a high probability that the AT will be continuously elected in both cases where the AT is continuously elected in the AT continuous lottery process and the normal AT state continues, and when the normal AT state is continued due to losing the AT continuation. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the normal AT state is extended, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Even if the privilege point is not equal to or greater than the privilege reference value, and the AT continuation lottery process is further out of the AT continuation process, the normal AT state is linked to the revival lottery process in the final chance state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the normal AT state is extended, and it is possible to give many opportunities for the normal AT state to be extended. In this case, the probability of winning the revival in the revival lottery process varies depending on the privilege points. Thereby, even if a privilege point is less than a privilege standard numerical value, it will affect the probability that the said privilege point will be a revival winning in a revival lottery process, and it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a privilege point. In particular, the greater the value of the privilege point, the higher the probability that it will be a revival win. Therefore, even in a situation where the privilege point cannot exceed the privilege reference value, the degree of attention to privilege point acquisition can be increased.

  In either case where the normal AT state is consecutive due to the AT continuous lottery process in the AT continuous lottery process, and when the normal AT state is continuous due to the privilege point being equal to or more than the bonus reference value, While the remaining privilege points are handed over to the normal AT state of the consecutive resort destination, when the revival is selected in the revival lottery process, the privilege point counter is cleared to “0”. Thereby, it becomes possible to restrict the profit of acquiring privilege points to some extent. In addition, depending on the type of event that triggered the normal AT state, there are cases where privilege points are handed over and cases where bonus points are not handed over, and the manner of handing over the privilege points is diversified. . Therefore, the progress of the game is diversified in relation to the privilege points, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The probability of winning the revival in the revival lottery process varies depending on not only the bonus points but also the winning combination in the game. As a result, the points to be noted in the execution of the resurrection lottery process are diversified, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the final chance state, when the extension opportunity is won, the final chance state is extended. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the player's disadvantage when the revival lottery process does not result in the revival winnings despite winning the extension opportunity.

  The transition to the normal AT state may occur based on the normal replay winning combination in the transition chance state. As a result, the game is played while expecting a normal replay winning combination in the transition chance state, and the interest of the game is improved. In this case, when the player is elected as an expectation improver in the transition chance state, the expectation that the transition to the normal AT state occurs in the transition chance state is high. As a result, in the transition chance state, not only the normal replay role but also the expectation-improving role is expected to be won, and diversification of the roles that are expected to win. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

  The transition chance status will be extended if the candidate is elected to improve expectations. As a result, if the winning combination is won, the degree of expectation that the transition to the normal AT state will occur in the transition chance state. In addition, when the winning degree winning combination is won, and the transition probability UP lottery process is performed, the probability of transition winning is increased in the transition lottery process. As a result, if the winning combination is won, the degree of expectation that the transition to the normal AT state will occur in the transition chance state.

  The probability of winning the normal replay role is higher than the probability of winning the expectation improvement role. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the normal replay winning combination is won in the transition chance state, and to give many opportunities to expect the transition to the normal AT state. In addition, when a winning combination with a low winning probability is won, a situation that is advantageous to the player may occur, but when a winning combination that has a lower winning probability than a normal replaying role is won. Therefore, since the expectation that the transition to the normal AT state occurs is high, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when winning the expectation improver.

  The normal replay combination serves as a transition trigger to the normal AT state in the transition chance state, but does not serve as a transition trigger to the normal AT state in other game states. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to being a normal replay winning combination in the transition chance state. In addition, the expectation-improving role is not an opportunity to shift to the normal AT state in the transition chance state, but is an opportunity to shift to the normal AT state in other gaming states. As a result, it is possible to give the player recognition that the expectation-improving role is an advantageous role, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to winning the expectation-improving role.

  When the first to third special replay roles are won or when the result of losing in the lottery process is reached, the start wait time is set at the end of the game, and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the next game is started. Wait. When the start wait time is set, the bonus AT state is started. In this case, the start of the bonus AT state can be emphasized through the setting of the start wait time. As a result, the player feels unexpected that the start wait time has been set, and the uplifting feeling for starting the bonus AT state is enhanced. On the other hand, in the bonus AT state, the player is more aware of the game, so if the start wait time is set in the middle of the bonus AT state, the player may think that it is bothersome. On the other hand, since the start wait time is not set in such a situation, it is possible to prevent such an inconvenience from occurring.

  Even if the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won, the bonus AT state is not entered if the penalty event occurs. If the start wait time is set in such a situation, the player may feel uncomfortable. In such a situation, the start wait time is not set, so that such inconvenience should not occur. Is possible.

  When the first special replay combination is won or when the result is a lottery process, a freeze time is set at the start of the game. When these lottery results are obtained, the start of the bonus AT state or the increase in the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state surely occurs. As a result, the player can feel surprised about the fact that the freeze time has been set and can raise his / her mood, and can stop the game while recognizing that the result is the lottery result. It becomes. In addition, since such a freeze time function can occur regardless of whether or not the bonus AT state is in effect, the function can be suitably generated by setting the freeze time even during the bonus AT state. It becomes possible.

  The main MPU 72 dares to select the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should be stopped when the normal replay winning combination in which the normal replay winning is generated regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The side MPU 82 executes control for notifying the selected stop order when the normal AT state continues. Then, based on the fact that the selected stop order coincides with the actual stop order, the main MPU 72 performs output setting corresponding to the extended state in the normal AT state for the external output of the AT1 signal. As a result, even if the sub-MPU 82 independently manages the progress of the normal AT state, it does not require transmission of information from the sub-side MPU 82 to the main-side MPU 72, so that the normal AT state can be handled. It is possible to perform the external output setting in the main MPU 72.

  The main MPU 72 always executes the push order lottery process for selecting the stop order when the normal replay winning combination is won. This eliminates the need to switch between a situation in which the push-order lottery process is executed and a situation in which the push-order lottery process is not executed, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

  The normal replay combination is the combination having the highest winning probability in the normal AT state. Then, by using the normal replay combination for grasping the normal AT state extended resort, when the normal AT state extended resort occurs, it is possible to quickly grasp this in the main MPU 72. .

  The main MPU 72 is compatible with the normal AT state for the external output of the AT1 signal when an event in which the stop order selected when the normal replay winning combination is selected and the actual stop order occur a plurality of times Set the output. As a result, the possibility that the output setting is performed when the coincident event occurs by chance is reduced. In particular, the main MPU 72 sets the output setting when the matching event occurs a plurality of times without occurrence of an event in which the stop order selected in the normal replay winning combination does not match the actual stop order. Therefore, the possibility that the output setting is performed when the coincident event occurs by chance is greatly reduced.

  The normal replay combination is a combination in which a winning occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the rotational position of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. . Thereby, since a player's profit does not fluctuate depending on whether or not the stop order is notified, it is difficult to create a restriction for notifying the stop order.

  The stop order selected when the normal replay winning combination is selected does not include the stop order in which the left reel 32L is stopped first. In a situation where the stop order is not notified, the player generally stops the left reel 32L first, so that when the stop order is selected as described above, a normal replay combination is won. It is possible to reduce the possibility that an event in which the selected stop order coincides with the actual stop order occurs by chance.

  The sub MPU 82 can notify a stop order different from the stop order selected by the main MPU 72 when a normal replay winning combination is won in a situation where a normal AT state extended game has not occurred. As a result, it is possible to actively prevent the occurrence of an event in which the stop order selected when the normal replay combination is won and the actual stop order coincide with each other. The accuracy can be increased.

  When an event in which the stop order selected in the normal replay winning combination matches the actual stop order occurs a plurality of times, the main MPU 72 changes the AT1 signal external output to the normal AT state resort. In the configuration in which the corresponding output setting is performed, the sub-side MPU 82 reports a stop order different from the selected stop order when the matching event occurs once. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the frequency with which the stop order notification is executed.

  In each of the bonus AT state and the normal AT state, the execution control of the push order notification for generating the bell winning is performed by the sub-side MPU 82, thereby reducing the processing load on the main-side MPU 72. In this case, determination of the end timing of the bonus AT state and the normal AT state is not all performed by the sub-side MPU 82, but determination of the end timing for the bonus AT state is performed by the main-side MPU 72. Thus, in the bonus AT state and the bonus AT state, the main wait MPU 72 can set an end wait time for enhancing the effect, and the processing load on the main MPU 72 can be reduced. However, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

  In the bonus AT state, only the transition based on the lottery processing result of the combination occurs, whereas in the normal AT state, not only the transition based on the lottery processing result of the combination in the transition chance state, but also the ceiling game Transitions triggered by digestion also occur. As a result, for the bonus AT state in which the transition control is performed by the main MPU 72, a transition pattern is limited to reduce the processing load on the main MPU 72, and a plurality of types of transition patterns in the normal AT state are set. This makes it possible to diversify games.

  More patterns of establishment of the continuation condition are set in the normal AT state than in the bonus AT state. As a result, with regard to the bonus AT state in which the continuation control is performed by the main MPU 72, the establishment pattern of the continuation condition in the normal AT state is reduced while reducing the processing load of the main MPU 72 by restricting the continuation condition establishment pattern. It is possible to diversify games by setting multiple types.

  In a configuration in which when a first bell combination or a second bell combination is won and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the stop order corresponding to the winning combination, a bell winning is generated, The AT1 signal is set to the ON state based on the fact that the main MPU 72 specifies that a bell winning has occurred when the two-bell combination is won. As a result, even if the sub-MPU 82 independently manages the progress of the normal AT state, the output setting of the AT1 signal to the ON state without requiring transmission of information from the sub-side MPU 82 to the main MPU 72 is performed. Can be performed.

  The main MPU 72 sets the output of the AT1 signal to the ON state when a bell winning is generated a plurality of times. As a result, the possibility that the output setting to the ON state will be performed when a bell prize is accidentally generated is reduced. In particular, the main MPU 72 performs the above-described output setting in the case where the Bell winning is generated a plurality of times without causing the event that the Bell winning is not generated even though the first Bell winning or the second Bell winning is won. The possibility that the output setting is performed in the event that a bell winning occurs accidentally is greatly reduced.

  The stop order in which the bell winning is possible when the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won does not include the stop order in which the left reel 32L is stopped first. In a situation where the stop order is not notified, the player generally stops the left reel 32L first, so that the possibility of a bell winning by chance is generated by selecting the stop order as described above. It can be reduced.

  When no bell winning is generated despite winning the first bell combination or the second bell combination, the main MPU 72 sets the AT1 signal to the OFF state. As a result, the main MPU 72 only has to monitor whether or not a bell winning has occurred in either the case where the AT1 signal is set to the ON state or the case where the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state. As a result, the types of events to be monitored are suppressed, and the processing load is reduced.

  The number of occurrences of a bell winning as a trigger for setting the AT1 signal to the ON state is larger than the number of occurrences of a push out of order when the bell combination is won as a trigger for setting the AT1 signal to the OFF state. As a result, when the normal AT state ends, the AT1 signal can be set to the OFF state at an early stage, and the AT1 signal can be set to the ON state with high accuracy.

  There are two types of winning combinations to be monitored when the AT1 signal is set to the ON state and the OFF state, ie, the first bell combination and the second bell combination. As a result, it is possible to generate many opportunities for performing each output setting while increasing the degree of freedom for setting the winning probability of each combination.

  When the winning state of the CB combination is maintained, the transition to the normal AT state occurs. This makes it possible to limit the period during which the transition to the normal AT state can be made in relation to the winning combination, and the player pays attention to winning the CB role and maintaining the winning state of the CB role. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to provide novel game contents.

  In the CB state, the medal (or virtual medal) possessed by the player does not increase. In this case, when the winning combination of the CB role is made, if the winning is generated, the state shifts to an unfavorable CB in-progress state, and the transition to the normal AT state can occur by preventing the winning from being generated. There is sex. Thereby, it becomes possible to make a player's profit largely different depending on whether or not a CB winning is generated, and to increase the degree of attention to the game in the winning state of the CB combination.

  In the CB state, although the medal (or virtual medal) possessed by the player does not increase, it does not decrease. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player who has unintentionally generated the CB winning.

  An internal state notifying unit 63 that is turned on when the CB combination is won is provided. This makes it possible to prompt the player not to generate a prize when the winning combination of the CB combination is achieved.

  In the configuration in which the AT1 signal is set ON in the main MPU 72 when the normal AT state is set and the AT2 signal is set ON in the main MPU 72 when the bonus AT state is set. In the case of winning, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned on before the ON state of the AT1 signal and the ON state of the AT2 signal are set. Accordingly, it is possible to notify the player that the CB combination is in a winning state before notifying the outside of the slot machine 10.

  When winning the CB combination, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned on before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started. Accordingly, it is possible to notify the player that the CB combination has been won before the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is started in the game, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of CB winning.

  When the condition for transition to the bonus AT state is satisfied or when a CB winning occurs in the bonus AT state, the game content in the CB state is given priority, and the game executed in the CB state continues for the bonus AT state. Treated as a digest of the number of games. As a result, the player plays the game so that a CB winning is not generated when the transition condition to the bonus AT state is satisfied or in the bonus AT state. Therefore, the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is carefully performed, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, as compared with a configuration in which the bonus AT state is simply invalidated, the bonus AT state and the CB in-progress state can be associated with each other, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Even if the CB in-progress state ends, the bonus AT state is not immediately restored, but the bonus AT state is restored when the CB combination is selected. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not to win the CB role after the end of the CB in-progress state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Also, the game required until the winning combination of the CB combination is treated as the digest of the number of continuing games in the bonus AT state. As a result, after completion of the CB in-progress state, the game is played while expecting to win the CB role until the completion of the game for the number of continuing games in the bonus AT state is completed, and the interest of the game is improved. .

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the setting mode of the AT1 signal when the AT1 signal is in the ON state and the state shifts to the bonus AT state is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the AT1 signal and AT2 signal setting process executed by the main MPU 72. The setting process is executed instead of the external output setting process (step S216) at the end of the normal process (FIG. 11).

  First, in step S3801, it is determined whether a condition for shifting to the bonus AT state is satisfied. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3801, it is determined in step S3802 whether the output state of the AT1 signal is ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3802, "1" is set to the midway transition flag provided in the main RAM 74 in step S3803. The midway transition flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the state has shifted to the bonus AT state when the AT1 signal is in the ON state. Thereafter, in step S3804, the output state of the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state. If a negative determination is made in step S3802, or if the process of step S3804 is executed, the output state of the AT2 signal is set to ON in step S3805.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3801, it is determined in step S3806 whether the bonus AT state has ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3806, the output state of the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state in step S3807. In the following step S3808, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the midway transition flag of the main RAM 74. If “1” is set, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state in step S3809.

  When the process of step S3805 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S3806, when a negative determination is made at step S3808, or when the process of step S3809 is executed, other processes are executed at step S3810. Run. In other processes, the processes in steps S3101 to S3114 and steps S3401 to S3404 in the first embodiment are executed. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the transition to the bonus AT state occurs when the AT1 signal is in the ON state, the AT1 signal set to the OFF state at the transition to the bonus AT state is the end of the bonus AT state. It is set to ON again. When a transition is made to the bonus AT state in the middle of the normal AT state, the remaining continuous game in the normal AT state at that time is held, and when the bonus AT state ends, the normal AT state is resumed from the state of the remaining continuous game. The In this case, applying the configuration in which the AT1 signal is set to the ON state on condition that the bell winning has occurred a plurality of times as in the case of transition from the non-AT state to the normal AT state, the bell winning will occur a plurality of times. There is a possibility that the remaining continuous game is consumed and the normal AT state ends without the AT1 signal being set to the ON state. On the other hand, in the situation where the bonus AT state ends and returns to the normal AT state as described above, when the bonus AT state ends, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state so that the normal AT after the return is restored. It becomes possible to set the AT1 signal to the ON state before the state ends.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the aspect of the last chance state is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the final chance state setting process executed by the sub-side MPU 82. The setting process is executed when the final chance state is entered.

  First, in step S3901, the value of the privilege point counter is grasped. In the subsequent step S3902, the value of the recognized privilege point counter is set in a continuous game counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84. The continuation game counter is a counter for specifying in the sub-side MPU 82 the number of remaining continuation games in the final chance state.

  After that, in step S3903, a restoration lottery table corresponding to the value of the privilege point counter grasped in step S3901 is read from the sub ROM 83. The resurrection lottery table is set so that the greater the value of the privilege point counter, the higher the probability that a resurrection will be won in the resurrection lottery process. Thereafter, the final chance state setting process is terminated.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, not only does the probability of a revival win in the revival lottery process increase according to the value of the privilege point counter, but the number of continuous games corresponding to the value of the privilege point counter is set. Thereby, the importance of the value of the privilege point counter is increased, and the sense of expectation for winning the privilege lottery opportunity during the normal AT state is increased.

  Instead of the configuration in which the value of the privilege point counter is directly set in the continuous game counter, the number of continuous games corresponding to the value of the privilege point counter may be set in the continuous game counter. For example, it is good also as a structure which sets a some stage according to the range of the value of a privilege point counter, and sets the continuation game number corresponding to a stage to a continuation game counter. In addition, as a configuration for setting the number of continuing games for the value of the benefit point counter twice, the number of continuing games for the value of the benefit point counter 3 times, or the number of continuing games for a predetermined integer multiple of 4 times or more Also good.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing contents when the normal AT state ends are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a normal AT state end process executed by the sub-side MPU 82. Note that the termination process is executed when the final chance state is terminated without being revived.

  First, in step S4001, a bonus point holding lottery process is executed. In the holding lottery process, the holding lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and further, the sub-side lottery counter value updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the sub-side lottery counter value is read. Check against the holding lottery table. The holding lottery table is set so that, for example, the holding lottery is performed with a probability of 1/2.

  In subsequent step S4002, it is determined whether or not the result of the holding lottery process in step S4001 is a holding win. If it is not a holding win, the privilege point counter is cleared to “0” in step S4003, and then the normal AT state termination process is terminated. If it is a holding win, the value of the privilege point counter is maintained as it is. The normal AT state termination processing is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the normal AT state ends in a situation where the remaining set count is “0”, the value of the privilege point counter may be taken over to the next normal AT state. As a result, when the normal AT state ends with some value of the privilege point counter remaining, the next normal AT state has a high expectation of the recreational resort. In this case, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to continue the game.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure from which the probability which becomes a holding | maintenance winning in a holding | maintenance lottery process changes according to the value of a privilege point counter. For example, it is good also as a structure where the probability which becomes a holding | maintenance winning becomes high, so that the value of a privilege point counter is large.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  (1) In the privilege point lottery process (steps S2002 and S2502), when a privilege point is won, a value less than the privilege standard value is selected. However, a value greater than the privilege standard value can be selected. It is good. In this case, the sub MPU 82 can specify that the configuration for shifting to the added state or the condition for shifting to the added state is established at the timing when a value equal to or greater than the bonus standard value is selected in the bonus point lottery process. By configuring the data setting, both the bonus points when winning in the bonus point lottery process and the bonus points when winning in the extra lottery process (step S2808) are added to the bonus point counter. In this configuration, it is possible to accurately determine the condition for shifting to the added state.

  (2) A sub-side RAM 84 is provided with a remaining set number counter in the normal AT state, and the value of the remaining set number counter is incremented by 1 at the timing when the value of the privilege point counter is equal to or greater than the privilege reference value. It is good also as composition which subtracts a privilege standard numerical value. In addition, in the case where the winning lottery process (step S2808) is won, the added remaining set number is added to the remaining set number counter without adding the privilege point to the privilege point counter. Also good. In this case, the sub-side MPU 82 can grasp the remaining set count separately from the privilege points. For example, when performing the emission control of the privilege point notification unit 67, the privilege point counter is referred to and the light emission of the stock notification unit 68 is performed. When performing control, it is possible to adopt a processing configuration in which the remaining set number counter is referred to.

  (3) The privilege standard numerical value is not limited to “7” and is arbitrary. However, the minimum selected in the bonus point lottery process so that an event that is greater than or equal to the bonus standard value occurs when an event that wins the bonus point occurs a plurality of times in the bonus point lottery process (step S2002, step S2502). It is preferable to set a value that is at least twice the bonus point.

  (4) The bonus point lottery process is performed when a prize is generated by winning the bonus lottery opportunity instead of the configuration in which the bonus point lottery process (steps S2002 and S2502) is executed when the bonus lottery opportunity is won. It is good also as a structure by which (step S2002, step S2502) is performed. In this case, as the bonus lottery opportunity, a role in which no winning occurs according to the operation operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R or the rotation position of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. May be included, or may not be included.

  (5) The privilege point counter may have a data capacity larger than 1 byte. Even in this case, in a configuration in which each counter is handled in units of bytes, it is possible to reduce the necessary storage capacity by using the privilege point counter in common. For example, when the privilege point and the remaining set count of the normal AT are managed by separate counters, if the privilege point counter has a 2-byte configuration and the remaining set count counter has a 1-byte configuration, 3 bytes are required. However, it is possible to reduce by 1 byte by sharing the benefit point counter with 2 bytes.

  (6) The bonus point lottery process is executed when the bonus lottery opportunity is won instead of the configuration in which the bonus point lottery process (steps S2002 and S2502) is executed when the bonus lottery opportunity is won. It is good also as a structure by which the privilege point corresponding to the privilege lottery opportunity which became the said winning is added to a privilege point counter. In this case, since the bonus point lottery process is not executed, the processing load is reduced, and the relationship between the bonus lottery trigger and the bonus points becomes clear, and the degree of attention to the result of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in each game Is increased.

  (7) When a prize lottery opportunity is won, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a bonus point is to be added. When a prize is awarded in the lottery, a bonus point corresponding to the bonus lottery opportunity is a bonus point. It is good also as a structure added to a counter. In this case, the relationship between the bonus lottery opportunity and the bonus points becomes clear, and the degree of attention to the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in each game is increased.

  (8) Instead of a configuration in which the value of the privilege point counter used in common is divided and set between the privilege point notification unit 67 and the stock notification unit 68, the value of the privilege point counter is directly used by the predetermined notification unit. It is good also as composition notified. In this case, by allowing the player to recognize a privilege point corresponding to the occurrence of one remaining set, the number of remaining sets can be recognized from the value of the privilege point counter. It is possible to recognize privilege points necessary for the number of times to be newly added once.

  (9) In the case where the normal AT state continues without going through the final chance state, even if the value of the privilege point counter is less than the privilege reference value, it is replaced with a configuration that is surely inherited to the normal AT state of the extended resort destination Thus, it may be configured to take over when the takeover condition is satisfied. For example, it may be configured to take over even if the value of the privilege point counter is less than the privilege standard value when the succession lottery process executed at the time of the consecutive resort in the normal AT state is made. Also, for example, when the value of the privilege point counter is equal to or greater than the takeover reference numerical value, it may be configured to be inherited even if it is less than the privilege reference numerical value.

  (10) Even if a return to the normal AT state occurs in the final chance state, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which privilege points less than the privilege standard numerical value are handed over to the normal AT state of the extended resort. In this case, it becomes possible to increase the chances that the privilege points are equal to or greater than the privilege standard numerical value.

  (11) The value of the privilege point counter in the case where the normal AT state has ended may be always taken over to the normal AT state that has been transferred due to the newly established transition condition. In this case, it becomes possible to increase the chances that the privilege points are equal to or greater than the privilege standard numerical value.

  (12) In the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309), the continuation of AT is lost and the value of the privilege point counter becomes equal to or more than the privilege reference value during the period when the defeat effect is executed as the battle effect. If the event occurs, or if a normal AT state consecutive game occurs in the final chance state, the promotion lottery process at the time of resurrection is executed for the probability that the AT continuous lottery process will be the AT continuous winning process, When the promotion lottery process is performed, the probability of winning the AT continuation may be increased. In this case, the probability that the promotion is won may be higher than the probability that the promotion will be won in the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process (step S2316) that occurs when the winning effect is executed as the AT continuation winning. Good. In addition, it may be configured such that the probability that the winning of the AT continuation is likely to be higher in the case of the winning chance in the final chance state. In these cases, since the normal AT state extended resort condition is satisfied under the conditions set as the rear order, the normal AT state extended resort is more likely to occur. Can be kept high until the end of the normal AT state.

  (13) Processing for setting the AT continuation probability to the highest probability in relation to the victory counter so that the normal AT state is more likely to be consecutive when the normal AT state is extended (step S2308) and the AT continuation probability In addition to or instead of the configuration for executing the promotion lottery process (step S2316), a configuration that makes it easy to acquire a privilege point, a configuration that increases the value of the acquired privilege point, a configuration that makes it easy to acquire a large privilege point, the remaining By adopting at least one of a configuration in which the probability of adding a set number is increased and a configuration in which a large number of remaining set times are easily selected, the normal AT state is linked to the privilege point. It is good also as a structure which becomes easy.

  (14) In the case where the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) is out of the AT continuation, but the normal AT state continues, the probability that the AT continuation lottery process executed thereafter will be the AT continuation win is low. It is good also as composition which can become or become low. In this case, it is possible to suppress the probability that the normal AT state will be extended while securing the opportunity for the normal AT state to be extended.

  (15) In the AT continuous lottery process (step S2309), the types of probabilities of winning the AT continuation are not limited to six types and are arbitrary, and may be two types, three types, four types, or five types. There may be seven or more types. However, in order to generate an opportunity for setting the highest probability regardless of the probability of winning the AT continuation, it is preferable that there are three or more types of the probability of winning the AT continuation.

  (16) In the AT continuous lottery process (step S2309) when the number of executions of the victory effect reaches the predetermined number of times, instead of the configuration in which the probability of the AT continuous winning is the highest probability, the AT continuous probability promotion lottery process It is good also as a structure with many steps in which a probability becomes high rather than the case where a promotion win is made in (step S2316). For example, in the configuration where the probability of becoming an AT continuation winning is increased by one step when the promotion winning is made in the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process (step S2316), the number of executions of the victory effect becomes the predetermined number of executions. A configuration in which the probability of winning an AT continuation is increased by two or more levels is conceivable.

  (17) The number of executions of the victory effect necessary for setting a high probability of winning the AT continuation is not limited to twelve times, but may be arbitrary and may be one or two. It may be 3 times, 4 times, or 13 times or more. However, in order to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the victory effect, it is preferable that the number is twice or more.

  (18) Instead of a configuration in which the number of executions of the victory effect is not inherited to the normal AT state that is shifted when the next transition condition is established, a configuration in which it is surely inherited or a configuration that can be inherited may be employed. The configuration that can be taken over may be a configuration in which a takeover lottery process that is a succession selection with a predetermined probability is executed, and a configuration that is inherited when the value of the privilege point counter is less than the privilege standard value but is greater than or equal to the takeover standard value It is good.

  (19) In order for the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process (step S2316) to be executed, the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) is the AT continuation win, and the battle lottery process (step S2311) is the winning effect. However, instead of this, in the case where the AT continuous winning is selected, the promotion lottery process (step S2316) may be surely executed, and whether or not the AT continuous winning is determined. It is good also as a structure by which a promotion lottery process (step S2316) is reliably performed when a victory effect is performed regardless. Further, when the normal AT state continues, the promotion lottery process (step S2316) may be surely executed.

  (20) The victory effect in the battle effect may be configured to be a victory that can be selected only when the value of the privilege point counter is equal to or greater than the privilege reference value, and the AT continuous winning is performed in the AT continuous lottery process (step S2309). It is good also as a structure which can be selected only when it becomes. In this case, in order to set a high probability of winning the AT continuation in relation to the number of executions of the victory effect, it is necessary to generate a large number of target conditions among the above conditions, and the probability of winning the AT continuation. It is possible to suppress the possibility of being set high.

  (21) The probability that the winning effect is selected in the battle lottery process (steps S2303, S2311, and S2605) may be changed. For example, the configuration may be such that the probability of selecting the victory effect increases as the number of executions of the victory effect increases, or the configuration decreases. In this case, the victory effect is easily selected or the victory effect is difficult to be selected in relation to the number of executions of the victory effect. Moreover, it is good also as a structure where the probability that a victory effect is selected becomes high, so that the value of a privilege point counter is large, and it may be the structure which becomes low. In this case, it becomes possible to closely associate the privilege point and the victory effect. Further, the probability that the victory effect is selected may be higher as the remaining set number of times in the normal AT state is larger, or may be lower. In this case, it is possible to closely associate the remaining set count and the victory effect.

  (22) If the number of remaining normal AT states is 1 or more and the number of times that the normal AT state has reached a predetermined number of executions (for example, 20 times), the AT continuous lottery process (step S2309) is performed. Thus, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning the AT continuation is high (for example, the highest probability is obtained). In this case, the remaining number of sets in the normal AT state and the probability of winning the AT continuation in the AT continuation lottery process are more closely related.

  (23) Probability of winning an AT continuation in the AT continuous lottery process (step S2309) according to the number of times that the victory effect has been executed or the number of times the remaining AT is set to 1 or more due to the normal AT state. It is good also as a structure which becomes high in steps. For example, when the number of times reaches the first reference number (for example, 3 times), the probability of winning the AT continuation increases by one step, and when the number of times reaches the second reference number (for example, 5 times), the AT continues. The probability set in relation to the reference number may be different so that the probability of winning is further increased by two levels.

  (24) The stock notification unit 68 is configured to perform notification according to the number of remaining set times in the normal AT state, but instead, notification corresponding to the remaining set number of normal AT states on a one-to-one basis. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of remaining sets is notified as it is.

  (25) Even if the number of remaining sets is 1 or more, or even if the AT continuous lottery process is won, the non-AT state is temporarily set when one execution time of the normal AT state is completed. A configuration may be adopted in which a new execution time in the normal AT state occurs again after the transition.

  (26) When the resurrection lottery process is executed in the final chance state, the privilege points may not be referred to. In this case, in the resurrection lottery process, a lottery according to the lottery process result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) of the game is performed. In this configuration, when the final chance state is a resurgence win, the bonus points may not be transferred to the normal AT state of the extended resort as in the above embodiment, or may be transferred.

  (27) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which bonus points less than the bonus standard value are referred to in the resurrection lottery process (step S2907) in the last chance state, the AT continuous lottery process (step S2309) is less than the bonus standard value. It is good also as a structure with which the probability that it will be AT continuous winning becomes high, so that a privilege point is referred and the said privilege point is large. In this case, when the AT continuation lottery process is performed, the bonus point counter may be cleared to “0”, and “0” is cleared and the normal AT state of the extended resort destination is taken over. A configuration may be used.

  (28) In the final chance state, in response to the result of the lottery process for the game (FIG. 12), instead of the configuration in which the probability of being revived in the revival lottery process (step S2907) varies, It is good also as a structure from which the probability of becoming fluctuate | varies. In this case, as a role for changing the probability of winning the revival, a prize is awarded according to the operation order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R or the rotation position of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It may be configured to include a combination that does not occur, or may not be included.

  (29) The final chance state is configured to continue over a plurality of games (for example, 10 games), and the number of times a predetermined role such as the first watermelon role or the second watermelon role is won or won in the final chance state. Accordingly, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of winning the revival in the revival lottery process (step S2907) varies. For example, the first winning probability is set when the predetermined winning combination is won once or twice, and the second winning probability is higher than the first winning probability when winning three or four times. Can be considered. In this case, the player pays attention to the number of times a predetermined combination is won in the final chance state, and the interest of the game is improved.

  (30) The final chance state is configured to continue over a plurality of games (for example, 10 games), and points are added according to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) or the winning result in the final chance state. The normal AT state may be continued according to the accumulated points. In this case, the bonus points may be added even in the final chance state, and the normal AT state may be continued when the bonus points are equal to or higher than the bonus reference value in the final chance state.

  (31) The final chance state is configured to continue over a plurality of games (for example, 10 games), and the normal AT state is in accordance with the number of winning of a predetermined role or the number of winning of a predetermined role in the final chance state. It is good also as composition to do. In this case, the probability that the normal AT state is continuously increased as the number of times of execution of the monitoring event increases among the number of times of winning for the predetermined role and the number of winning of the predetermined role may be increased. It is good also as a structure where a normal AT state continues in the case of times or maximum times. The predetermined role is preferably a role that does not cause so-called spillage in order for the player to clearly recognize whether or not a monitoring event has occurred. For example, a normal replay role may be mentioned. .

  (32) In the transition chance state, the transition lottery process (step S1609) is executed when the normal replay combination is won. However, when the other combination is won, the transfer lottery process (step S1609) is executed. A configuration may be used. For example, the transition lottery process (step S1609) may be executed when the first bell combination or the second bell combination, which is a combination that does not generate a prize depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, is won. Transition lottery processing (step S1609) when winning the first watermelon combination or the second watermelon combination that does not generate a winning combination depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R ) May be executed. In addition, even if any winning combination is won, the transition lottery process (step S1609) may be executed. In this case, the probability that the winning transition may vary depending on the winning combination. Good.

  (33) In the transition chance state, instead of the configuration in which the transition lottery process (step S1609) is executed when the normal replay combination is won, the transition lottery process (step S1609) is performed when the normal replay winning is generated. It is good also as a structure to be.

  (34) In the transition chance state, when the winning degree winning combination is won, the transition probability UP lottery process (step S1603) is executed and the transition probability UP is won, and the transition lottery process (step S1609) is won. Although the configuration is such that the probability is high, the present invention is not limited to this, and when winning a role of expectation improvement, the probability of winning the transition may be set high in the transition lottery process (step S1609). It is good also as a structure which generate | occur | produces reliably.

  (35) In the transition chance state, if the winning degree winning combination is elected, the number of continued games in the transition chance state is surely extended. When the winning lottery process is executed, the number of continued games may be extended. Also, a plurality of types of continuous games may be set, and the number of continuous games to be extended may be selected from them.

  (36) When the expectation-improving role is won in the transition chance state, the bonus point adding process to the privilege point counter may be executed. In this case, the benefit point may be transferred to the normal AT state on the condition that the transition to the normal AT state occurs in the transition chance state, and the transition to the normal AT state occurs in the transition chance state. It is good also as a structure by which a privilege point is succeeded to the next normal AT state irrespective of whether it did.

  (37) In the above embodiment, although a penalty event has occurred and the non-AT state has not occurred, the bell winning is generated three times and the AT1 signal is turned ON. When the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time in the game won in the 3 special replay role, the start wait time is set in the game. In this case, since the image indicating that the bonus AT state is started in the start wait time is displayed on the image display device 66, the transition condition to the bonus AT state in the penalty situation is satisfied. The image display device 66 may be configured to display an image that allows the player to recognize that a penalty is given and no profit is given. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the warning image with respect to penalty operation is displayed.

  (38) In the bonus AT state, when the first to third special replay roles are won in the lottery process (FIG. 12) or when the result is a losing result, in the bonus AT state, the start wait time is not set. It may be configured that a shorter start wait time is set than in the case where the first to third special replay combination is won in the lottery process (FIG. 12) in the absence of the situation, or when the result is a losing result.

  (39) A configuration in which not only the start wait time is set but also the freeze time is not set when the first special replay combination is won in the lottery process (FIG. 12) in the bonus AT state or when the result is a losing result. It is good. This makes it possible to increase the game digestion speed during the bonus AT state.

  (40) In the bonus AT state, in place of the configuration in which the remaining number of sets in the bonus AT state is added in response to winning of the first to third special replay roles or a result of losing, The number of continuous games may be extended.

  (41) In the added state, the push order selected by the main MPU 72 is not notified when the normal replay is won. Instead, the push order may be notified even in the added state. As a result, there is an opportunity for the AT1 signal to be set OFF and ON even when the normal AT state shifts to the added state in the AT state before branching immediately after the consecutive AT state.

  (42) When the normal AT state is linked, the combination in which the pressing order is selected by the main MPU 72 to perform the OFF setting and the ON setting of the AT1 signal is not limited to the normal replay combination. It may be a role. Moreover, it is good also as a structure for which several combinations including a normal replay combination are object. However, it is necessary that the combination to be selected in the push order is a combination different from the combination in which the occurrence frequency of winning is improved by notifying the stop order in the normal AT state and the bonus AT state. In addition, it is preferable that the winning combination to be selected in the pushing order is a winning combination in which a winning is generated regardless of the pushing order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when the winning is made, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated. It is preferable that a winning occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the position.

  (43) In the push order lottery process (step S405) when the normal replay combination is won, the first stopped reel and the second stopped reel are selected from the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, only the first stopped reel may be selected. Even in this case, the configuration in which the left reel 32L is not selected as the first stop makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the correct push order will occur by chance.

  (44) When the normal replay winning combination is won, the push order selected by the main MPU 72 is transferred to the normal AT state in addition to or instead of the configuration in the case where the normal AT state is linked. It is good also as a structure performed when it does. In this case, the main MPU 72 sets the AT1 signal to the ON state when the AT1 signal is OFF in the situation where the AT1 signal is in the OFF state, and the AT1 signal is set to the ON state when the correct answer is reached. There is no need to set the signal to the ON state. In addition, in the situation where the AT1 signal is in the OFF state, the total number of times when the correct answer is pushed in the normal replay winning combination and the number of times that the Bell winning is generated becomes the reference number for the ON state setting. In this case, the AT1 signal may be set to the ON state. In this case, when shifting to the normal AT state, the timing for setting the AT1 signal to the ON state can be advanced.

  (45) Even if it is not necessary to set the OFF / ON state of the AT1 signal, it is selected by the main MPU 72 until the value of the push order correct answer counter provided in the sub RAM 84 becomes 1 or more. Instead of the configuration in which the notification of the push order different from the push order is not executed, the configuration in which the notification of the different push order is always performed in a situation where it is not necessary to set the OFF / ON state of the AT1 signal. In this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the setting of the OFF / ON state occurs accidentally.

  (46) When the normal AT state shifts to the bonus AT state, the output state of the AT1 signal is changed from the ON state to the OFF state. Instead, the output state of the AT1 signal is the ON state. It is good also as a structure maintained by these. As a result, it is possible to make the hall computer HC of the gaming hall recognize the set number of times of the normal AT state.

  (47) A configuration in which the AT2 signal is temporarily set to the OFF state when one execution time of the bonus AT state is completed even if the number of remaining set times of the bonus AT state is 1 or more as in the above embodiment. There is a setting difference between the remaining set number selected when the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state is satisfied and the remaining set number selected when the additional condition for the remaining set number is satisfied during the bonus AT state. It is good also as composition which has. In this case, the player can predict the set value of the slot machine 10 by checking the third display unit DC3 of the data counter DC.

  (48) One execution time of the bonus AT state is completed within the range of the number of remaining sets selected at a time when the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state or the condition for adding the remaining set number of bonus AT states is satisfied ( Even if 30 games are finished), the AT2 signal may not be set to the OFF state. In this case, the third display portion DC3 of the data counter DC displays the total number of times that the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state and the additional condition for the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state are satisfied. The said structure WHEREIN: It is good also as a structure in which the setting difference exists in the said transfer conditions and addition conditions. In this case, the player can predict the set value of the slot machine 10 by checking the third display unit DC3 of the data counter DC.

  (49) A configuration in which the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state when an event that does not cause a bell winning at the time of winning the first bell combination or the second bell combination has occurred for the number of times determined as the OFF side. . In this case, the number of occurrences of bell winnings (number of times of ON side) necessary for setting the AT1 signal to the ON state may be larger than the number of times of the OFF side. The number of times may be the same, and the number of times on the OFF side may be greater than the number of times on the ON side.

  (50) By allowing the internal state notification unit 63 to display a plurality of types of emission colors, various internal states may be notified using the internal state notification unit 63. For example, the bonus AT state generated under the penalty situation may be notified separately from the CB internal rear state. In addition, when a winning state is established, there are a BB (Big Bonus) role and an RB (Regular Bonus) role in addition to the CB role as roles that are maintained in the winning state until a winning is generated. The CB internal rear state, the BB internal rear state, and the RB internal rear state may be notified by the emission color in the internal state notification unit 63.

  (51) Instead of the configuration in which the internal state notification unit 63 is provided in an aggregated manner with the acquired number display unit 62, the internal state notification unit 63 may be provided in a consolidated manner with the credit display unit 61. The internal state notification unit 63 may be provided separately from the acquired number display unit 62.

  (52) When the CB internal rear state is reached, the timing at which the internal state notification unit 63 is turned on is not limited to before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started. The lighting may be started after the rotation of 32L, 32M, and 32R is started and before the stop operation of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is validated, and the stop is finally performed among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The lighting may be started before the reel can be stopped.

  (53) If a CB winning occurs when shifting to the bonus AT state, the transition to the bonus AT state may be invalidated.

  (54) When shifting to the bonus AT state, or when a CB winning occurs when the bonus AT state is being executed, the number of games digested in the CB in-progress state is counted from the number of continuing games in the bonus AT state. Although subtracted, the number of games that have been digested after the end of the CB in-progress state until the CB internal post-state is reached may not be subtracted from the number of continued games.

  (55) When the first to third special replay roles are won and the wait time is set, the wait time is set at the start of the next game of the winning game. It may be configured to be set at the end of the winning game.

  (56) The setting of the AT1 signal to the ON state and the setting of the AT2 signal to the ON state may be performed at the start of the next game of the game in which the setting condition for the ON state is satisfied. . The setting of the AT1 signal to the OFF state and the setting of the AT2 signal to the OFF state may be performed at the end of the game when the setting condition for the OFF state is satisfied.

  (57) A configuration may be used in which the probability of winning the AT continuation is notified in the AT continuous lottery process (step S2309), or an effect that allows the probability to be predicted may be executed.

  (58) In the above-described embodiment, a privilege for paying out medals is awarded when a small role winning is established, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a configuration in which some privilege is granted to a player is provided. I just need it. For example, a configuration in which prizes other than medals are paid out when a small winning combination is established. Further, in a slot machine that does not have an actual medal insertion or medal payout function and manages credits owned by a player, an increase in credited medals corresponds to provision of a privilege.

  (59) The present invention may be applied to a so-called A type slot machine, and B type, C type, A type and C type composite type, B type and C type composite type, RT game and CT. The present invention may be applied to any slot machine such as a type equipped with a game.

  (60) The symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, and characters, but may be geometric lines or figures. In addition, the design can be configured by light, color, or the like, the design can be configured by a three-dimensional shape or the like, and the design can be configured by combining these. That is, it is sufficient that the symbol has a function as information having distinguishability.

  (61) In each of the embodiments described above, an example in which the slot machine 10 is embodied has been shown. However, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine, or may be applied to a gaming machine of a type in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are integrated. Also good.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses and the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses and the like.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. When the first privilege numerical value condition is satisfied (the bonus point is selected in the privilege point lottery process), the privilege numerical value information (privilege point) corresponding to a value smaller than the privilege standard numerical value is stored in the privilege storage means (sub-side RAM 84). First storage execution means (function for executing the processing of step S2005, step S2007, step S2011 and step S2504 in the sub-side MPU 82) to be stored in the privilege point counter);
When the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means is information corresponding to a value greater than or equal to the privilege reference value, the predetermined privilege granting means (in the sub-side MPU 82) that gives a predetermined benefit advantageous to the player A function of making an affirmative determination in step S2301 and executing the subsequent process, and a function of performing an affirmative determination in step S2609 and executing the subsequent process in the sub-side MPU 82),
Information corresponding to the privilege standard numerical value xn (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1) when the second privilege numerical value condition is satisfied (the bonus AT state is started, and the bonus lottery process is added to win). Second storage execution means (function to execute the processing of step S1904, step S2405, step S2804, step S2810 and step S2904 in the sub-side MPU 82) to be stored in the privilege storage means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, with respect to the grant of the predetermined privilege, the predetermined privilege is granted based on the fact that the privilege numerical information stored with the establishment of the first privilege numerical condition is accumulated to become information equal to or higher than the privilege reference value. There are cases where the predetermined privilege is granted based on the fact that the second privilege numerical condition is established. Thereby, the provision aspect of a predetermined privilege is diversified and the interest improvement of a game is aimed at.

  In this case, when the second privilege numerical value condition is satisfied, the number of times of granting the predetermined privilege is not stored, but information corresponding to the privilege reference numerical value × n is stored in the privilege storage means. Thereby, in the structure which aimed at diversification of the provision aspect of a predetermined privilege as mentioned above, it becomes possible to use a privilege memory | storage means in common. Therefore, it is possible to consolidate storage means to be referred to when determining whether or not to give a predetermined privilege, and the processing load at the time of the determination can be reduced. In addition, the required storage capacity can be reduced. As described above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game suitably.

  Feature A2. It is provided with privilege numerical value lottery means (function which performs processing of Step S2002 in sub MPU82) which determines privilege numerical value information made into a candidate for storage by the 1st storage execution means by privilege numerical value lottery processing. A gaming machine according to Feature A1.

  According to the feature A2, it is possible to diversify the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means when the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied, and the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied and the privilege numerical information is accumulated. Thus, diversification can be achieved when a predetermined privilege is granted.

  In addition, as a more specific configuration of the feature A2, “a plurality of types of privilege numerical information selected in the privilege numerical value lottery process exists, and the privilege numerical information is information having a value smaller than the privilege standard numerical value. The configuration of “is”.

  Feature A3. When the predetermined privilege is granted by the predetermined privilege granting means, the grant storage means is updated so that the bonus reference numerical value is subtracted (processing in steps S2302 and S2604 in the sub-side MPU 82) The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, further comprising:

  According to the feature A3, in the configuration in which the privilege storage unit is used in common in both the case where the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied and the case where the second privilege numerical condition is satisfied, the privilege when the predetermined privilege is given It becomes possible to standardize the handling of numerical information. Thereby, the processing load can be reduced.

  Feature A4. A numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means is a numerical value larger than the privilege standard numerical value × (n−1) and smaller than the privilege standard numerical value × n (n is an integer of 1 or more). In a situation, a privilege numerical value notification means for notifying information corresponding to a numerical value exceeding the privilege standard numerical value × (n−1) (a function for executing the process of step S2204 in the privilege point notification unit 67 and the sub-side MPU 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, comprising:

  According to the feature A4, it becomes possible for the player to recognize an amount less than the provision of the predetermined privilege as the privilege numerical information, and how much privilege numerical information is necessary in a situation where the first privilege numerical condition can be satisfied. It becomes possible to play a game while clearly recognizing whether or not. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve a player's expectation suitably.

Feature A5. A division execution unit (a function for executing the process of step S2201 in the sub-side MPU 82) that divides a numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage unit by the privilege reference numerical value;
The gaming machine according to claim A4, wherein the privilege value notifying means notifies information corresponding to a remainder value of a division result by the division executing means.

  According to the feature A5, in a configuration in which the privilege storage unit is used in common in both cases where the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied and the second privilege numerical condition is satisfied, the provision of a predetermined privilege as privilege numerical information It is possible to derive numerical values for less than 1 with a simple processing configuration.

  Feature A6. The numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means is a numerical value that is not less than the privilege standard numerical value × n and smaller than the privilege standard numerical value × (n + 1) (n is an integer of 1 or more). Any one of features A1 to A5, further comprising a privilege number notifying means for notifying information corresponding to the n (a function for executing the processing of step S2203 in the stock notification unit 68 and the sub-side MPU 82). The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature A6, it becomes possible for the player to recognize the number of times the predetermined privilege is given, and it is possible to suitably improve the player's sense of superiority.

Feature A7. A division execution unit (a function for executing the process of step S2201 in the sub-side MPU 82) that divides a numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage unit by the privilege reference numerical value;
The gaming machine according to Feature A6, wherein the privilege number notifying means notifies information corresponding to a numerical value of a quotient of a division result by the division executing means.

  According to the feature A7, in the configuration in which the privilege storage unit is used in common in both the case where the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied and the case where the second privilege numerical condition is satisfied, the number of times the predetermined privilege is given is simplified. It can be derived by the processing configuration.

Feature A8. The first privilege numerical condition is established in a gaming state (normal AT state) corresponding to the first privilege,
As a result of the storage processing of the privilege numerical information to the privilege storage means being executed by the first storage execution means in the gaming state corresponding to the first privilege, the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means is the privilege When the information is equal to or greater than the reference numerical value, means (steps S2104 to S2107 in the sub-side MPU 82 are executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, which includes a function and a function of executing the processing of steps S2611 to S2614 in the sub-side MPU 82).

  According to the feature A8, there are a gaming state in which the first privilege numerical condition can be established and a gaming state in which the second privilege numerical condition can be established, thereby diversifying the gaming state. In addition, since the game value corresponding to the first privilege changes to the game state corresponding to the second privilege when the privilege numerical value information is equal to or greater than the privilege reference value, both game states can be closely related to each other.

Feature A9. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The pattern display means is configured to start variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the start operation means and stop variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
With
At least one of the first privilege numerical condition and the second privilege numerical condition is a result of a lottery process executed when the start operation means is operated or a winning after the variable display of the pattern is stopped The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, which is established according to a result.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature A9, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature A10. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of a picture in the plurality of variable display sections based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern in the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
The gaming machine is
A role lottery execution means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a role lottery process when the start operation means is operated;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a winning correspondence granting means for giving a prize corresponding bonus to the player based on the fact that the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process is displayed (winning determination in the main MPU 72) Processing function), and
With
As combinations selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding combination (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enables winning when the plurality of variable display sections are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The feature A9 according to Feature A9, wherein the predetermined privilege is to enable a game to be executed in a game state (normal AT state) in which the predetermined order is notified when the order correspondence role is achieved. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature A10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. When the privilege numerical condition is satisfied (the privilege point lottery process is to be awarded a privilege point), the memory execution unit (sub privilege point counter) of the privilege numerical value information (privilege point) is stored in the privilege storage unit (the privilege point counter of the sub RAM 84). The function of executing the processing of step S2005, step S2007, step S2011, and step S2504 in the side MPU 82);
When the determination is triggered, the privilege standard determination unit (step S2301 in the sub-side MPU 82) determines whether or not the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage unit is information corresponding to a value greater than or equal to the privilege reference value. And the function of executing the process of step S2609),
Predetermined privilege granting means (a step in the sub-side MPU 82) that gives a predetermined privilege advantageous to the player when it is determined by the privilege standard determining means that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege standard value A function of making an affirmative determination in S2301 and executing the subsequent processing, and a function of performing an affirmative determination in Step S2609 and executing the subsequent processing in the sub-side MPU 82),
With
The gaming machine, wherein the privilege numerical information of the privilege storage means corresponding to a value less than the privilege reference value can be taken over even after the determination trigger.

  According to the feature B1, the bonus value information stored when the bonus numerical value condition is satisfied becomes information corresponding to a value equal to or higher than the bonus reference numerical value, so that a predetermined bonus is given to the player. The game is played while expecting that it will be established, and the expectation numerical value information is information corresponding to a value greater than or equal to the benefit reference value. Thereby, the interest improvement of a game is aimed at.

  In this case, privilege numerical value information corresponding to a value less than the privilege reference numerical value can be taken over even after the determination trigger. As a result, there are many opportunities for the bonus numerical information to become information corresponding to values greater than or equal to the bonus standard numerical value, and an opportunity to have an expectation whether or not the privilege numerical information can be information corresponding to values greater than or equal to the bonus standard numerical value. Many can be generated. As described above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game suitably.

  In addition, as a privilege numerical value condition, in the structure provided with the privilege numerical value lottery means (function which performs the privilege point lottery processing in sub side RAM84) which performs a privilege numerical value lottery process, it wins by the said privilege numerical value lottery process. Condition ”. Moreover, it is good also as a structure "The privilege numerical value information determined by the said privilege numerical value lottery process is memorize | stored in a privilege memory | storage means."

  Feature B2. The storage execution unit stores privilege numerical information corresponding to a value smaller than the privilege reference numerical value in the privilege storage unit when the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B2, the bonus numerical value information corresponding to the privilege standard numerical value or more can be obtained by accumulating the bonus numerical value information acquired when the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied. Thereby, in order to obtain privilege numerical information corresponding to the privilege standard numerical value or more, it is necessary to establish the privilege numerical condition a plurality of times, and it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation step by step.

Feature B3. The privilege numerical condition is a configuration that is established in a gaming state corresponding to a privilege (normal AT state),
It is a configuration in which one execution time of the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is ended after the determination trigger,
B1 or B2 characterized in that the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means in the gaming state corresponding to the privilege for a predetermined execution time can be taken over to the gaming state corresponding to the privilege in the next execution time The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature B3, the privilege numerical value information acquired in one execution time of the privilege-compatible gaming state can be inherited to the privilege-compatible gaming state in the next execution time, and therefore acquired immediately before the end of the privilege-compatible gaming state. Even if it is the privilege numerical information which was made, it is possible to enjoy the profit by it. This makes it possible for the player to expect the bonus numerical value condition to be established at any timing of the gaming state corresponding to the bonus.

Feature B4. When the continuation condition is satisfied, after one execution time of the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is completed, a new execution time of the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is started,
When the continuation condition is established and the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is continued, the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means is handed over to the gaming state corresponding to the privilege after the continuation. A gaming machine according to B3.

  According to the feature B4, in the case where the gaming state corresponding to the privilege continues, the privilege numerical value information is taken over to the gaming state corresponding to the privilege after the continuation, so that the profit when the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is consecutive is increased. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to raise the expectation that the gaming state corresponding to the privilege will be extended.

Feature B5. The gaming state corresponding to the privilege is a gaming state in which a game medium is expected to be given higher than a predetermined gaming state,
The predetermined privilege granting unit determines that the continuation condition is satisfied and determines that the continuation condition is satisfied when the privilege standard determination unit determines that the information corresponds to a value greater than or equal to the privilege standard numerical value. The gaming machine according to Feature B4, wherein after the game is completed, a new execution time of the gaming state corresponding to the benefit is started.

  According to the feature B5, since the bonus numerical information becomes information corresponding to the bonus standard numerical value or more, the gaming state corresponding to the bonus will be linked, so the game is performed while expecting that the bonus numeric condition is satisfied. It will be.

  Feature B6. The feature B5 is characterized in that, as the continuation condition, there is a condition that is different from a condition that the information is determined to be information corresponding to a value greater than or equal to the privilege standard numerical value by the privilege standard determination unit. Gaming machine.

  According to feature B6, even if the bonus numerical information does not become information corresponding to the bonus standard numerical value or more, if another continuation condition is satisfied, the gaming state corresponding to the privilege can be extended, so the gaming state corresponding to the bonus It is possible to give a lot of opportunities to go to. In addition, even if the other continuation conditions are satisfied and the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is consecutive, the privilege numerical information is taken over by the gaming state corresponding to the privilege after the continuation, so that the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is It becomes possible to give a lot of opportunities to go to the resort.

  Feature B7. Even if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means can be taken over by the gaming state corresponding to the privilege generated by a new start opportunity. The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B6.

  According to the feature B7, it is possible to give many opportunities for the privilege numerical value information to be taken over.

  Feature B8. When the continuation condition is not satisfied, the handover lottery means (the process of step S4001 in the sub-side MPU 82) determines whether or not to store the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means by the handover lottery process. The gaming machine according to Feature B7, which includes a function to be executed.

  According to the feature B8, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the privilege numerical information is taken over.

  Feature B9. The case where the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means is information corresponding to a large value is higher than the case where the privilege numerical information is information corresponding to a small value, and has a higher probability of being taken over after the determination trigger. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8.

  According to the feature B9, even when the privilege numerical information corresponding to less than the privilege standard numerical value is used as a trigger, the probability that the numerical value of the privilege numerical information at that time is larger than the case where the numerical value is large is smaller than the case. Since it becomes high, it is more advantageous to set the numerical value of the privilege numerical information as large as possible. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied.

Feature B10. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The pattern display means is configured to start variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the start operation means and stop variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
With
The privilege numerical value condition is satisfied according to a result of a lottery process executed when the start operation means is operated or a winning result after the variable display of the picture is stopped. A gaming machine according to any one of B9.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature B10, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above.

Feature B11. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of a picture in the plurality of variable display sections based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern in the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
The gaming machine is
A role lottery execution means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a role lottery process when the start operation means is operated;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a winning correspondence granting means for giving a prize corresponding bonus to the player based on the fact that the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process is displayed (winning determination in the main MPU 72) Processing function), and
With
As combinations selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding combination (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enables winning when the plurality of variable display sections are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to Feature B10, wherein the predetermined privilege is that a game can be executed in a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the predetermined role is played.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature B11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B11, the features A1 to A10, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Advantageous transition means (step S1614 to step S1617 and step S1706 to step S1706 in the sub-side MPU 82) for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) where the player's advantage is higher than a predetermined gaming state (non-AT state) The function of executing the processing of S1709),
Continuous lottery execution for executing a continuous lottery process for determining whether or not a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is to be started after completion of one execution time of the advantageous gaming state when a continuous lottery trigger is reached Means (function to execute the processing of step S2309 in the sub-side MPU 82);
A predetermined transition means (a function for executing the process of step S2913 in the sub-side MPU 82) for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state after the lapse of the period after the continuation loss,
When a continuation condition is established in the period after continuation losing, advantageous continuation means (a function for executing the pre-branching AT state setting process in the sub-side MPU 82) for starting a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state;
With
The continuous lottery execution means executes the continuous lottery process again when the continuation condition is satisfied and a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started in the middle of the post-continuation losing period. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature C1, not only the advantageous gaming state is continued when the continuous lottery process is made, but also advantageous when the continuation condition is established in the period after the continuation failure when the continuation is lost. The gaming state continues. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode in which the advantageous gaming state is extended, and it is possible to suitably increase the expectation of the player who expects the advantageous gaming state to be extended.

  In addition, even if the continuation lottery process is once out of continuation, if the continuation condition is satisfied in the subsequent continuation outage period and the advantageous gaming state continues, the opportunity for the continuous lottery process to be executed again Is granted. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing at which the extended game in the advantageous game state ends, and it is possible to favorably maintain the player's expectation in the advantageous game state. As described above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game suitably.

  It should be noted that one execution time of the advantageous gaming state may be ended when the end condition is satisfied, and the end condition is that one game is that the variable display of the picture on the picture display means is started and ended. In some cases, a predetermined number of games may be consumed, or a case where an end lottery is made in the end lottery process.

  Further, the period after continuation off may be a period in which a predetermined plurality of games are executed when the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means is started and ended as one game. It is good also as a structure by which the production | presentation which shows that it is a period is performed by the production execution means.

Feature C2. Probability improvement means (function to execute the processing of step S2308 and step S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82) to increase the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process than before,
If the continuation condition is satisfied and a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started in the middle of the period after losing the continuation, the probability improving means until the continuation lottery process is executed again thereafter. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the probability of continuing winning can be increased.

  According to the feature C2, when the continuation condition is established in the continuation off period and the advantageous gaming state is continued, not only is the opportunity to execute the continuation lottery process again, but also the continuation lottery executed again. Probability of continuous winning in processing can be high. This makes it possible to increase the player's profit when the continuation condition is satisfied during the continuation off period.

  Feature C3. The probability improving means is configured to set the probability of the continuous winning when the execution probability of the advantageous gaming state is repeated and the highest probability setting condition is satisfied, to the highest probability, according to the feature C2. Game machines.

  According to the feature C3, the advantageous gaming state is linked to a more advantageous state for the player. Thereby, the profit that the execution opportunity of the continuous lottery process is given again is increased, and it becomes possible to maintain the player's expectation even during the continuous off period.

  Note that there may be a configuration in which there are three or more types of probabilities of continuous winning.

Feature C4. The probability improving means includes
First probability improving means (function of executing the process of step S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82) capable of increasing the probability of the continuous winning when the continuous lottery process is a continuous winning;
Second probability improving means for increasing the probability of winning the continuation on at least one condition that the continuation of a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state occurs even if the continuation lottery process is lost (Function for executing the process of step S2308 in the sub-side MPU 82);
A gaming machine according to Feature C2 or C3, wherein

  According to the feature C4, in both the case where the continuous game is consecutively won in the continuous lottery process and the advantageous game state is consecutive, and the continuous condition is satisfied but the advantageous game state is consecutive in the continuous game. The probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process can be increased. As a result, it is possible to increase the chance that the advantageous gaming state continues.

  Feature C5. The gaming machine according to Feature C4, wherein the second probability improving means has a greater probability of increasing the probability of the continuous winning than the first probability improving means.

  According to the feature C5, it is possible to increase the profit when the continuation condition is satisfied and the advantageous gaming state continues in spite of the continuation loss period.

Feature C6. Comprising specific storage means (privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84) for storing information capable of specifying the remaining number of executions of the advantageous gaming state;
When the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times, a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started without executing the continuous lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein:

  According to the feature C6, when the remaining number of executions is 1 or more, the digestion is prioritized over the continuous lottery process when the advantageous game state is extended. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from being unnecessarily extended as compared with the configuration in which the remaining number of executions is consumed when the continuous lottery process is lost.

  Feature C7. The gaming machine according to Feature C6, wherein the continuation condition is that information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times.

  According to the feature C7, it is possible to cause an event that a consecutive game in the advantageous gaming state occurs after the start of the period after losing continuation while using the information indicating the remaining number of executions.

Feature C8. Storage execution means (steps S2005 and S2007 in the sub-side MPU 82) for storing the bonus numerical value information (privilege points) in the specific storage means when the bonus numerical condition is satisfied (the bonus point is won in the bonus point lottery process). , The function of executing the processing of step S2011 and step S2504),
When it becomes a determination opportunity, privilege standard determination means for determining whether or not the privilege numerical value information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to a value greater than or equal to the privilege reference numerical value (step S2301 in the sub MPU 82) And the function of executing the process of step S2609),
With
A configuration in which a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started without executing the continuous lottery process when the privilege standard determination unit determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege standard numerical value. And
The gaming machine according to Feature C7, wherein the continuation condition is that the privilege numerical information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to a value greater than or equal to the privilege reference numerical value.

  According to the feature C8, even if the privilege numerical information is not information corresponding to a value greater than or equal to the privilege reference numerical value before the determination trigger, the privilege numerical value information becomes a value greater than or equal to the privilege reference numerical value in the period after continuation deviating. The advantageous gaming state will be linked to the corresponding information. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to set the value corresponding to the bonus numerical information to a larger value before the determination trigger, so the bonus numerical information has a larger value before the determination trigger. The game will be performed while expecting the game, and the interest of the game will be improved.

  Feature C9. Any one of the features C1 to C8 is characterized in that when the continuous lottery process is a continuous winning, a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started after a lapse of a later period per continuation. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature C9, it is possible to teach the player that the winning has been continued.

  The after-per-continuation period may be a period during which a predetermined plurality of games are executed when the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means is started and ended as one game. It is good also as a structure by which the production | presentation which shows that it is a period is performed by the production execution means.

Feature C10. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The pattern display means is configured to start variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the start operation means and stop variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
With
The continuation condition is satisfied according to a result of a lottery process executed when the start operation means is operated or a winning result after the variable display of the pattern is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of C9.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature C10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature C11. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of a picture in the plurality of variable display sections based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern in the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
The gaming machine is
A role lottery execution means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a role lottery process when the start operation means is operated;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a winning correspondence granting means for giving a prize corresponding bonus to the player based on the fact that the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process is displayed (winning determination in the main MPU 72) Processing function), and
With
As combinations selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding combination (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enables winning when the plurality of variable display sections are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to C10, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding role is achieved.

  In the gaming machine like the feature C11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C11, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Advantageous transition means (step S1614 to step S1617 and step S1706 to step S1706 in the sub-side MPU 82) for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) where the player's advantage is higher than a predetermined gaming state (non-AT state) The function of executing the processing of S1709),
Continuous lottery execution for executing a continuous lottery process for determining whether or not a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is to be started after completion of one execution time of the advantageous gaming state when a continuous lottery trigger is reached Means (function to execute the processing of step S2309 in the sub-side MPU 82);
Probability improving means for increasing the probability of winning the continuation on the condition that at least one continuation of the new execution times of the advantageous gaming state occurs (function to execute the processing of steps S2308 and S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82) )When,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, since the advantageous gaming state continues when the continuous lottery process is won, the player plays the game while expecting the continuous lottery process in the continuous lottery process. The interest of the game will be improved.

  In this case, when the advantageous gaming state continues, the probability of winning continuously in the continuous lottery process can be improved. As a result, when the advantageous game state is extended to the extended game, the extended game is more likely to occur, and the advantage of the extended game state being extended is increased. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of excitement when the advantageous gaming state continues. As described above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game suitably.

  Feature D2. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the probability improving means increases the probability of the continuous winning, on the condition that at least one condition is a continuous winning in the continuous lottery process.

  According to the feature D2, the probability of continuous winning is increased by continuous winning in the continuous lottery process. This increases the player's attention to whether or not the continuous lottery process is a continuous winning.

Feature D3. The probability improving means includes
Probability lottery execution means (function to execute the process of step S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82) for executing the continuation probability lottery process on at least one condition that the continuation lottery process is won continuously,
Probability setting means (function for executing the process of step S2318 in the sub-side MPU 82) for increasing the probability of the continuous winning according to the result of the probability lottery process;
The gaming machine according to Feature D2, further comprising:

  According to the feature D3, in order to set a high probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process, a continuous winning is set in the continuous lottery process, and a high probability of continuous winning is set in the continuous probability lottery process. Needs to be the result. As a result, the degree of freedom in setting the probability that the probability of continuous winning is set high is increased.

Feature D4. The advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous period (pre-branch AT state) and a second advantageous period (branch AT state) subsequent thereto,
The continuous lottery execution means executes the continuous lottery process when the first advantageous period ends.
The gaming machine produces an advantageous period effect (battle effect) corresponding to whether or not a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is continuously performed in the second advantageous period by the effect execution means (image display device 66). Production control means (function to execute the process of step S1109 in the sub MPU 82) to be executed,
When a specific effect (a victory effect) is executed as the advantageous period effect, there is a possibility that the probability of the continuous winning is increased or the probability of the continuous winning is increased by the probability improving means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the gaming machine is higher than when the performance is executed.

  According to the feature D4, since the advantageous period effect corresponding to whether or not a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is continuously performed in the second advantageous period of the advantageous gaming state is executed, the advantageous gaming state is linked. It is possible to provide the player with a notification as to whether or not the game is in effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, when a specific effect is executed as an advantageous period effect, the probability of a continuous winning is high or the possibility is high. As a result, the player plays a game while expecting a specific performance to occur, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature D5. The production control means includes
Production lottery execution means (function to execute the process of step S2311 in the sub-side MPU 82) that executes the production content lottery process when the continuous lottery process is won.
A specific effect setting means (a function for executing the process of step S2312 in the sub-side MPU 82) that sets the specific effect as an effect executed in the second advantageous period according to the result of the effect content lottery process;
A predetermined effect setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2312 in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting a predetermined effect (drawing effect) as an effect executed in the second advantageous period according to the result of the effect content lottery process;
With
The probability improving means includes
Probability lottery execution means (function to execute the process of step S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82) for executing the continuation probability lottery process when the specific effect is set as the effect executed in the second advantageous period;
Probability setting means (function for executing the process of step S2318 in the sub-side MPU 82) for improving the probability of the continuous winning according to the result of the probability lottery process;
A gaming machine according to Feature D4, comprising:

  According to the feature D5, when the specific effect or the predetermined effect is executed as the advantageous period effect, the consecutive game in the advantageous game state is determined, so that the player expects the specific effect or the predetermined effect to be executed. A game will be performed. In addition, when a specific effect is executed among these specific effects and the predetermined effect, there is a possibility that the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process is high, so the player further executes the specific effect. A game is played while expecting that. Thereby, it becomes possible to make a player's expectation multistage, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Feature D6. The probability improving means sets the probability of the continuous winning when the number of executions of the specific effect is a predetermined number of executions to a maximum probability, as described in the feature D4 or D5 Game machines.

  According to feature D6, since the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process is the highest probability when the number of executions of the specific effect is the predetermined number of times, the player's expectation that the specific effect will be executed Can be increased.

  Note that there may be a configuration in which there are three or more types of probabilities of continuous winning.

Feature D7. Comprising specific storage means (privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84) for storing information capable of specifying the remaining number of executions of the advantageous gaming state;
When the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times, a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started without executing the continuous lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein:

  According to the feature D7, when the remaining number of executions is 1 or more, the digestion is prioritized over the continuous lottery process when the advantageous game state is extended. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from being unnecessarily extended as compared with the configuration in which the remaining number of executions is consumed when the continuous lottery process is lost.

  Feature D8. The probability improvement means, when the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to the remaining number of executions of 1 or more, when the new execution times of the advantageous gaming state is started, The game machine according to Feature D7, wherein no setting is made to increase the probability of

  According to the feature D8, it is possible to prevent the chances of setting a high probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process from being increased more than necessary.

Feature D9. Storage execution means (steps S2005 and S2007 in the sub-side MPU 82) for storing the bonus numerical value information (privilege points) in the specific storage means when the bonus numerical condition is satisfied (the bonus point is won in the bonus point lottery process). , The function of executing the processing of step S2011 and step S2504),
When it becomes a determination opportunity, privilege standard determination means for determining whether or not the privilege numerical value information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to a value greater than or equal to the privilege reference numerical value (step S2301 in the sub MPU 82) And the function of executing the process of step S2609),
With
A configuration in which a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started without executing the continuous lottery process when the privilege standard determination unit determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege standard numerical value. And
Even if it is a case where continuation is lost in the continuous lottery process, the privilege numerical value information stored in the specific storage means in a subsequent post-continuation period is information corresponding to a value greater than the privilege reference value. In the feature D7 or D8, there is provided an advantageous continuation means (a function for executing the setting process of the pre-branching AT state in the sub-side MPU 82) for starting a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state when The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature D9, even if the privilege numerical information is not information corresponding to a value greater than or equal to the privilege reference numerical value before the determination trigger, the privilege numerical value information becomes a value greater than or equal to the privilege reference numerical value in the period after the continuation. The advantageous gaming state will be linked to the corresponding information. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to set the value corresponding to the bonus numerical information to a larger value before the determination trigger, so the bonus numerical information has a larger value before the determination trigger. The game will be performed while expecting the game, and the interest of the game will be improved.

Feature D10. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The pattern display means is configured to start variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the start operation means and stop variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
With
The game according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein in the advantageous gaming state, a game in which the variable display of the design is stopped after the variable display of the design is started is executed a plurality of times. Machine.

  In the gaming machine like the feature D10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

Feature D11. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of a picture in the plurality of variable display sections based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern in the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
The gaming machine is
A role lottery execution means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a role lottery process when the start operation means is operated;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a winning correspondence granting means for giving a prize corresponding bonus to the player based on the fact that the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process is displayed (winning determination in the main MPU 72) Processing function), and
With
As combinations selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding combination (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enables winning when the plurality of variable display sections are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to Feature D10, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding role is achieved.

  In the gaming machine like the feature D11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D11, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Advantageous transition means (step S1614 to step S1617 and step S1706 to step S1706 in the sub-side MPU 82) for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) where the player's advantage is higher than a predetermined gaming state (non-AT state) The function of executing the processing of S1709),
Continuous lottery execution for executing a continuous lottery process for determining whether or not a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is to be started after completion of one execution time of the advantageous gaming state when a continuous lottery trigger is reached Means (function to execute the processing of step S2309 in the sub-side MPU 82);
Specific storage means (privilege point counter in the sub-side RAM 84) for storing information capable of specifying the remaining number of executions of the advantageous gaming state;
If the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to the remaining number of executions of 1 or more, or if the continuous lottery process is a continuous winning, a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state starts Advantageous continuation means (function to execute pre-branching AT state setting process in sub-side MPU 82),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, not only the advantageous game state continues when the continuous lottery process is won, but also the information stored in the specific storage means corresponds to the number of remaining executions of 1 or more. Even in the case of the information, the advantageous gaming state continues. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode in which the advantageous gaming state is extended, and it is possible to suitably increase the expectation of the player who expects the advantageous gaming state to be extended. As described above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game suitably.

  Feature E2. Probability improving means for increasing the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process when the execution times of the advantageous gaming state are repeated and the probability improving condition is satisfied (the processing of steps S2308 and S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82 is executed) The gaming machine according to feature E1, further comprising:

  According to the feature E2, it is possible to improve the probability of winning continuously in the continuous lottery process when the advantageous gaming state continues. In other words, the more the number of remaining executions is set and the more advantageous gaming state is, the higher the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process. As a result, when the advantageous game state is extended to the extended game, the extended game is more likely to occur, and the advantage of the extended game state being extended is increased. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of excitement when the advantageous gaming state continues. In addition, it becomes possible to closely relate the consecutive game in the advantageous gaming state related to the remaining number of executions and the continuous winning probability of the continuous lottery process, and synergizes the effect of setting the two consecutive game modes. It becomes possible to do.

Feature E3. The advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous period (pre-branch AT state) and a second advantageous period (branch AT state) subsequent thereto,
The advantageous continuation means determines whether or not the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution counts or the continuous lottery process when the first advantageous period ends. To determine whether or not it has been won continuously,
The gaming machine produces an advantageous period effect (battle effect) corresponding to whether or not a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is continuously performed in the second advantageous period by the effect execution means (image display device 66). Production control means (function to execute the process of step S1109 in the sub MPU 82) to be executed,
The production control means is
Effect lottery execution means (function to execute the process of step S2311 in the sub-side MPU 82) for executing the effect content lottery process when a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is continuously performed;
A specific effect setting means (a function for executing the process of step S2312 in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting a specific effect (a victory effect) as an effect to be executed in the second advantageous period according to the result of the effect content lottery process;
A predetermined effect setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2312 in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting a predetermined effect (drawing effect) as an effect executed in the second advantageous period according to the result of the effect content lottery process;
With
When the number of times that the specific effect has been executed reaches a predetermined number of times, the gaming machine increases the probability that the winning will be continued in the continuous lottery process (the processing in step S2308 in the sub-side MPU 82). The gaming machine according to the feature E1 or E2, further comprising a function to be executed).

  According to the characteristic E3, since the advantageous period effect corresponding to whether or not a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is continuously performed in the second advantageous period of the advantageous gaming state is executed, the advantageous gaming state is linked. It is possible to provide the player with a notification as to whether or not the game is in effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, when a specific effect or a predetermined effect is executed as the advantageous period effect, the consecutive game in the advantageous game state is fixed, so that the player plays a game while expecting the specific effect or the predetermined effect to be executed. It becomes. In addition, since the number of executions of the specific effect becomes the predetermined number of executions, the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process is increased, so it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the specific effect will be executed. Become.

  In addition, since the specific performance is executed even when the advantageous game state is continued because the remaining number of executions is 1 or more, the number of execution times of the specific effect is predetermined execution as the remaining number of executions is set higher. The expectation that becomes the number of times is raised. Therefore, when a large number is set as the remaining number of executions, not only the benefit that the number of consecutive games in the advantageous gaming state increases, but also the benefit that the possibility that the continuous winning probability is improved will be given, The advantage of setting a large number of remaining executions is increased.

  Feature E4. The game according to Feature E3, further comprising execution number notifying means (a function for executing the process of step S2205 in the sub MPU 82) for notifying the number of times the specific effect has been executed. Machine.

  According to the feature E4, it is possible to suitably increase the expectation that the number of executions of the specific effect will be the predetermined number of executions.

  Feature E5. The gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E4, wherein the probability improving means sets the probability of the continuous winning to the highest probability.

  According to the feature E5, the advantage that the advantageous game state is extended is increased.

  Feature E6. Any of the features E1 to E5, further comprising: a remaining number correspondence notifying unit (a function for executing the processing of step S2203 in the sub-side MPU 82) for notifying information corresponding to the remaining number of executions. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature E6, it is possible to recognize at least how long the advantageous gaming state continues through the remaining number correspondence notifying means, and it is possible to enhance the player's sense of superiority.

  In particular, in the case of having the configuration of the feature E3, the player himself / herself has an expectation that the number of executions of the specific effect will be the predetermined number of executions in relation to the remaining number of executions grasped by the remaining number correspondence notifying unit. It becomes possible to recognize. As a result, it is possible to closely relate the advantageous game state related games related to the remaining number of executions and the continuous winning probability of the continuous lottery process, and synergistically the effect of setting the two consecutive game modes. It becomes possible.

  Feature E7. If the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to the remaining number of executions of 1 or more, the advantageous continuation means can execute a new execution number of the advantageous gaming state without executing the continuous lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the game is started.

  According to the feature E7, when the remaining number of executions is 1 or more, the digestion is prioritized over the continuous lottery process when the advantageous game state is extended. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from being unnecessarily extended as compared with the configuration in which the remaining number of executions is consumed when the continuous lottery process is lost.

Feature E8. Storage execution means (steps S2005 and S2007 in the sub-side MPU 82) for storing the bonus numerical value information (privilege points) in the specific storage means when the bonus numerical condition is satisfied (the bonus point is won in the bonus point lottery process). , The function of executing the processing of step S2011 and step S2504),
When it becomes a determination opportunity, privilege standard determination means for determining whether or not the privilege numerical value information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to a value greater than or equal to the privilege reference numerical value (step S2301 in the sub MPU 82) And the function of executing the process of step S2609),
With
The advantageous continuation means is a new execution of the advantageous gaming state without executing the continuous lottery process when the privilege standard determination means determines that the information corresponds to a value greater than or equal to the privilege reference value. The bonus numerical value information stored in the specific storage means in the subsequent post-continuation losing period, even if the continuation losing is continued in the continuous lottery process The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized in that when the information corresponding to a value greater than or equal to the privilege reference value is reached, a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started. .

  According to the feature E8, even if the privilege numerical information is not information corresponding to a value greater than or equal to the privilege reference numerical value before the determination trigger, the privilege numerical value information becomes a value equal to or higher than the privilege reference numerical value in the period after continuation deviating. The advantageous gaming state will be linked to the corresponding information. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to set the value corresponding to the bonus numerical information to a larger value before the determination trigger, so the bonus numerical information has a larger value before the determination trigger. The game will be performed while expecting the game, and the interest of the game will be improved.

Feature E9. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The pattern display means is configured to start variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the start operation means and stop variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
With
The game according to any one of features E1 to E8, wherein in the advantageous gaming state, a game in which the variable display of the design is stopped after the variable display of the design is started is executed a plurality of times. Machine.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature E9, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above.

Feature E10. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of a picture in the plurality of variable display sections based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern in the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
The gaming machine is
A role lottery execution means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a role lottery process when the start operation means is operated;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a winning correspondence granting means for giving a prize corresponding bonus to the player based on the fact that the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process is displayed (winning determination in the main MPU 72) Processing function), and
With
As combinations selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding combination (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enables winning when the plurality of variable display sections are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to Feature E9, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding role is achieved.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature E10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. When the privilege numerical condition is satisfied (the privilege point lottery process is to be awarded a privilege point), the memory execution unit (sub privilege point counter) of the privilege numerical value information (privilege point) is stored in the privilege storage unit (the privilege point counter of the sub RAM 84). The function of executing the processing of step S2005, step S2007, step S2011, and step S2504 in the side MPU 82);
When the determination is triggered, the privilege standard determination unit (step S2301 in the sub-side MPU 82) determines whether or not the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage unit is information corresponding to a value greater than or equal to the privilege reference value. And the function of executing the process of step S2609),
Predetermined privilege granting means (a step in the sub-side MPU 82) that gives a predetermined privilege advantageous to the player when it is determined by the privilege standard determining means that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege standard value A function of making an affirmative determination in S2301 and executing the subsequent processing, and a function of performing an affirmative determination in Step S2609 and executing the subsequent processing in the sub-side MPU 82),
Grant lottery execution means (sub-side) that executes a grant lottery process for determining whether or not to grant the predetermined privilege when the privilege standard determination means does not determine that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference value. A function of executing the process of step S2907 in the MPU 82);
With
The grant lottery execution means executes the grant lottery process so that the probability of winning in the grant lottery process differs according to the privilege numerical information of the privilege storage means. Machine.

  According to the feature F1, since the privilege numerical information stored when the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied becomes information corresponding to a value greater than or equal to the privilege reference numerical value, a predetermined privilege is given to the player. The game is played while expecting that it will be established, and the expectation numerical value information is information corresponding to a value greater than or equal to the benefit reference value. Thereby, the interest improvement of a game is aimed at.

  Moreover, even if it is not information corresponding to a value greater than or equal to the privilege reference value, a predetermined privilege is granted by winning a grant in the grant lottery process. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the predetermined privilege is given, and it is possible to give many opportunities to give the predetermined privilege.

  Furthermore, the grant lottery process is executed so that the probability of winning the prize varies according to the value corresponding to the privilege numerical information. As a result, even if the bonus numerical information is information corresponding to a value less than the bonus standard value, the bonus numerical information will affect the probability that the bonus will be won in the grant lottery process. Can be increased.

  As described above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game suitably.

  Feature F2. The grant lottery execution means is configured so that the probability of winning in the grant lottery process is higher when the value corresponding to the privilege numerical information of the privilege storage means is larger than when the value is smaller. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, characterized in that

  According to the feature F2, even if the privilege numerical information is information corresponding to a value less than the privilege reference value, a value with a larger value of the privilege numerical information has a higher probability of being awarded in the grant lottery process. Thereby, even if it is a case where privilege numerical information is not the information corresponding to the value beyond a privilege reference value, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to privilege numerical information.

  Feature F3. An erasure unit (a function for executing the process of step S2911 in the sub-side MPU 82) for erasing the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage unit when the predetermined bonus is granted in the grant lottery process. The gaming machine according to Feature F1 or F2, which is provided.

  According to the feature F3, it is possible to restrict the profit due to the privilege numerical information to some extent.

Feature F4. The privilege numerical condition is a configuration that is established in a gaming state corresponding to a privilege (normal AT state),
It is a configuration in which one execution time of the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is ended after the determination trigger,
The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein when the grant lottery process is not executed or when the grant lottery process does not result in a grant win, the privilege numerical information of the privilege storage means can be taken over.

  According to the feature F4, since the bonus numerical information can be taken over when the grant lottery process is not executed or when the grant lottery process is not performed, the bonus numeric information is related to the grant lottery process. The takeover mode is diversified. Thereby, the progress mode of a game will be diversified in relation to privilege numerical value information, and the interest improvement of a game will be aimed at.

Feature F5. The privilege numerical condition is a configuration that is established in an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined gaming state (non-AT state),
The predetermined privilege is that the advantageous gaming state continues,
Features F1 to F4 are provided with means (a function for executing the process of step S2913 in the sub-side MPU 82) to end the advantageous gaming state when the winning lottery process is not successful. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature F5, the grant lottery process exists as a final opportunity to generate the advantageous game state extended game, and the degree of attention to the grant lottery process is increased. In addition, even if the privilege numerical information acquired just before the end of the advantageous gaming state by referring to the privilege numerical information in the grant lottery process that exists as a final opportunity to generate the consecutive game in the advantageous gaming state It is possible to enjoy the benefits. This makes it possible for the player to expect the privilege numerical value condition to be satisfied at any timing of the advantageous gaming state.

Feature F6. Continuous lottery execution for executing a continuous lottery process for determining whether or not a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is to be started after completion of one execution time of the advantageous gaming state when a continuous lottery trigger is reached Means (function to execute the processing of step S2309 in the sub-side MPU 82),
When it is determined by the privilege criterion determination means that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege criterion value, a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started without executing the continuous lottery process. Yes,
The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the grant lottery execution means executes the grant lottery process after the continuous lottery process has failed.

  According to the feature F6, it is possible to diversify the continuation mode of the advantageous game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature F7. Even if it is a case where continuation is lost in the continuous lottery process, the privilege numerical value information stored in the specific storage means in a subsequent post-continuation period is information corresponding to a value greater than the privilege reference value. When it becomes, the game machine according to the feature F6, wherein a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started.

  According to the feature F7, even if the privilege numerical information is not information corresponding to a value greater than or equal to the privilege reference value before the determination is triggered, the privilege numerical value information is set to a value greater than or equal to the privilege reference value in the period after continuation loss. The advantageous gaming state will be linked to the corresponding information. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to set the value corresponding to the bonus numerical information to a larger value before the determination trigger, so the bonus numerical information has a larger value before the determination trigger. The game will be performed while expecting the game, and the interest of the game will be improved.

Feature F8. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
A role lottery execution means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a role lottery process when the start operation means is operated;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
As one game, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling the picture display means in each game (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a winning correspondence granting means for giving a prize corresponding bonus to the player based on the fact that the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process is displayed (winning determination in the main MPU 72) Processing function), and
With
The grant lottery execution means is arranged so that the probability of winning the prize varies depending on not only a value corresponding to the privilege numerical information of the privilege storage means but also a result of the combination lottery process or a winning result in the corresponding game. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, wherein the lottery process is executed.

  According to the feature F8, not only the value corresponding to the privilege numerical information but also the winning combination or winning result in the corresponding game affects the probability of winning the winning in the giving lottery process. As a result, points to be noted in the execution of the grant lottery process are diversified, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Feature F9. When the result of the combination lottery process in the corresponding game is a specific combination winning or when a specific combination winning is generated, the grant lottery process is executed if the combination lottery processing does not result in the winning combination The gaming machine according to feature F8, further comprising means for increasing the number of continued games in the state (function of making an affirmative determination in step S2912 in the sub-side MPU 82).

  According to the feature F9, the number of continuing games in the state where the grant lottery process is executed can be increased even if the prize winning lottery process does not result in the prize winning lottery process even though the particular role winning or the particular role winning is achieved. . Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the player's disadvantage when the specific winning combination or the specific winning combination is not achieved in the giving lottery process.

Feature F10. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The pattern display means is configured to start variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the start operation means and stop variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
With
The privilege numerical value condition is satisfied according to a result of a lottery process executed when the start operation means is operated or a winning result after the variable display of the picture is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of F9 to F9.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature F10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature F11. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of a picture in the plurality of variable display sections based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern in the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
The gaming machine is
A role lottery execution means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a role lottery process when the start operation means is operated;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a winning correspondence granting means for giving a prize corresponding bonus to the player based on the fact that the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process is displayed (winning determination in the main MPU 72) Processing function), and
With
As combinations selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding combination (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enables winning when the plurality of variable display sections are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to Feature F10, wherein the predetermined privilege is to enable a game to be executed in a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the predetermined role is played.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature F11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F11, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. A role lottery execution means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a role lottery process;
A winning correspondence granting unit (a function for executing a winning determination process in the main MPU 72) for granting a winning corresponding privilege corresponding to the winning combination in the winning lottery process;
At least one condition is that the player's advantage is higher than the predetermined game state (non-AT state), in the transition expected state (transition chance state), in which the predetermined combination (normal replay combination) is won in the combination lottery process. Advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to a high advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) (function to execute the processes of steps S1614 to S1617 and steps S1706 to S1709 in the sub-side MPU 82);
Expectation to increase the degree of expectation that the transition to the advantageous gaming state will occur in the transition expected state, on the condition that at least one condition has been won in the role lottery process in the transition expected state Degree improvement means (function to execute the processing of step S1605 and step S1606 in the sub-side MPU 82),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature G1, a transition to the advantageous gaming state can occur by winning a predetermined combination in the transition expected state. As a result, the game is played while expecting to win the predetermined role in the transition expected state, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, if another role is elected in the transition expected state, the expectation that the transition to the advantageous gaming state will occur in the transition expected state is increased, so the player may be elected not only to the predetermined role but also to another role in the transition expected state. Expectations will be diversified, and the roles expected to win will be diversified. As described above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game suitably.

  Feature G2. The game according to Feature G1, wherein the expectation improvement means extends the duration of the transition expected state on the basis of at least one condition that the winning combination winning is made in the winning lottery process. Machine.

  According to the feature G2, since the continuation period of the transition expected state can be extended when another role is won, it is possible to increase the expectation that the transition to the advantageous gaming state will occur.

Feature G3. A transition lottery execution means (a function for executing the process of step S1609 in the sub-side MPU 82) that executes a transition lottery process when the predetermined winning combination is won in the role lottery process in the transition expected state;
The advantageous transition means is for transitioning the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state when the transition lottery process results in the transition winning.
The expectation improvement means increases the probability of winning a transition in the transition lottery process, on the condition that at least one condition has been won in the separate lottery process in the role lottery process Or the gaming machine described in G2.

  According to the feature G3, when the winning combination is won, the probability of winning the transition in the transition lottery process can be increased, so that the expectation that the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs can be increased.

  Feature G4. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein a probability of winning the predetermined combination at least in the transition expected state is higher than a probability of winning the separate combination.

  According to the feature G4, it is possible to increase the frequency of winning a predetermined combination in the expected transition state, and it is possible to give many opportunities to expect the transition to the advantageous gaming state. In addition, when a winning combination with a low winning probability is won, a situation advantageous to the player may occur. However, the winning combination with the above-described feature G1 has a lower winning probability than the predetermined winning combination. When winning, the expectation of the transition to the advantageous gaming state is high, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when winning another role.

  Feature G5. One of the characteristics G1 to G4, wherein the predetermined combination serves as an opportunity for granting the advantageous gaming state in the transition expected state, but does not serve as an opportunity for granting in another gaming state. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature G5, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fact that the predetermined winning combination is won in the transition expected state.

  Feature G6. The game according to any one of the characteristics G1 to G5, wherein the different role does not serve as an opportunity to give the advantageous game state in the transition expected state, but serves as the grant opportunity in another game state. Machine.

  According to the feature G6, it is possible to give the player recognition that the different role is an advantageous role, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to winning the different role.

  Feature G7. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, wherein the winning correspondence granting unit grants a predetermined winning corresponding privilege when the predetermined winning combination is won in the winning lottery process.

  According to the feature G7, it is possible to increase the advantage in the case of a predetermined combination, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to winning a predetermined combination.

Feature G8. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The pattern display means is configured to start variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the start operation means and stop variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
With
The combination lottery execution means executes the combination lottery process when the start operation means is operated,
The winning correspondence granting means grants the winning corresponding privilege as a winning occurrence when a stop pattern corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process is displayed when the variable display of the pattern is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G7.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature G8, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  Feature G9. When the predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery process, the combination is a combination in which a winning occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means in relation to the variable display position of the pattern. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature G9, when a predetermined winning combination is won, a corresponding winning occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means, so that it is clear to the player that an opportunity to shift to the advantageous gaming state has occurred. It can be recognized.

Feature G10. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of a picture in the plurality of variable display sections based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern in the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
As a combination selected by the combination lottery process, an order-corresponding combination (first bell combination and second bell combination) that allows a winning to be generated when variable display of a picture on the plurality of variable display units is stopped in a predetermined order. Role) exists,
The gaming machine according to claim G8 or G9, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding role is won.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature G10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
A role lottery execution means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a role lottery process when the start operation means is operated;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
As one game, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling the picture display means in each game (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a winning correspondence granting means for giving a prize corresponding bonus to the player based on the fact that the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process is displayed (winning determination in the main MPU 72) Processing function), and
A special waiting period (start wait time) for waiting for the progress of the game when a special event occurs in which the role lottery process becomes a special lottery result or the picture stop result becomes a special stop result Special standby period setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S805 to S806, steps S812 to S813, and steps S906 to S907 in the main MPU 72),
When the special event occurs in a standby avoidance situation (when the value of the bonus AT counter is 1 or more, a penalty situation), the special standby period setting means prevents the special standby period from being set or Standby avoidance means for setting a standby period shorter than the special standby period (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S804 in the main MPU 72, a function of performing an affirmative determination in step S811, and a negative determination in step S901) Function to perform a negative determination in step S902, and a function to perform an affirmative determination in step S905),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to feature H1, it is emphasized that a special event has occurred through the setting of the special standby period by setting a special standby period when a special event that is either a special role winning or a special role winning occurs. It becomes possible to do. As a result, the player feels unexpected that the special waiting period has been set, and the sense of exaltation for the occurrence of the special event is enhanced. On the other hand, when the special standby period is set, the progress of the game is waited, and there may be a situation that makes the player think that it is bothersome. On the other hand, in such a situation, it is possible to generate the special standby period in a preferable situation by preventing the special standby period from being set or shortening the standby period. As described above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game suitably.

Feature H2. The special standby period setting means starts the measurement of the special standby period after the variable display of the pattern is stopped,
The gaming machine according to claim H1, wherein the variable display control means waits for the start of variable display of the picture during the special standby period.

  According to the feature H2, when the special standby period is set, the start of the variable display of the pattern is waited, so that the player can clearly recognize that the special standby period is set. . On the other hand, if the special standby period is set in an unfavorable situation, the variable display of the picture is not started despite the fact that the game is about to be started, which may be annoying. On the other hand, in such a situation, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring by setting no special standby period or shortening the standby period.

  Feature H3. It is characterized by comprising production control means (function to execute the processing of step S1109 and step S1206 in the sub-side MPU 82) so that the special event response production is executed by the production execution means during the special standby period. The gaming machine according to the feature H1 or H2.

  According to the feature H3, since the special event response effect is executed during the special standby period, it is possible to enhance the feeling of exhilaration that the special event has occurred. On the other hand, if a special standby period is set in an unfavorable situation and the special event response effect is executed, the player may be uncomfortable, but in such a situation, the special standby period is not set. Or by shortening the waiting period, the special event response effect is not executed.

Feature H4. Advantageous transition means (mainly) for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (bonus AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state when the special event occurs in the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state) A function of executing the processes of steps S802 to S803, steps S809 to S810 and steps S903 to S904 in the side MPU 72),
When the special event occurs in the advantageous gaming state, the number of executions of the advantageous gaming state can be increased or the number of continued games in the advantageous gaming state can be increased.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the waiting avoidance situation is a situation in which the advantageous gaming state is established.

  According to the feature H4, the special standby period is set for the occurrence of a special event that triggers the transition to the advantageous gaming state, thereby emphasizing the transition to the advantageous gaming state and the special standby period as a break of the gaming state. Can exist, and the effect of enhancing the player's sense of exaltation can be achieved. On the other hand, in the advantageous gaming state, the player is more aware of the game, so if a special waiting period is set for the occurrence of a special event on the way, it may make the player think that it is annoying There is sex. On the other hand, in such a situation, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring by setting no special standby period or shortening the standby period.

Feature H5. Advantageous transition means (main game state) for transferring a gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (bonus AT state) in which a player's advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state when the special event occurs in a predetermined gaming state (non-AT state) The function of executing steps S802 to S803, steps S809 to S810 and steps S903 to S904 in the side MPU 72),
When the special event occurs in a penalty situation, a transition restricting means for restricting the transition of the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state by the advantageous transition means (function to make a negative determination in step S901 in the main MPU 72) And a function of making a negative determination in step S902),
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the waiting avoidance situation is the penalty situation.

  According to the feature H5, by setting a special standby period for the occurrence of a special event that triggers the transition to the advantageous gaming state, the special standby period is used as an emphasis on the transition to the advantageous gaming state and as a break of the gaming state Can exist, and the effect of enhancing the player's sense of exaltation can be achieved. On the other hand, even if a special event occurs in the penalty situation, the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur, so if the special standby period is set in such a situation, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable. . On the other hand, in such a situation, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring by setting no special standby period or shortening the standby period.

Feature H6. As combinations selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding combination (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enables winning when the plurality of variable display sections are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to the feature H4 or H5, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding role is achieved.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature H6, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature H7. When the special lottery result is obtained, the pre-start standby period setting means (in the main MPU 72) waits for the variable display of the picture until the pre-start standby period (first freeze time, second freeze time) elapses in the game. A function of executing the processing of step S310 and step S408),
Any of the features H1 to H6, wherein the waiting period before starting setting means sets the waiting period before starting when the special lottery result is obtained even in the waiting avoidance situation. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature H7, when a special lottery result is obtained, a pre-start waiting period is set in the game, so that the player can clearly recognize that the special lottery result has been obtained. This allows the player to feel surprised about the fact that the waiting period before the start has been set, to raise his mood, and to stop the game while recognizing that the result is a special lottery result. Is possible. In addition, since such a function of the waiting period before start can occur regardless of whether or not it is a waiting avoidance situation, the function is suitably generated by setting the waiting period before starting even in the waiting avoidance situation. It becomes possible to make it.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features H1 to H7, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The inventions of the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, the feature E group, the feature F group, the feature G group, and the feature H group can solve the following problems. It is.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  More specifically, for the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
A role lottery execution means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a role lottery process when the start operation means is operated;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided in correspondence with the variable display unit and operated to stop variable display of the pattern in the corresponding variable display unit;
The variable display section corresponding to the stop operation means is started based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the variable display of the picture in the plurality of variable display sections is started based on the start operation means being operated. Variable display control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the picture display means so that the variable display of the picture in FIG.
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a winning correspondence granting means for giving a prize corresponding bonus to the player based on the fact that the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process is displayed (winning determination in the main MPU 72) Processing function), and
In a gaming machine equipped with
As a winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, if a winning combination is obtained in the winning lottery process, a specified winning combination (ordinary replay winning combination) is generated regardless of the stop order of variable display of the pattern in each variable display section. ) Exists,
First control means (main-side MPU 72) having the variable display control means, and second control means (sub-side MPU 82) that executes predetermined control based on transmission information transmitted by the first control means. ,
The first control means includes
Order selection means for selecting the order in which the variable display of the patterns on each variable display unit should be stopped when the specified combination is won in the combination lottery process (function of executing step S405 in the main MPU 72) When,
Order specifying means for specifying that a correct order event has occurred in which the variable display of the picture in each variable display section is stopped in the order selected by the order selecting means (executes normal replay push order determination processing in the main MPU 72) Function)
With
The second control means includes
Order notification control means (function to execute the processing of step S1109 and step S3505 in the sub-side MPU 82) for notifying selection order information corresponding to the order selected by the order selection means;
Notification determining means (function for executing the process of step S3504 in the sub-side MPU 82) for determining whether or not to notify the selection order information by the order notification control means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I1, not only the first control means but also the second control means is provided as the control means, thereby reducing the processing load of the first control means.

  In this case, the first control means deliberately selects the order in which the variable display of the pattern should be stopped when the specified combination winning in which the predetermined winning is generated regardless of the stop order of the variable display of the pattern is selected, and the second control In the means, control for notifying the selection order information is executed as necessary. Then, in the first control means, it is specified whether or not the selected order matches the actual stop order. As a result, even if the progress control of the gaming state is independently performed in the second control means, the progress of the gaming state is not required without transmitting information from the second control means to the first control means. The situation can be grasped by the first control means.

  As described above, it is possible to further optimize the configuration in the configuration in which the processing load of each control unit is reduced by providing a plurality of control units.

  Feature I2. The gaming machine according to the feature I1, wherein the order selection means always selects the order when the specified combination is won in the combination lottery process.

  According to the feature I2, since the selection of the order is always performed when the specified combination winning is made, it is not necessary to switch between the situation where the order is selected and the situation where the order is not selected. Is simplified.

Feature I3. The second control means executes progress management means (in-AT processing in the sub-side MPU 82) for managing the progress of the advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state). Function)
The gaming machine according to claim I1 or I2, wherein the notification determination unit causes the sequence notification control unit to notify the selection order information according to a progress state of the advantageous gaming state.

  According to the feature I3, since the progress of the advantageous gaming state is independently managed by the second control means, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature I1, information from the second control unit to the first control unit is provided even if the progress of the advantageous gaming state is independently managed by the second control unit. It is possible for the first control means to grasp the progress status of the advantageous gaming state without the need for transmission.

Feature I4. The progress management means, when the continuation condition of the advantageous gaming state is satisfied, the continuation setting for starting a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state after one execution time of the advantageous gaming state is completed. Means (a function of executing the setting process of the AT state before branching in the sub-side MPU 82 and the processes of steps S2909 to S2911),
The notification determination unit causes the sequence notification control unit to notify the selection order information in a situation where the execution time of the advantageous gaming state is continued by the continuation setting unit. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the characteristic I4, even when the progress of the advantageous game state is managed independently by the second control means, the advantageous game is not required to be transmitted from the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to grasp the occurrence of a state resort.

  Feature I5. The gaming machine according to I3 or I4, wherein the specified combination is a combination having the highest probability of winning in the combination lottery process at least in the advantageous gaming state.

  According to the feature I5, it is possible to increase the chances of grasping the progress status of the advantageous gaming state in the first control means, and when the progress status of the advantageous gaming state changes, the first control means promptly detects it. It becomes possible to grasp.

Feature I6. As combinations selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding combination (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enables winning when the plurality of variable display sections are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I5, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding role is achieved.

  According to the feature I6, it is possible to reliably generate an order-corresponding winning prize in the advantageous gaming state, which is advantageous to the player.

  Feature I7. The first control unit is a specific output setting unit (step S3112 and step S3112 in the main side MPU 72) that performs external output setting corresponding to the specific based on the fact that the correct order event has been specified by the order specifying unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I6, which includes a function of executing the processing of S3404.

  According to the characteristic I7, even when the progress control of the gaming state is independently performed in the second control means, the game is not required to transmit information from the second control means to the first control means. External output setting corresponding to the progress of the state can be performed in the first control means.

  Feature I8. The specific output setting means is configured to set the external output setting corresponding to the specification based on the fact that the occurrence of the correct order event is specified a plurality of times by the order specifying means. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature I8, when the correct answer order event occurs by chance, the possibility that the external output setting corresponding to the specific will be performed is reduced.

  Feature I9. The specific output setting means is specified by the order specifying means a plurality of times that the correct order event has occurred without causing an event that the correct order event does not occur when the specified combination is won. The gaming machine according to I8, wherein the external output setting corresponding to the specific is performed based on the fact.

  According to the feature I9, when a correct answer order event occurs by chance, the possibility of performing a specific external output setting is reduced.

  Feature I10. The second control means is configured to notify different order information corresponding to an order different from the order selected by the order selection means (the processing in steps S3507 and S3605 in the sub-side MPU 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I9, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of

  According to the feature I10, it is possible to positively prevent the correct order event from occurring by chance, and it is possible to increase the accuracy of the content grasped by the first control means.

Feature I11. The second control means executes progress management means (in-AT processing in the sub-side MPU 82) for managing the progress of the advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state). Function)
The notification determining means is configured to notify the selection order information by the order notification control means in accordance with the progress of the advantageous gaming state.
The gaming machine according to Feature I10, wherein the out-of-order notification control unit is configured to notify the out-of-order information in accordance with a progress status of the advantageous gaming state.

  According to the feature I11, since the progress of the advantageous gaming state is independently managed in the second control means, the processing load on the first control means can be reduced. In this case, the selection order information is notified according to the progress status of the advantageous gaming state, and the different order information is notified according to the progress status of the advantageous gaming state. As a result, even if the progress of the advantageous gaming state is uniquely managed by the second control means, the progress of the advantageous gaming state is not required without transmitting information from the second control means to the first control means. The situation can be accurately grasped by the first control means.

Feature I12. The progress management means, when the continuation condition of the advantageous gaming state is satisfied, the continuation setting for starting a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state after one execution time of the advantageous gaming state is completed. Means (a function of executing the setting process of the AT state before branching in the sub-side MPU 82 and the processes of steps S2909 to S2911),
The notification determining means is configured to notify the selection order information by the order notification control means when the execution time of the advantageous gaming state is continued by the continuation setting means.
The out-of-order notification control means is configured to notify the out-of-order information in a situation different from a situation in which the execution state of the advantageous gaming state is continued by the continuation setting means. The gaming machine according to feature I11.

  According to the feature I12, even if the progress of the advantageous gaming state is uniquely managed by the second control means, the advantageous game is not required to transmit information from the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to accurately grasp the occurrence of a state retreat.

Feature I13. The first control means executes a specific response process (steps S3112 and S3404 in the main MPU 72) based on the fact that the occurrence of the correct order event is specified a plurality of times by the order specifying means. Function to execute the process of)
The second control means includes second-side order specifying means (function for executing the processes of steps S3510 and S3608 in the sub-side MPU 82) for specifying that the correct answer order event has occurred,
The out-of-order notification control means is configured to notify the out-of-order information based on the fact that the correct order event has been specified by the second-side order specifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of features I10 to I12.

  According to the characteristic I13, since the specific handling process is executed when the correct order event occurs a plurality of times in the first control means, the specific handling process may be performed when the correct order event occurs by chance. Reduced. Further, the second control means is configured to execute a different order notification when a correct order event occurs. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the out-of-order notification from being performed more than necessary.

  Feature I14. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I13, wherein when the specified combination is won, a winning is generated regardless of an operation timing of the stop operation means in relation to the variable display position of the pattern. .

  According to the feature I14, the player's profit can be increased depending on whether the selection order information is notified or not by deliberately selecting the order in which the variable display of the picture should be stopped when the so-called “missing-out” rule winning combination is won. It does not fluctuate. As a result, it is difficult to create restrictions in informing the selection order information.

Feature I15. As the plurality of variable display sections, a left variable display section (left reel 32L), a middle variable display section (middle reel 32M), and a right variable display section (right reel 32R) are provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I14, wherein the order selection means does not select an order in which the first stop order is the left variable display section.

  According to feature I15, since a player generally stops the left variable display portion first, the correct order event occurs by chance by not selecting the order in which the first stop order is the left variable display portion. It becomes possible to reduce the possibility of doing.

  Feature I16. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I15, wherein the specified combination is a re-game combination.

  According to the feature I16, it is possible to achieve the above-described effects using the re-gamer.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features I1 to I16, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. One or more configurations of H7, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
A role lottery execution means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a role lottery process when the start operation means is operated;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided in correspondence with the variable display unit and operated to stop variable display of the pattern in the corresponding variable display unit;
The variable display section corresponding to the stop operation means is started based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the variable display of the picture in the plurality of variable display sections is started based on the start operation means being operated. Variable display control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the picture display means so that the variable display of the picture in FIG.
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a winning correspondence granting means for giving a prize corresponding bonus to the player based on the fact that the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process is displayed (winning determination in the main MPU 72) Processing function), and
In a gaming machine equipped with
As a winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, if a winning combination is obtained in the winning lottery process, a specified winning combination (ordinary replay winning combination) is generated regardless of the stop order of variable display of the pattern in each variable display section. ) Exists,
First control means (main-side MPU 72) having the variable display control means, and second control means (sub-side MPU 82) that executes predetermined control based on transmission information transmitted by the first control means. ,
The first control means includes
Order selection means for selecting the order in which the variable display of the patterns on each variable display unit should be stopped when the specified combination is won in the combination lottery process (function of executing step S405 in the main MPU 72) When,
Order specifying means for specifying that a correct order event has occurred in which the variable display of the picture in each variable display section is stopped in the order selected by the order selecting means (executes normal replay push order determination processing in the main MPU 72) Function)
With
The second control means includes
Order notification control means (function to execute the processing of step S1109 and step S3505 in the sub-side MPU 82) for notifying selection order information corresponding to the order selected by the order selection means;
Different order notification control means (function to execute the processing of step S3507 and step S3605 in the sub-side MPU 82) that notifies different order information corresponding to an order different from the order selected by the order selection means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J1, not only the first control means but also the second control means is provided as the control means, thereby reducing the processing load on the first control means.

  In this case, the first control means deliberately selects the order in which the variable display of the pattern is to be stopped when the specified combination winning in which the predetermined prize is generated regardless of the stop order of the variable display of the pattern. The second control means may notify the selected order or may notify the order different from the selected order. Then, in the first control means, it is specified whether or not the selected order matches the actual stop order. As a result, even if the progress control of the gaming state is independently performed in the second control means, the progress of the gaming state is not required without transmitting information from the second control means to the first control means. The situation can be grasped by the first control means.

  In particular, by reporting the out-of-order information, it is possible to actively prevent the correct-order event from occurring by chance, and to increase the accuracy of the content grasped by the first control means. Become.

  As described above, it is possible to further optimize the configuration in the configuration in which the processing load of each control unit is reduced by providing a plurality of control units.

Feature J2. The second control means executes progress management means (in-AT processing in the sub-side MPU 82) for managing the progress of the advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state). Function)
The order notification control means is configured to notify the selection order information according to a progress status of the advantageous gaming state,
The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the out-of-order notification control means is configured to notify the out-of-order information according to the progress of the advantageous gaming state.

  According to the feature J2, since the progress of the advantageous gaming state is independently managed by the second control means, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced. In this case, the selection order information is notified according to the progress status of the advantageous gaming state, and the different order information is notified according to the progress status of the advantageous gaming state. As a result, even if the progress of the advantageous gaming state is uniquely managed by the second control means, the progress of the advantageous gaming state is not required without transmitting information from the second control means to the first control means. The situation can be accurately grasped by the first control means.

Feature J3. The progress management means, when the continuation condition of the advantageous gaming state is satisfied, the continuation setting for starting a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state after one execution time of the advantageous gaming state is completed. Means (a function of executing the setting process of the AT state before branching in the sub-side MPU 82 and the processes of steps S2909 to S2911),
The order notification control means is configured to notify the selection order information when the execution time of the advantageous gaming state is continued by the continuation setting means.
The out-of-order notification control means is configured to notify the out-of-order information in a situation different from a situation in which the execution state of the advantageous gaming state is continued by the continuation setting means. A gaming machine according to feature J2.

  According to the feature J3, even if the progress of the advantageous gaming state is uniquely managed by the second control means, the advantageous game is not required to transmit information from the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to accurately grasp the occurrence of a state retreat.

  Feature J4. The gaming machine according to feature J2 or J3, wherein the prescribed combination is a combination having the highest probability of winning in the combination lottery process at least in the advantageous gaming state.

  According to the feature J4, it is possible to increase the chances of grasping the progress status of the advantageous gaming state in the first control means. It becomes possible to grasp.

Feature J5. As combinations selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding combination (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enables winning when the plurality of variable display sections are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J4, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding role is achieved.

  According to the feature J5, in the advantageous gaming state, it becomes possible to reliably generate an order-corresponding winning combination, which is advantageous to the player.

Feature J6. The first control means executes a specific response process (steps S3112 and S3404 in the main MPU 72) based on the fact that the occurrence of the correct order event is specified a plurality of times by the order specifying means. Function to execute the process of)
The second control means includes second-side order specifying means (function for executing the processes of steps S3510 and S3608 in the sub-side MPU 82) for specifying that the correct answer order event has occurred,
The out-of-order notification control means is configured to notify the out-of-order information based on the fact that the correct order event has been specified by the second-side order specifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5.

  According to the feature J6, since the first control means executes the specific response process when the correct order event occurs multiple times, there is a possibility that the specific response process may be performed when the correct order event occurs by chance. Reduced. Further, the second control means is configured to execute a different order notification when a correct order event occurs. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the out-of-order notification from being performed more than necessary.

  Feature J7. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6, wherein the order selection means always selects the order when the specified combination is won in the combination lottery process.

  According to the feature J7, the content of the processing is performed so as to grasp the progress status of the gaming state uniquely managed by the second control means by always selecting the order when the specified role winning is won. There is no need to change things. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Feature J8. The first control unit is a specific output setting unit (step S3112 and step S3112 in the main side MPU 72) that performs external output setting corresponding to the specific based on the fact that the correct order event has been specified by the order specifying unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of S3404.

  According to the feature J8, even when the progress control of the game state is independently performed in the second control means, the game is not required to transmit information from the second control means to the first control means. External output setting corresponding to the progress of the state can be performed in the first control means.

  Feature J9. The specific output setting means is configured to perform the external output setting corresponding to the specification based on the fact that the occurrence of the correct order event is specified a plurality of times by the order specifying means. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature J9, when the correct answer order event occurs by chance, the possibility that the external output setting corresponding to the specific will be performed is reduced.

  Feature J10. The specific output setting means is specified by the order specifying means a plurality of times that the correct order event has occurred without causing an event that the correct order event does not occur when the specified combination is won. The game machine according to Feature J9, wherein the external output setting corresponding to the specific is performed based on the fact.

  According to the feature J10, when the correct answer order event occurs by chance, the possibility of performing the specific external output setting is reduced.

  Feature J11. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J10, wherein when the specified combination is won, a winning occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means in relation to the variable display position of the picture. .

  According to the feature J11, the player's profit can be increased depending on whether or not the selection order information is informed by deliberately selecting the order in which the variable display of the pattern should be stopped when the so-called “missing-out” rule winning combination is won. It does not fluctuate. As a result, it is difficult to create restrictions in informing the selection order information.

Feature J12. As the plurality of variable display sections, a left variable display section (left reel 32L), a middle variable display section (middle reel 32M), and a right variable display section (right reel 32R) are provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J11, wherein the order selection means does not select an order in which the first stop order is the left variable display portion.

  According to the feature J12, since the player generally stops the left variable display portion first, the correct order event occurs accidentally by not selecting the order in which the first stop order is the left variable display portion. It becomes possible to reduce the possibility of doing.

  Feature J13. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J12, wherein the prescribed combination is a re-game combination.

  According to the feature J13, it is possible to achieve the above-described effects using the re-gamer.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features J1 to J13, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. One or more configurations of H7, features I1 to I16, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. First control means (main-side MPU 72) and second control means (sub-side MPU 82) for executing predetermined control based on transmission information transmitted by the first control means,
The second control means includes
Informing control means (in the sub-side MPU 82) that makes it possible to give a bonus to the player in each of the first advantageous gaming state (bonus AT state) and the second advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) The function of executing the processing of step S1109 and step S1806),
A second-side ending means (a function for executing the process of step S2913 in the sub-side MPU 82) for ending the second advantageous gaming state when the termination condition for the second advantageous gaming state is satisfied;
With
The first control means includes first side ending means (function for executing the process of step S1009 in the main side MPU 72) for ending the first advantageous gaming state when the ending condition for the first advantageous gaming state is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by comprising.

  According to the characteristic K1, not only the first control means but also the second control means is provided as the control means, thereby reducing the processing load on the first control means. In addition, in the configuration in which the advantageous game state is diversified because the second control means performs notification that enables the provision of a privilege to the player in each of the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state. The processing load of the first control means can be reduced.

  In this case, the determination of the end trigger of the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state is not all performed by the second control means, but the end trigger determination for the first advantageous game state is performed by the first control means. Done. As a result, it is possible to execute special processing in the first control means in accordance with the progress of the first advantageous gaming state, and to enhance the effect while reducing the processing load on the first control means. It becomes possible.

  As described above, it is possible to further optimize the configuration in the configuration in which the processing load of each control unit is reduced by providing a plurality of control units.

  Feature K2. The first control means sets a progress standby setting means for setting a progress standby period (end wait time) for waiting for the progress of the game in the game execution means (reel unit 31) according to the progress of the first advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine according to Feature K1, further comprising (a function of executing processing in Step S1011 in the main MPU 72).

  According to the feature K2, the progress waiting period is set according to the progress state of the first advantageous gaming state, so that the progress of the first advantageous gaming state is given to the player through the setting of the progress waiting period, while giving the player an unexpectedness. It is possible to make the player recognize the situation.

Feature K3. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
A role lottery execution means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a role lottery process when the start operation means is operated;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
As one game, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling the picture display means in each game (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a winning correspondence granting means for giving a prize corresponding bonus to the player based on the fact that the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process is displayed (winning determination in the main MPU 72) Processing function), and
With
The game machine according to claim K2, wherein the progress standby setting means sets the progress standby period in accordance with the progress status of the first advantageous gaming state, thereby waiting for the progress of the game.

  According to the feature K3, the progress of the game is waited by setting the progress waiting period according to the progress state of the first advantageous gaming state. In this case, the player feels surprising that the progress of the game has been waited, and can grasp the progress of the first advantageous gaming state by grasping that the progress waiting period is set. Become.

Feature K4. The progress standby setting means starts the measurement of the progress standby period after the variable display of the pattern is stopped,
The game machine according to claim K3, wherein the variable display control means waits for the start of variable display of the picture during the progress standby period.

  According to the feature K4, when the progress standby period is set, the start of the variable display of the pattern is waited, so that the player can clearly recognize that the progress standby period is set. .

  Feature K5. The game according to Feature K4, further comprising means (a function of executing the processing of Steps S1109 and S1208 in the sub-side MPU 82) so that the progress standby response effect is executed during the progress standby period. Machine.

  According to the feature K5, it is possible to execute an effect according to the progress status of the first advantageous gaming state, and the entertainment of the game is improved.

Feature K6. A role lottery execution means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a role lottery process;
A winning correspondence granting unit (a function for executing a winning determination process in the main MPU 72) for granting a winning corresponding privilege when a winning corresponding to the winning combination in the winning lottery process occurs;
With
The first control means at least confirms that the correspondence result that is one of the result of the combination lottery process and the result of the winning is the first correspondence result (first to third special replay winning combination, losing result). As a condition, first result corresponding transition means for shifting the gaming state to the first advantageous gaming state (function of executing the processing of steps S802 to S803, steps S809 to S810 and steps S903 to S904 in the main MPU 72) )
The second control means includes
Second result correspondence transition means (step S1614 in the sub-side MPU 82) that transitions the gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state on the basis of at least one condition that the correspondence result is the second correspondence result (normal replay winning combination). The function of executing the process of step S1617),
Event correspondence transition means for transitioning the gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state on the basis of at least one condition that an event different from the correspondence result has become a corresponding event (the processing of steps S1706 to S1709 in the sub-side MPU 82 is executed) Function)
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, comprising:

  According to the feature K6, the transition patterns are different between the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state, thereby diversifying the game and improving the interest of the game. In this case, the transition pattern of the second advantageous gaming state is more complicated than the transition pattern of the first advantageous gaming state, thereby diversifying the game while reducing the processing load of the first control means. It becomes possible.

Feature K7. The first control means starts a new execution time of the first advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the first continuation condition is satisfied when one execution time of the first advantageous gaming state ends. Means (function to execute the process of step S219 in the main MPU 72),
The second control means starts a second execution time of the second advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the second continuation condition is satisfied when one execution time of the second advantageous gaming state ends. Means (function to execute the setting process of the AT state before branching in the sub-side MPU 82 and the processes of steps S2909 to S2911),
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, wherein there are more patterns that satisfy the second continuation condition than patterns that satisfy the first continuation condition.

  According to the feature K7, the continuation condition is made different in the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state, thereby diversifying the game and improving the interest of the game. In this case, since the continuation condition establishment pattern for the second advantageous gaming state is larger than the continuation condition establishment pattern for the first advantageous gaming state, the game is performed while reducing the processing load of the first control means. Can be diversified.

Feature K8. The second control means includes
When the numerical value condition is established in the second advantageous gaming state (the special point is won in the special point lottery process), the numerical value information (privilege point) is stored in the privilege storage means (the privilege point counter in the sub RAM 84). Storage execution means for storing (function to execute the processing of step S2005, step S2007, step S2011 and step S2504 in the sub-side MPU 82);
When the determination is triggered, the privilege standard determination unit (step S2301 in the sub-side MPU 82) determines whether or not the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage unit is information corresponding to a value greater than or equal to the privilege reference value. And the function of executing the process of step S2609),
With
The features K1 to K7, wherein a new execution time of the second advantageous gaming state is started when it is determined by the privilege criterion determining means that the information corresponds to a value greater than or equal to the privilege criterion value. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature K8, the second advantageous gaming state continues because the privilege numerical information stored when the privilege numerical condition is satisfied in the second advantageous gaming state becomes information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value. In the second advantageous gaming state, the player plays the game while expecting that the privilege numerical condition is satisfied, and performs the game while expecting that the privilege numerical information becomes information corresponding to a value greater than or equal to the privilege reference numerical value. It becomes. Thereby, the interest improvement of a game is aimed at. In this case, since the second setting of the second advantageous gaming state in relation to the privilege numerical value information is performed by the second control means, the interest of the game is improved while reducing the processing load of the first control means. Is possible.

Feature K9. When the second control means becomes a continuous lottery opportunity, the continuous lottery of whether or not to start a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state after one execution time of the advantageous gaming state is completed A continuous lottery execution means for executing the process (function of executing the process of step S2309 in the sub-side MPU 82);
The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics K1 to K8, wherein when the continuous lottery process is performed, a new execution time of the second advantageous gaming state is started.

  According to the feature K9, when the continuous winning lottery process results in the continuous winning, the second advantageous gaming state continues, so the player plays the game while expecting the continuous winning in the second advantageous gaming state. As a result, the interest of the game is improved. In this case, since the second setting of the second advantageous gaming state in relation to the continuous lottery process is performed by the second control means, the game interest is improved while reducing the processing load of the first control means. Is possible.

Feature K10. A role lottery execution means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a role lottery process;
A winning correspondence granting unit (a function for executing a winning determination process in the main MPU 72) for granting a winning corresponding privilege when a winning corresponding to the winning combination in the winning lottery process occurs;
With
The first control means performs the remaining execution of the first advantageous gaming state on at least one condition that a correspondence result that is one of the result of the combination lottery process and the result of the winning becomes the first correspondence result. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K9, further comprising: a number setting means for setting the number of times (a function of executing the processes of steps S803, S810, and S904 in the main MPU 72).

  According to the feature K10, since the first advantageous game state can be extended, the player can play the game while expecting the first advantageous game state, and the game can be improved. In addition, since the remaining number of executions of the first advantageous gaming state is set in relation to the result of the winning lottery process or the winning result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game while reducing the processing load of the first control means. It becomes possible to plan.

Feature K11. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display sections for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
A role lottery execution means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a role lottery process when the start operation means is operated;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided in correspondence with the variable display unit and operated to stop variable display of the pattern in the corresponding variable display unit;
The variable display section corresponding to the stop operation means is started based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the variable display of the picture in the plurality of variable display sections is started based on the start operation means being operated. Variable display control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the picture display means so that the variable display of the picture in FIG.
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a winning correspondence granting means for giving a prize corresponding bonus to the player based on the fact that the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process is displayed (winning determination in the main MPU 72) Processing function), and
With
As combinations selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding combination (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enables winning when the plurality of variable display sections are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state are game states in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding role is won, according to any one of the features K1 to K10. Game machines.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature K11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features K1 to K11, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. One or more configurations of H7, features I1 to I16, features J1 to J13, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The inventions of the feature group I, the feature group J, and the feature group K can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  More specifically, for the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  In addition, in the slot machine, there is known a configuration in which an effect device such as a liquid crystal display device is provided in addition to the reel device, and the interest of the game is improved through the effect executed by the effect device. Further, in the configuration in which the effect device is provided as described above, an effect control unit is provided separately from the main control unit that performs the lottery process and the reel drive control, and the effect control unit controls the effect device. Thus, a configuration is also known in which the processing load of the main control means is reduced.

  Here, it is necessary to further optimize the configuration in the configuration in which the processing load of each control unit is reduced by providing a plurality of control units as in the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this respect. is there.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display sections for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
A role lottery execution means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a role lottery process when the start operation means is operated;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided in correspondence with the variable display unit and operated to stop variable display of the pattern in the corresponding variable display unit;
The variable display section corresponding to the stop operation means is started based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the variable display of the picture in the plurality of variable display sections is started based on the start operation means being operated. Variable display control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the picture display means so that the variable display of the picture in FIG.
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a winning correspondence granting means for giving a prize corresponding bonus to the player based on the fact that the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process is displayed (winning determination in the main MPU 72) Processing function), and
In a gaming machine equipped with
As a combination selected by the combination lottery process, an order-corresponding combination (first bell combination and first combination) that enables the generation of an order-related winning when variable display of the patterns on the plurality of variable display units is stopped in a predetermined order. 2 bell role)
First control means (main MPU 72) having the role lottery execution means and the variable display control means;
Second control means (sub-side MPU 82) that executes notification control so that the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding role is won in the advantageous gaming state (normal AT state);
With
The first control means includes
A winning specifying means (a function for executing the process of step S3203 in the main MPU 72) for specifying whether or not the order winning is generated in the case of winning the order corresponding role;
First setting means for setting an external output indicating that the game state is advantageous based on the fact that the winning correspondence specifying means has specified that the winning corresponding to the order has occurred in the case where the winning combination is won. The function of executing the process of step S3105 in the main-side MPU 72);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature L1, not only the first control means but also the second control means is provided as the control means, thereby reducing the processing load on the first control means. In addition, since the notification control in a predetermined order in the advantageous game state is performed by the second control means, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced in a configuration in which the interest of the game is improved by setting the advantageous game state. It is done.

  In this case, the first control means performs an external output setting indicating that it is in an advantageous gaming state when it is determined that an order-related winning has occurred when the order-corresponding combination is won. As a result, even if the second control means is configured to independently manage the progress of the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is not required to transmit information from the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to make an external output setting indicating that.

  As described above, external output can be suitably performed.

  Feature L2. The first setting means indicates an external output setting indicating that the game is in the advantageous gaming state when the number of times specified by the winning specifying means that the order-corresponding winning has occurred is determined as a plurality of times. The gaming machine according to Feature L1, characterized in that

  According to the feature L2, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an external output setting indicating an advantageous gaming state is performed when an order-related winning is accidentally generated.

  Feature L3. The first setting means determines that the order-specific prize has not been generated by the prize specifying means, and the number of times that the order-specific prize has been specified by the prize specifying means is a plurality of times. The gaming machine according to the characteristic L2, wherein an external output setting is made to indicate that the game is in the advantageous game state when a specific number of times defined as follows is generated.

  According to the feature L3, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an external output setting indicating that the game state is advantageous is performed when an order-related prize is accidentally generated.

Feature L4. As the plurality of variable display sections, a left variable display section (left reel 32L), a middle variable display section (middle reel 32M), and a right variable display section (right reel 32R) are provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the predetermined order does not include an order in which the first stop order is the left variable display unit.

  According to feature L4, since the player generally stops the left variable display portion first, the order in which the first stop order is the left variable display portion is not included as the predetermined order. It is possible to reduce the possibility of occurrence.

  Feature L5. Disadvantage of causing an adverse event to the player based on first stopping variable display of the picture in the variable display unit different from the left variable display unit in the predetermined game state that is not the advantageous game state The gaming machine according to Feature L4, further comprising setting means (function of executing the processes of Steps S1408 and S1411 in the sub-side MPU 82).

  According to the feature L5, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an order-related winning will occur accidentally in a predetermined gaming state.

  Feature L6. The first control means is an external indicating that the game is not in the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the winning specifying means has specified that the winning corresponding to the order has not occurred when the winning combination is won. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, further comprising second setting means for performing output setting (a function of executing processing in step S3107 in the main MPU 72).

  According to the feature L6, whether or not an order-related winning has occurred both in the case of performing an external output setting indicating that it is in an advantageous gaming state and in the case of performing an external output setting indicating that it is not in an advantageous gaming state Can be monitored. As a result, the types of events to be monitored are suppressed, and the processing load is reduced.

Feature L7. The first setting means performs an external output setting indicating that the game is in the advantageous gaming state when the number of times specified by the winning specifying means is the first specified number of times that the winning corresponding to the order has occurred. And
The second setting means performs an external output setting indicating that the game state is not in the advantageous gaming state when the number of times specified by the prize specifying means that the order-corresponding winning has not occurred becomes the second specified number of times. What to do,
The gaming machine according to Feature L6, wherein the first specific number of times and the second specific number of times are different.

  According to the feature L7, it is monitored whether or not an order-related winning has occurred both in the case of performing an external output setting indicating an advantageous gaming state and in the case of performing an external output setting indicating that the gaming state is not advantageous. In this configuration, it is possible to set the execution timing and accuracy of the external output setting according to the type of each external output setting.

  Feature L8. The gaming machine of feature L7, wherein the first specified number of times is greater than the second specified number of times.

  According to the feature L8, it is possible to perform the external output setting indicating the advantageous gaming state with high accuracy while enabling the external output setting indicating that the advantageous gaming state is not achieved at an early stage.

  Feature L9. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L8, wherein the order-corresponding combination includes a plurality of combinations.

  According to the feature L9, it is possible to perform external output setting corresponding to an advantageous gaming state at an early stage while increasing the degree of freedom for setting the winning probability of each combination.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features L1 to L9, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The invention of the feature L group can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  More specifically, for the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the above-mentioned example, external output of information is performed in order to make the management computer of the gaming hall recognize the state of the gaming machine. There is room.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. A role lottery execution means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a role lottery process;
A winning correspondence granting unit (a function for executing a winning determination process in the main MPU 72) for granting a winning corresponding privilege when a winning corresponding to the winning combination in the winning lottery process occurs;
With
As a role selected by the winning lottery process, there is a winning maintenance role (CB role) in which the winning state is maintained until a winning corresponding to the winning is generated,
The gaming machine is in a gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than a predetermined gaming state (non-AT state) on the condition that the winning maintenance role is in a winning state The game machine is provided with advantageous transition means (functions for executing the processes of steps S1614 to S1617 and steps S1706 to S1709 in the sub-side MPU 82).

  According to the feature M1, since the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs when the winning maintenance combination is in the winning state, it is possible to limit the period during which the transition to the advantageous gaming state is possible in relation to the winning combination. Become. As a result, the player pays attention to winning the winning maintenance combination and maintaining the winning state of the winning maintenance combination. As described above, it is possible to provide innovative game contents.

“Image display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
As one game, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling the picture display means in each game (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
With
The combination lottery execution means executes the combination lottery process when the start operation means is operated,
The winning correspondence granting means gives the winning correspondence privilege as a winning occurrence when a stop pattern corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process is displayed when the variable display of the pattern is stopped,
Even if the winning winning combination is won, the winning operation corresponding to the winning maintaining role can be avoided by the operation mode of the stop operating means. A winning corresponding to a combination can be generated and can be avoided, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Feature M2. Non-advantageous transition means (main side) for shifting to a non-advantageous game state in which the number of game media of the player at the end does not exceed the number of game media of the player at the start when a winning corresponding to the winning maintenance role occurs The gaming machine according to feature M1, further comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S704 to S706 in the MPU 72).

  According to the feature M2, when the winning maintenance role is won, if the winning is generated, it shifts to the non-advantageous gaming state, while the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs by preventing the winning from being generated. there's a possibility that. Accordingly, it is possible to greatly vary the player's profit depending on whether or not the winning maintenance combination is won, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the winning state of the winning maintenance combination.

  Feature M3. The gaming machine according to feature M2, wherein the non-advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the number of game media of the player at the end is the same as the number of game media of the player at the start.

  According to the feature M3, when winning of the winning winning combination is generated, not only the opportunity to move to the advantageous gaming state disappears but also the non-advantageous gaming state, but in the non-advantageous gaming state, the game medium Although the increase is not expected, there will be no decrease. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player who has unintentionally generated the winning prize winning combination.

Feature M4. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
As one game, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling the picture display means in each game (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
With
The combination lottery execution means executes the combination lottery process when the start operation means is operated,
The winning correspondence granting means gives the winning correspondence privilege as a winning occurrence when a stop pattern corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process is displayed when the variable display of the pattern is stopped,
The gaming machine according to Feature M2 or M3, wherein the non-advantageous gaming state is a gaming state that continues over a plurality of games.

  According to the feature M4, it is possible to greatly vary the player's profit depending on whether or not a winning prize winning combination is generated, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the winning state of the winning maintenance figure. .

  Feature M5. It is provided with a winning notification means (internal state notifying unit 63, function of executing the process of step S707 in the main MPU 72) for executing the winning state notification of the winning state of the winning maintenance role. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M4.

  According to the feature M5, it is possible to urge the player not to generate a prize when the winning maintenance role is won.

Feature M6. External setting means (function to execute the processing of step S3105, step S3404 and step S3406 in the main-side MPU 72) for setting an external output indicating that it is in the advantageous gaming state,
The winning notification means is configured to start the winning state notification before an external output setting indicating that the player is in the advantageous gaming state when the winning maintenance role is won. The gaming machine according to Feature M5, characterized by:

  According to the feature M6, it is possible to notify the player that the winning maintenance role has been won before notifying the outside of the gaming machine.

Feature M7. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided in correspondence with the variable display unit and operated to stop variable display of the pattern in the corresponding variable display unit;
The variable display section corresponding to the stop operation means is started based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the variable display of the picture in the plurality of variable display sections is started based on the start operation means being operated. Variable display control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the picture display means so that the variable display of the picture in FIG.
With
The combination lottery execution means executes the combination lottery process when the start operation means is operated,
The winning correspondence granting means gives the winning correspondence privilege as a winning occurrence when a stop pattern corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process is displayed when the variable display of the pattern is stopped,
When the winning notification means wins the winning maintenance role in the winning lottery process, the winning notification means until the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit to be stopped can be stopped. The game machine according to Feature M5 or M6, characterized in that status notification is started.

  According to the feature M7, it is possible to make the player recognize that the winning maintenance role has been won before a winning corresponding to the winning maintenance role occurs in the game won by the winning maintenance role. It will be possible to avoid the occurrence of winnings corresponding to the winning maintainer.

  Feature M8. If the winning notifying means wins the winning maintaining role in the winning lottery process, the winning status notification is started before the variable display stop operation of the picture becomes possible in the game. The gaming machine according to Feature M7, wherein

  According to the feature M8, it is possible to make the player recognize that the winning keeper has been won before the variable display of the picture in the game is started, and avoid the occurrence of winning corresponding to the winning keeper. It becomes possible.

Feature M9. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
As one game, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling the picture display means in each game (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
With
The combination lottery execution means executes the combination lottery process when the start operation means is operated,
The winning correspondence granting means grants the winning corresponding privilege as a winning occurrence when a stop pattern corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process is displayed when the variable display of the pattern is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M8.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature M9, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature M10. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of a picture in the plurality of variable display sections based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern in the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
As combinations selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding combination (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enables winning when the plurality of variable display sections are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to Feature M9, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding role is achieved.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature M10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features M1 to M10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature N group>
Feature N1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
A role lottery execution means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a role lottery process when the start operation means is operated;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
As one game, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling the picture display means in each game (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the variable display of the picture is stopped, when a stop picture corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process is displayed, the winning correspondence granting means (winning determination process in the main MPU 72) for granting the winning corresponding privilege as a winning occurrence Function to execute)
A first transition means (a function of executing the processing of steps S704 to S706 in the main MPU 72) that transitions to the first gaming state (CB state) when the first transition condition is satisfied;
The second transition means (steps S802 to S803, steps S809 to S810 and steps S903 to S904 in the main MPU 72) that transitions to the second gaming state (bonus AT state) when the second transition condition is satisfied. Function to execute)
When the game of a predetermined number of continuous games is executed in the second gaming state, the game correspondence ending means for ending one execution time of the second gaming state (the processing of steps S1007 to S1012 in the main MPU 72 is executed) Function)
Priority means for giving priority to the game content in the first gaming state in the game in which the transition condition to the second gaming state is satisfied or in the second gaming state when the first transition condition is satisfied. The function of executing the process of step S706 in the main MPU 72),
Game number management means (the processing in step S1005 in the main MPU 72) that handles the game executed under the situation where the game content in the first gaming state is prioritized by the priority means as the digest of the predetermined continuous game number. Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature N1, in the game in which the transition condition to the second gaming state is satisfied or in the second gaming state, the game content in the first gaming state has priority. In this case, the progress to the second gaming state is not completely stopped, but the game executed under the situation where the gaming content in the first gaming state has priority is the number of predetermined continuous games in the second gaming state. Treated as digestion. Thereby, for example, the player does not cause a transition to the first gaming state in the second gaming state, for example, expects a transition to the first gaming state in the second gaming state, for example, In the second gaming state, the player may dare to shift to the first gaming state, or for example, expect to dare to shift to the first gaming state in the second gaming state. As described above, it is possible to provide innovative game contents.

  Note that a configuration in which “the first gaming state is a gaming state that continues over a plurality of games” may be applied.

Feature N2. The second transition means, after completion of transition to the second gaming state after the termination condition of the first gaming state is satisfied under the situation where the priority means gives priority to the game content of the first gaming state Transition means (function of making an affirmative determination in step S1103 and step S1104 in the sub-side MPU 82 and executing the process of step S1106),
In the second gaming state shifted by the transition control of the transition means after the end, the game correspondence ending means is when the remaining number of games of the predetermined continuous game number when the transition control is generated is consumed. The gaming machine according to Feature N1, wherein the game is terminated.

  According to the feature N2, in the game in which the condition for transition to the second gaming state is established or in the second gaming state, when the transition is made to the first gaming state, the second gaming state is entered after the end of the first gaming state. Even so, the second gaming state ends when the remaining predetermined number of continued games after the number of games executed in the first gaming state is subtracted. As a result, the first gaming state and the second gaming state can be associated with each other as compared with the configuration in which the transition of the second gaming state is simply invalidated, and novel gaming contents can be provided. Become.

  Feature N3. The post-termination transition means is a state in which the termination condition of the first gaming state is established under the situation where the priority means gives priority to the game content of the first gaming state, and The gaming machine according to Feature N2, wherein when it becomes, the game machine shifts to the second gaming state.

  According to the feature N3, the second gaming state is not started immediately after the end of the first gaming state, but the second gaming state is not started unless the winning maintenance combination is achieved. Thereby, the player who expects the transition to the second gaming state pays attention to whether or not to win the winning maintenance role after the end of the first gaming state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Feature N4. The number-of-games management means is configured to determine whether the winning state of the winning maintenance role is after the ending condition of the first gaming state is satisfied under the situation where the priority means gives priority to the game contents of the first gaming state. The gaming machine according to the feature N3, wherein the game executed so far is handled as the digest of the predetermined number of continuing games.

  According to the feature N4, after the first gaming state is finished, the game portion required until the winning maintenance role is won is treated as a digest of the predetermined number of continued games in the second gaming state. Thereby, the player who expects to shift to the second gaming state expects to win the winning maintenance role until the completion of the game for the predetermined number of continuing games after the completion of the first gaming state. A game will be performed, and the interest of the game will be improved.

  Feature N5. 5. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N4, wherein the player is more advantageous in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state.

  According to the feature N5, the player prevents the transition to the first gaming state from occurring in the second gaming state or expects the transition to the first gaming state from occurring in the second gaming state. As a result, the degree of attention to the game in the second gaming state is improved. Thereby, the interest improvement of a game is aimed at.

  Feature N6. The gaming machine according to Feature N5, wherein the first gaming state is a gaming state in which the number of game media of the player at the end is not greater than the number of game media of the player at the start.

  According to the feature N6, the player's profit greatly differs depending on whether or not the transition to the first gaming state occurs in the second gaming state. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the second gaming state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature N7. The gaming machine according to Feature N6, wherein the first gaming state is a gaming state in which the number of game media of the player at the end is the same as the number of game media of the player at the start.

  According to the feature N7, an increase in game media cannot be expected in the first game state, but a decrease does not occur. Thereby, it becomes possible to reduce the player's disadvantage when the transition to the first gaming state occurs.

Feature N8. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of a picture in the plurality of variable display sections based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern in the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
As combinations selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding combination (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enables winning when the plurality of variable display sections are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to any one of features N5 to N7, wherein the second gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding role is achieved.

  According to the feature N8, since the predetermined order is notified in the second gaming state, the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

Feature N9. As a role selected by the winning lottery process, there is a winning maintenance role (CB role) in which the winning state is maintained until a winning corresponding to the winning is generated,
The first transition condition is that a winning corresponding to the winning maintenance role occurs,
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N8, wherein the second transition condition is established as at least one condition that the winning state of the winning maintenance role is established.

  According to the feature N9, it is possible to cause a transition to the second gaming state by maintaining the winning state of the winning maintenance role, and it is the second gaming state when a winning corresponding to the winning maintenance role is generated. However, the number of games digested in the first gaming state is subtracted from the predetermined number of continuing games as well as the transition to the first gaming state. As a result, it is possible to greatly vary the progress of the subsequent game depending on whether or not a winning corresponding to the winning maintenance role is generated, and to increase the degree of attention to the game in the winning state of the winning maintenance role. Become.

  The operation of the stop operation means is applied by applying the configuration that “even if the winning maintenance role is won, the occurrence of a winning corresponding to the winning maintenance role can be avoided by the operation mode of the stop operation means”. Depending on the mode, it is possible to generate a winning corresponding to the winning combination and to avoid it, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Feature N10. The second gaming state is configured to have a higher player advantage than the first gaming state,
It is provided with a winning notification means (internal state notifying unit 63, function of executing the process of step S707 in the main MPU 72) for executing the winning state notification of the winning state of the winning maintenance role. The gaming machine according to Feature N9, which is characterized.

  According to the feature N10, it is possible to urge the player not to generate a prize when the winning maintenance role is won.

Feature N11. External setting means for performing an external output setting indicating that the game state is the second gaming state (function to execute the processes of step S3118, step S3408, and step S3703 in the main MPU 72)
The winning notification means is configured to start the winning state notification until an external output setting indicating that the player is in the second gaming state is performed when the winning maintaining role is won. The gaming machine according to Feature N10, wherein:

  According to the feature N11, it is possible to notify the player that the winning maintenance role has been won before notifying the outside of the gaming machine.

Feature N12. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of a picture in the plurality of variable display sections based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern in the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
The winning notification means is configured to start the winning state notification before the variable display of the patterns on all the variable display sections is stopped when the winning combination winning combination is won in the winning lottery process. The gaming machine according to Feature N10 or N11, wherein

  According to the feature N12, it is possible to make the player recognize that the winning maintenance role has been won before the winning corresponding to the winning maintenance role occurs in the game won by the winning maintenance role. It will be possible to avoid the occurrence of winnings corresponding to the winning maintainer.

  Feature N13. The winning notification means is configured to start the winning state notification before the variable display of the pattern is started in the game when the winning maintaining combination is won in the winning lottery process. The gaming machine according to Feature N12, wherein

  According to the feature N13, it is possible for the player to recognize that the winning combination is won before the variable display of the picture in the game is started, and the occurrence of winning corresponding to the winning combination is avoided. It becomes possible.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features N1 to N13, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, and features M1 to M10 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The inventions of the feature M group and the feature N group can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  More specifically, for the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, it is necessary to provide a novel game content in the gaming machine such as the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  A spinning machine such as a slot machine: the rotation of the circulating body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the circulating body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player is made according to the pattern after the stop. A gaming machine that grants bonuses.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Slot machine, 31 ... Reel unit, 32L, 32M, 32R ... Reel, 41 ... Start lever, 42-44 ... Stop button, 63 ... Internal state alerting | reporting part, 66 ... Image display apparatus, 67 ... Bonus point alerting | reporting part, 68 ... Stock notification unit, 69 ... Victory number notification unit, 70 ... Main control device, 72 ... Main side MPU, 73 ... Main side ROM, 74 ... Main side RAM, 80 ... Sub control device, 82 ... Sub side MPU, 83 ... sub-side ROM, 84 ... sub-side RAM.

Claims (1)

A pattern display means comprising a plurality of variable display sections for variably displaying the pattern;
Starting operation means operated to start variable display of the pattern;
A role lottery execution means for executing a role lottery process when the start operation means is operated;
A plurality of stop operation means provided in correspondence with the variable display unit and operated to stop variable display of the pattern in the corresponding variable display unit;
The variable display section corresponding to the stop operation means is started based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the variable display of the picture in the plurality of variable display sections is started based on the start operation means being operated. Variable display control means for controlling the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern is stopped,
A winning correspondence granting means for granting a prize corresponding bonus to a player based on the fact that the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped;
In a gaming machine equipped with
As the winning combination selected by the winning lottery process, when a winning is made in the winning lottery process, a predetermined winning combination in which a predetermined winning occurs regardless of the stop order of variable display of the pattern in each variable display unit, and the plurality And an order corresponding role in which a corresponding winning occurs when variable display of the pattern in the variable display portion is stopped in a predetermined order,
First control means having the variable display control means, and second control means for executing predetermined control based on transmission information transmitted by the first control means,
The first control means includes
Order selection means for selecting the order in which the variable display of the pattern in each variable display unit should be stopped when the specified combination is won in the combination lottery process;
Order identifying means for identifying the occurrence of a correct order event in which variable display of the pattern in each variable display unit is stopped in the order selected by the order selecting means;
With
The second control means includes
Predetermined order notification control means for notifying the predetermined order in a specific gaming state;
Selection order notification control means for notifying selection order information corresponding to the order selected by the order selection means;
In a predetermined situation where a new execution of the specific gaming state is started when one execution of the specific gaming state is completed in a state where the continuation condition of the specific gaming state is satisfied, Notification determining means for performing notification of the selection order information by the selection order notification control means;
Different order notification control means for notifying the different order information corresponding to an order different from the order selected by the order selection means when the situation is different from the predetermined situation;
With
The first control means includes
Means for causing an external output state corresponding to the corresponding winning based on the occurrence of the corresponding winning;
Based on the fact that the correct order event has been specified a plurality of times by the order specifying means without causing an event that the correct order event does not occur in the middle when winning the specified role, Means for achieving a corresponding external output state;
With
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specified combination is a combination having the highest probability of winning in the combination lottery process at least in the specific gaming state.

Images